Service

A163/A251/A252
B047/B048
SERVICE MANUAL
RICOH GROUP COMPANIES
001317MIU
A163/A251/A252/B047/B048
SERVICE MANUAL
A163
SERVICE MANUAL
001317MIU
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained within this
document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best interest of Ricoh
Corporation and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY
FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH CORPORATION.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including desktop images,
used in this document are trademarks, registered trademarks or the property of their
respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion only and for
the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of any trade name, or web
site is intended to convey endorsement or other affiliation with Ricoh products.
2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding
service
techniques,
procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh Corporation. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property. or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh Corporation
LEGEND
PRODUCT CODE
A163
A251
A252
B047
B048
GESTETNER
N/A
N/A
N/A
A040
A041
COMPANY
RICOH
FW740
FW750
FW760
FW770
FW780
SAVIN
N/A
N/A
N/A
7700W
7800W
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO.
*
1
2
3
4
DATE
5/95
5/96
6/98
8/2001
COMMENTS
Original Printing
Revised Pages
Reprint
A251/A252 Addition
B047/B048 Addition
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

PREVENTION OF PHYSICAL INJURY
1. Before disassembling or assembling parts of the copier and peripherals,
make sure that the copier power cord is unplugged.
2. The wall outlet should be near the copier and easily accessible.
3. Note that some components of the copier and the peripherals are supplied
with electrical voltage even if the main switch is turned off.
4. If any adjustment or operation check has to be made with exterior covers off
or open while the main switch is turned on, keep hands away from electrified
or mechanically driven components.
5. The inside and the metal parts of the fusing unit become extremely hot while
the copier is operating. Be careful to avoid touching those components with
your bare hands.
6. The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may
cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving the copier, push the table.
7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turnig to
perform the developer initialization. Keep hands away from any mechanical
and electrical components during this period.
HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

1. Never operate the copier without the ozone filters installed.
2. Always replace the ozone filters with the specified ones at the specified
intervals.
3. Toner and developer are non-toxic, but if you get either of them in your eyes
by accident, it may cause temporary eye discomfort. Try to remove with eye
drops or flush with water as first aid. If unsuccessful, get medical attention.
OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

1. The copier and its peripherals must be installed and maintained by a
customer service representative who has completed the training course on
those models.
2. Caution: The RAM pack on the main control board has a lithium battery
which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the RAM pack only with an
identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire RAM pack.
Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used RAM packs must be handled in
accordance with local regulations.
SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

1. Do not incinerate the toner cartridge or the used toner. Toner dust may ignite
suddenly when exposed to open flame.
2. Dispose of used toner, developer, and organic photoconductors according to
local regulations. (These are non-toxic supplies.)
3. Dispose of replaced parts in accordance with local regulations.
4. When keeping used RAM packs in order to dispose of them later, do not put
more than 100 RAM packs per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
Rev. 06/2004
Table of Contents
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. PAPER PATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
3. DRUM PROCESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
4. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
5. DRIVE LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
6. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

1. DRUM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.1 DRUM CHARACTERISTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
1.2 DRUM DRIVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2. CHARGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2 CHARGE CORONA CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.3 CORONA UNIT VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
3. EXPOSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3.2.1 Basic Operation (Manual Feed) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
3.2.2 Original Jam Check Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
3.2.3 Drive mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
3.3 FL REGULATOR CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11
3.4 MANUAL ID CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
3.4.1 Manual ID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
4. DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
4.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
4.2 DRIVE MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
4.3 CROSS-MIXING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16
4.4.1 Toner Near End Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
SM
A163
Rev. 06/2004
4.4.2 Recovery From Toner (Near) End condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17
4.4.3 Toner Density Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
4.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
4.5.1 Basic Concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
4.5.2 Manual Image Density Bias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
4.6 TONER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20
5. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

5.1 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP (PTL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
5.2 IMAGE TRANSFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
5.3 PAPER SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21
5.4 PICK-OFF MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22
5.5 T/S CORONA CIRCUIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23
6. CLEANING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
6.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
6.2 COLLECTION OF USED TONER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25
7. QUENCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
8. FUSING AND PAPER EXIT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
8.1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-27
8.2 DRIVE MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
8.2.1 Fusing Unit Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28
8.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
8.3.1 Fusing Circuit Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29
8.3.2 Overheat Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30
8.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
8.5 ENERGY SAVER FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
8.6 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE HEIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
9. ROLL CUTTING RAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

9.1 ROLL CUTTING RAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36
INSTALLATION
1. ENVIRONMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
1.1 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.2 MACHINE LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1.3 POWER SOURCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
A163
ii
SM
Rev. 06/2004
1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
1.5 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12
1.6 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
SERVICE TABLES
1. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.1 PM TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
1.2 REGULAR PM PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
2. SERVICE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

2.1 TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
2.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
3. SERVICE TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
3.1.1 Service Program Mode Access Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
3.1.2 Service Program Mode Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
3.2.1 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ACCESS PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . 4-27
3.2.2 INPUT CHECK MODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-28
3.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK MODE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29
3.3 POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30
4. JAM CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

4.1 ACCESS PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
4.2 JAM CODE TABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31
5. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

6. SERVICE REMARKS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
6.1 DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
6.1.1 Drum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
6.2 CHARGE CORONA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35
6.3 OPTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
6.4 DEVELOPMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-36
6.5 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
6.6 CLEANING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-37
6.7 FUSING UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
6.7A PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38
SM
iii
A163
Rev. 06/2004
6.8 ORIGINAL FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
6.9 PAPER FEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
6.10 ROLL FEEDER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
6.11 OTHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

1. EXTERIOR COVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.1 LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.1.1 Left Upper Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.1.2 Left Lower Cover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.2 RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.2.1 Right Upper Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.2.2 Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right Lower Rear Covers . . 5-1
1.3 REAR COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
1.3.1 Rear Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. OPTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
2.3 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
2.4 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
3. DEVELOPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
3.2 DEVELOPER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
3.3 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
3.4 PTL REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
3.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
3.5.1 Bias Voltage for Image Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11
3.5.2 Bias Voltage for Non-image Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
4. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
4.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
4.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

4.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17
A163
iv
SM
Rev. 06/2004
4.6 PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18
4.7 GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19
4.8 DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20
4.8.1 Charge Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
4.8.2 Transfer Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23
4.8.3 Separation Current Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
5. FUSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
5.2 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28
5.3 PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29
5.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30
5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31
5.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32
6. T & S CORONA UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

6.1 T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33
6.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . 5-34
6.2.1 Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34
6.2.2 Separation Corona Wire Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
6.2.3 Transfer Corona Wire Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35
7. OTHERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
7.1 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36
7.2 ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37
8. COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

8.1 LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39
8.2 IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40
8.3 TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
SM
A163
Rev. 06/2004
1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
1.6 PAPER CREASING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6
2. SERVICE CALL CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

2.1 SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
2.2 SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
2.3 SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
2.4 SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
2.5 SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
2.6 SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
2.7 SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
2.8 SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
2.9 SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
2.10 SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
2.11 SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor adjustment Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
3. BLOWN FUSE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
ROLL FEEDER
1. SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
2. MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . 7-2
3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
4. MECHANICAL OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
4.1 BASIC OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
4.2 CUTTER UNIT OPENING AND CLOSING MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
4.3 CUTTER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
5. SERVICE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

5.1 TEST POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
6. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

7. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
A163
vi
SM
Rev. 06/2004
7.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.1.1 Front Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.1.2 Left and Right Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7.2 CUTTER UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7.3 PAPER FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR TIMING BELT TENSION ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . 7-19
7.5 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.5.1 Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: 3 mm (for length shorter than 420 mm)
5 mm (for 420 to 1189 mm)
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
7.6 ROLL FEED PAPER SKEW ADJUSTMENT
SM
vii
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21
A163
OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
Configuration:
Table top
Copy Process:
Electrostatic transfer system
Original Feed:
Sheet feed
Original Skew
Tolerance:
2 mm/400mm
Original Size:
Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm

Minimum: A4 (81/2" x 11") lengthwise
Copy Size:
Same as "Original Size"
Copying Speed:
3 cpm (A1/D sideways)
First Copy:
24 seconds (A1/D sideways)
Warm-up Time:
Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23oC)
Multi-Copy:
1 to 1 only
Automatic Reset:
2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set

to 1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)
Photoconductor:
Organic photoconductor drum
Drum Charge:
Single-wire with grid wires (Negative Charge)
Reproduction Ratio:
1 : 1 (0.5%)
Exposure System:
Slit exposure via fiber optic array
Exposure Lamp:
Fluorescent lamp (26 W)
Development:
Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410,

2 bags)
Toner Replenishment:
Cartridge system (750g toner/cartridge)
Toner Consumption:
1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original)
Development Bias:
Negative
Toner Density Control:
Direct toner density detection by induction

sensor
Image Density Adjustment:
Development bias control + exposure control
Paper Separation:
Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls
Cleaning:
Cleaning blade
A163
1-1
Overall Machine
Information
Rev. 11/2000
1. SPECIFICATIONS
SM
Paper Feeding:
Manual feed (roll feeder optional)
Image Fusing:
Heat and pressure type, teflon (upper) and silicone

rubber (lower) rollers
Fusing Lamp:
Nichrome wire lamp

(115 V: 1,100 W, 230 V: 1,100 W)
Self-diagnostic Codes:
11 codes, displayed in copy counter
Power Source:
115 V/60 Hz....15 A

220 V/50 Hz....7 A
230 V/50Hz.....7 A
240 V/50 Hz....7 A
Power Consumption:
Maximum:
Warm-up:
Ready:
Copy cycle:
Dimensions (W x D x H):
1,080 x 570 x 490 mm

42.1" x 22.2" x 19.1"
Weight:
76 kg, 167.4 lb
1.4 kW
1.2 kW
0.04 to 1.2 kW
1.3 kW
Optional Equipment and Machine Configuration

Main frame
A163 copier
Configuration
Optional equipment
Roll feeder (A571)
Roll cutting rail (A570)
Side guides (A569)
Additional equipment
Table (A714)
---
Other Optional Equipment

Paper Spool
Drum anti-condensation heater
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
SM
1-2
A163
2. PAPER PATH
D
E
A
A: Original Path
B: Paper from the manual feed
C: Paper from the roller feed
D: Paper exit
E: Original Path from Rear Feeder
A163
1-3
SM
3. DRUM PROCESSES
1
8
1. Charge
In the dark the charge corona unit applies a negative charge to the drum. The
grid plate ensures the charge is applied uniformly. The charge remains on the
surface of the drum because the photoconductive drum has a high electrical
resistance in the dark.
2. Exposure
High intensity light from a fluorescent lamp is reflected from the moving original
through the fiber optic array. The charge on the drum surface is dissipated in
direct proportion to the intensity of the reflected light, thus producing an electric
latent image on the drum surface.
SM
1-4
A163
3. Development
The magnetic developer brush on the development roller comes in contact with
the latent image on the drum surface. Toner particles are electrostatically
attracted to the negatively charged latent image areas.
4. Pre-Transfer Lamp
The pre-transfer lamp (PTL) illuminates the drum prior to image transfer. This
reduces the attraction between the toner and the drum, thus making image
transfer easier.
5. Image Transfer
Copy paper is fed to the drum surface, at the exact timing, to align the copy
paper and the developed image on the drum surface. Then a strong negative
charge is applied to the back side of the paper. The negative charge pulls the
toner particles from the drum surface onto the paper.
6. Paper Separation
A strong ac corona discharge is applied to the back side of the copy paper,
reducing the charge on the paper and breaking the electrostatic attraction
between the paper and the drum. Then, the stiffness of the copy paper causes it
to separate from the drum. The pick-off pawls help to separate paper which has
low stiffness.
7. Cleaning
The cleaning blade, which is angled against drum rotation (counter blade
system), removes any toner remaining on the drum surface.
8. Quenching
The light from the quenching lamp electrically neutralizes the surface of the drum.
A163
1-5
SM
4. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT
22
23 24 25
21
20
19
18
17
5
6
16
15
8
9
10
14
11
13
12
1. 1st Original Feed Roller
14. Roll Feeder
2. 1st Press Rollers
15. Paper Registration Rollers
3. Copy Tray
16. Development Unit
4. Exit Rollers
17. Toner Cartridge
5. Fusing Exit Rollers
18. Manual Feed Table
6. Hot Roller
19. Charge Corona Unit
7. Pressure Roller
20. 2nd Original Feed Roller
8. Gas Spring
21. Original Table
9. OPC Drum
22. 2nd Press Rollers
10. T/S Corona Unit
23. Exposure Lamp
11. Main Drive Unit
24. Fiber Optic Array
12. Table
25. Cleaning Blade
13. Paper Spool

SM
1-6
A163
Rev. 5/95
5. DRIVE LAYOUT
11
12 13
15
14
16
10
5
6
9. Fusing Drive Chain
1. Original Feed Roller Pulley
2. Original Feed Roller One Way Pulley 10. Exit Unit Drive Belt
A163
3. Development Unit
11. Hot Roller Drive Gear
4. Development Unit Relay Gear
12. Fusing Drive Sprocket/Gear
5. Development Drive Chain
13. Toner Collection Coil Drive Gear
6. Paper Registration Roller Clutch
14. Drum Drive Gear
7. Drum Drive Relay Gear
15. Original Feed Drive Pulley
8. Main Motor
16. Original Feed Drive Belt
1-7
SM
6. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of the Point to Point
(Water proof paper) index numbers.
Name
Motors
Main
Exhaust Fan
Function
Drives all mechanical components except the
fans. (DC Motor)
Removes the ozone built up around the drum
section to the ozone filter. (DC Motor)
Index. No.
32
5
Magnetic Clutches
Registration
Drives the registration rollers.
Toner Supply
Turns on to supply toner to the development unit.
30
31
Solenoids
Pick-off Pawl
Moves the pick-off pawls against the drum.
Switches
Main
Original & Paper
Feed Safety
Fusing Exit
Safety
Supplies power to the copier.

Cuts ac power when the original or paper feed
unit is opened.
Cuts ac power when the fusing exit unit is
opened.
17
Sensors
Door Open
Toner Density
Original
Registration
Light
Entrance Feed
Registration
Exit
Indicates "Door Open" in the operation panel

and prohibits the key operation.
Detects the density of toner in the developer.
Detects when the original lead edge passes at
the front of the exposure glass.
Detects the intensity of the exposure lamp
output.
Detects when copy paper is inserted (jam
detector).
Detects when copy paper arrives at the
registration rollers (jam detector).
Detects jams through the fusing exit unit.
18
12
29
26
4
27
24
25
7
Printed Circuit Boards

SM
1-8
A163
Name
Main
PSU
AC Drive
FL Regulator
Operation Panel
Lamps
Exposure
Fusing
Pre-Transfer
(PTL)
Quenching (QL)
Power Packs
Charge/Bias/Grid
Power Pack
Transfer/
Separation
Thermistors
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller
Thermofuses
Fusing
Function
Controls all copier functions both directly and
through other PCBs.
Converts the ac voltage to dc voltage.
Provides ac power to the fusing lamp and PSU.
Stabilizes power to the exposure lamp.
Control the operation panel display.
Provides light to reflect the originals image onto

the drum (fluorescent lamp).
Provides heat to the fusing unit.
Reduces the charge on the drum surface prior to
image transfer.
Neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum
surface after cleaning.
Provides high voltage power for the charge

corona, charge grid, and development bias.
Provides high voltage power for the transfer
corona and separation.
Monitors the hot rollers surface temperature.

Monitors the pressure rollers surface
temperature.
Protects against fusing overheat.
Heaters
Anticondensation Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier
(option).
Others
Total Counter
Keeps track of the total length of copies made
(Europe) or the total copies made (U.S.A.).
Circuit Breaker
Guards against voltage surges in the input
(Europe, Asia)/
power.
Fuse (U.S.A.)
A163
1-9
Index. No.
22
21
15
23
10
2
3
20
1
19
16
8
11
13
28
14
SM
SM
1-10
A163
DETAILED SECTION
DESCRIPTIONS
1.
DRUM
1.1 DRUM CHARACTERISTICS

The organic photoconductor (OPC) drum has the following characteristics:
It is able to accept a high negative electrical charge in the dark. (The electrical
resistance of the OPC drum is high in the absence of light.)
The electric charge on the drum surface dissipates when the drum is exposed
to light. (The conductivity of the OPC drum is greatly enhanced by exposure
to light.)
It dissipates an amount of charge that is in direct proportion to the intensity of

the light. That is, where stronger light is directed to the photoconductor
surface, a smaller voltage remains.
The OPC drum used in this model has high sensitivity, good color reproduction,
and good reproduction of low contrast originals (pencil originals, etc.)
A163
2-1
SM
1.2 DRUM DRIVE
[I]
[A]
[H]
[G]
[F]
[D]
[E]
[B]
[C]
The OPC drum [A] is 80 millimeters in diameter and 970 millimeters long. It turns
constantly when the main motor [B] is on.
When the main motor turns on, the drive is transmitted to the drum in the
following way:
main motor drive gear [C] idle gears [D] drum drive gear [E]
drum flange [F] drum
When the drum knob is tightened, the right flange presses firmly against the drum
so that the drum is held tightly between the flanges. The drum and flanges turn
together when the main motor is on. At this time, the drive is also transmitted to
the original feed rollers [G] through the original feed drive pulley [H] and belt [I].
SM
2-2
A163
2.
CHARGE
2.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
[B]
Charge
Charge/
Grid
Power
Pack
Grid
This model uses a single wire corona unit [A] to charge the OPC (organic
photoconductor) drum [B]. The corona unit generates a corona of negative ions
when a high negative voltage is applied to it by the charge/grid power pack.
To make the negative corona uniform, a grid consisting of 8 wires is installed on
the charge corona unit between the corona wire and the drum. This grid drains
off any charge in excess of --860 volts, thus preventing fluctuation of the charge
potential.
A163
2-3
SM
Rev. 5/95
2.2 CHARGE CORONA CIRCUIT
Charge/Bias/Grid PP
CN340-1
CN243 PSU
-3
24V Va
CN340-2
CN243-8 GND
CN106 Main Board
-A8
CN340-3
0/5
Charge
DC/DC
Converter
CN340-4
DC/DC
Converter
CN340-6
CN106
-A9
Grid Drive
0/5
-A10 Grid Detect
The PSU supplies +24 volts (VAA) to the charge/bias/grid power pack as the
power supply source. Approximately 2 seconds after the copy process starts, the
CPU drops CN106-A8 from 5 volts to 0 volts. This actuates the dc/dc converter
within the power pack which applies a high negative voltage of approximately
--5.0 kV to the charge corona wire. The corona wire then generates a negative
corona charge.
The grid limits the maximum corona charge to --860 volts. This ensures that the
charge does not fluctuate and an even charge is applied to the drum surface.
The copy grid voltage and charge voltage amounts can be adjusted using SP #
--11 and SP #--10 respectively.
The grid drive signal applied to CN340-4 is a pulse width modulated signal. As
the width of the pulses applied increases, the strength of the grid charge also
increases. The main board monitors the grid charge at CN106-A10 and controls
the width of the drive pulses based on this feedback.
SM
2-4
A163
2.3 CORONA UNIT VENTILATION
[A]
If ozone produced by the corona charge stays in the charge corona area, it may
cause uneven corona charging to the drum. To prevent this, ozone is vacuumed
out through the exhaust fan [A], and changed to oxygen by the ozone filter before
being blown out of the copier.
A163
2-5
SM
3.
EXPOSURE
3.1 OVERVIEW
[F]
[D]
[H]
[E]
[G]
[I]
[B]
[A]
[C]
Light from the exposure lamp [A] reflects off the original and through the fiber
optics [B] to the OPC drum [C]. During exposure, the original moves across the
exposure glass at the same speed as the drums peripheral velocity.
The platen plate [D] presses the original [E] flat against the exposure glass [F]
just above the fiber optic array. This ensures that the image is properly focused.
(The original must be within 0.2 mm of the exposure glass surface.)
The exposure lamp is a 140 V, 26 W fluorescent lamp.
The original registration sensor [G] detects when the original leading edge passes
the front of the exposure glass. The original flattener [H] holds the leading edge of
the original to ensure that original registration sensor detects the original at the
correct time. The light sensor [I] monitors the intensity of the exposure lamp
output.
SM
2-6
A163
Rev. 5/95
3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED

3.2.1 Basic Operation (Manual Feed)
[A]
[B]
[C]
When the entrance sensor [A] of the manual feed table detects the leading edge
of the copy paper, the main motor starts rotating and the drum process (exposure
lamp, change corona,... etc.) begins. The registration clutch is activated at the
appropriate timing after the registration sensor [B] detects the leading edge of the
copy paper. The copy paper is fed past reg roller registration roller [C] and stops
to wait for the original. "Set Paper", "RF Select" turns off and "Set Original" is
indicated on the operation panel.
A163
2-7
SM
[B]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[F]
[G]
[E]
The original feed rollers rotate with the rotation of the main motor. The original is
pulled by the 1st original feed roller [A] just after the original is placed on the
original feed table. The original registration sensor [C] detects the leading edge
of the original, and the "Set Original" indicator turns off. At the appropriate time,
the copy paper starts to be fed again. The original passes between the platen
plate [D] and exposure glass [E] and from there to the 2nd original feed roller [F].
The originals image is reflected through the fiber optics array [G] to the drum as
the original passes between the platen plate and exposure glass. Then, the
original exits the machine. At the appropriate time after either the original or copy
paper exits, the image creation process (drum process) stops. When both the
original and copy paper have exited the machine, the mechanical drive (main
motor) stops.
SM
2-8
A163
3.2.2 Original Jam Check Timing
[A]
There is only one sensor (original registration sensor) in the original path.
Therefore, original jam cannot be detected during the time that a maximum
original length (2m) passes this sensor. The original jam check is done after the
leading edge of the original has moved 2.5 m (around 50 seconds). To stop the
machine during operation and to protect originals if something wrong happens to
them, the Emergency Stop key [A] should be pressed.
A163
2-9
SM
3.2.3 Drive Mechanism
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
The original feed rollers are driven through the original feed drive pulley and belt
by the main motor as mentioned in the drum drive section.
The paper registration rollers [A] are rotated by the main motor [B] through the
gears [C] and the paper registration clutch [D].
SM
2-10
A163
3.3 FL REGULATOR CONTROL
Rev. 5/95
[D] Main Board
[B]
[A]
[C] Light Sensor
The FL regulator [A] receives 24 volts dc at CN401-1 from the PSU [B]. The
control signal, which is a pulse width modulated (PWM) signal, is received at
CN1-3. The PWM signal has a period (T) of 1 millisecond and a duty ratio of 15%
to 100%.
The basic light intensity level is determined by the image density selected at the
operation panel (manual ID control). The CPU uses the light sensor to monitor
the actual light intensity. The light sensor [C] directly detects the lamps light
output and feeds a light intensity signal back to CN104-B1 of the main board [D].
This feedback allows the CPU to compensate for variations in light intensity due
to the lamps age or temperature.
A163
2-11
SM
Rev. 5/95
3.4 MANUAL ID CONTROL

Manual ID Level
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Light Sensor
Output [V]
0.78
0.892
0.899
0.938
1.02
1.24
1.45
Manual ID Level
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Light Sensor
Output [V]
1.53
1.73
1.93
2.13
2.33
2.52
2.72
3.4.1 Manual ID Control

The user can select one of 14 manual ID levels. For each level, the intensity of
the light output by the exposure lamp (as measured by the light sensor) varies.
This is shown in the above table. The development roller bias also varies. (See
the section on development bias.)
SM
2-12
A163
Rev. 5/95
4.
DEVELOPMENT
4.1 OVERVIEW
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
When the main motor turns on, the paddle roller [A] and development roller [B]
start turning. The paddle roller picks up developer in its paddles and transports it
to the development roller. Internal magnets in the development roller attract the
developer to the development roller sleeve.
The turning sleeve of the development roller then carries the developer past the
doctor blade [C]. The doctor blade trims the developer to the desired thickness
and creates backspill to the cross-mixing mechanism.
The development roller continues to turn, carrying the developer to the OPC
drum. When the developer brush contacts the drum surface, the negatively
charged areas of the drum surface attract and hold the positively charged toner.
In this way, the latent image is developed.
Negative bias is applied to the development roller to prevent toner from being
attracted to non-image areas on the drum that may have residual negative
charge. The bias also controls image density.
After turning about 100 degrees more, the development roller releases the
developer into the developer tank. The developer is agitated by the paddle roller
and the cross-mixing mechanism.
Also, in this machine, rotation of the paddle roller and development roller tend to
cause the air pressure inside the unit to become higher than the air pressure
around the development unit. Therefore, a hole fitted with a filter has been added
to the top of the unit to relieve air pressure and to minimize toner scattering.
The toner density sensor [D] is mounted on the upper side of the development
unit to detect the density of toner in the developer.
A163
2-13
SM
4.2 DRIVE MECHANISM
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[G]
[H]
[F]
[I]
[E]
When the main motor [A] is on, the paddle roller [B], development roller [C], and
mixing auger [D] in the development unit are driven through the development
drive chain [E] and gears [F].
The toner agitator shaft [G] is rotated through the gears [H] by the toner supply
clutch [I] engaged in the toner supply condition.
SM
2-14
A163
4.3 CROSS-MIXING
[C]
[B]
[F]
[A]
[E]
[D]
"Cross-mixing" keeps the developers toner and carrier evenly mixed and evenly
distributes the developer within the development unit. Cross-mixing also agitates
the developer to generate the necessary triboelectric charge on the toner and
carrier particles.
The arrows in the above illustration show the developer movement directions
within the machine. The developer that is attracted to the development roller [A]
is split into two parts by the doctor blade [B]. One part (the magnetic brush) goes
on to develop the latent image on the drum. However, the other part is trimmed
off by the doctor blade and directed to the backspill plate [C].
As the developer slides down the backspill plate to the paddle roller [D], part of
the developer falls into the auger inlet [E] and is transported to the left side of the
unit by the mixing auger [F], where it drops onto the paddle roller. The amount of
developer moved to the right by the backspill plate is equal to the amount moved
to the left by the mixing auger.
A163
2-15
SM
4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL

The toner supply amount ratio is determined by the following conditions.
VTS < 4.25

4.25 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS <
4.35
4.35 VTS <
4.40
4.40 VTS <
4.45
4.45 VTS
51 ~ 100
sheets
(30 ~ 60 m)
VTS < 4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.10
4.10 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS <
4.40
4.40 VTS
101 ~ 150
sheets
(60 ~ 90 m)
VTS < 3.50
3.50 VTS <
3.80
3.80 VTS <
4.10
4.10 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.35
4.35 VTS
151 ~ 200
sheets
(90 ~ 120 m)
VTS < 3.00
3.00 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS
201 ~ 250
sheets
(120 ~ 150 m)
VTS < 2.50
2.50 VTS <
3.00
3.00 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.25
4.25 VTS
VTS < 4.35

4.35 VTS <
4.38
4.38 VTS <
4.40
4.40 VTS <
4.42
4.42 VTS <
4.45
4.45 VTS
VTS < 4.30

4.30 VTS <
4.33
4.33 VTS <
4.36
4.36 VTS <
4.40
4.40 VTS <
4.43
4.43 VTS
VTS < 4.25

4.25 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS <
4.33
4.33 VTS <
4.36
4.36 VTS <
4.40
4.40 VTS
VTS < 3.75

3.75 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.10
4.10 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.38
4.38 VTS
VTS < 3.25

3.25 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS <
3.80
3.80 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.35
4.35 VTS
VTS < 4.00

4.00 VTS <
4.10
4.10 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS <
4.40
4.40 VTS
VTS < 3.50

3.50 VTS <
3.80
3.80 VTS <
4.10
4.10 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.35
4.35 VTS
VTS < 3.00

3.00 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS
VTS < 2.50

2.50 VTS <
3.00
3.00 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.25
4.25 VTS
VTS < 2.00

2.00 VTS <
2.40
2.40 VTS <
2.80
2.80 VTS <
3.20
3.20 VTS <
3.60
3.60 VTS
TS 0 ~ 50 sheets
Level
(~ 30 m)
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
TS Level (Toner Supply Ratio)

0: No supply 1: 7.5% 2: 15%
3: 30%
4: 50%
251 sheets ~
(150 m ~)
VTS < 2.0
2.00 VTS <
2.40
2.40 VTS <
2.80
2.80 VTS <
3.20
3.20 VTS <
3.60
3.60 VTS
VTS < 2.75
2.75 VTS
<3.20
3.20 VTS <
3.60
3.60 VTS <
3.90
3.90 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS
VTS < 1.50
1.50 VTS <
2.00
2.00 VTS <
2.50
2.50 VTS <
3.00
3.00 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS
5: 100%
The toner density sensor is used for toner density control. It measures the ratio of
toner to carrier in the developer.
Toner is supplied every 600 mm when the toner density sensor value (VTS)
meets one of the TS level conditions from 1 to 5. The triboelectric charge
generated on the toner and carrier become greater in accordance with the copy
quantity and is stabilized after 250 copies. To compensate the triboelectric
charge characteristic, the value of the toner supply control changes as shown.
During the initial conditioning, the main motor rotates the development unit to
stabilize the triboelectric charge generated on the toner and carrier and the toner
density sensor is automatically adjusted to 4.00.1V using new developer. The
initial conditioning (SP36) must be performed whenever the developer is replaced.
SM
2-16
A163
4.4.1 Toner Near End Condition

When TS level 5 is detected 3 times in a row, the toner near end condition is
detected and the add toner indicator starts flashing. When in the toner near end
condition, 16 more meters (A1/D size: 27 copies) can be copied. Then the add
toner indicator will light and the machine will not operate.
4.4.2 Recovery From Toner (Near) End Condition

After replacing the toner cartridge (opening and closing the original feed unit), the
main motor rotates the development unit for 1 minute. For 30 seconds during this
period, toner is supplied at 100% of the supply amount. Then, copies can be
made. After new toner is installed, the toner density sensor value may fluctuate
until 30 meters of copying has been done. This may cause the toner end
detection to malfunction even when the new toner cartridge has been installed
correctly. Because of this, toner (near) end is not detected until 30 meters (A1/D
size: 50 copies) after replacing toner cartridge.
The same action as described above will also take place after opening and
closing original feed unit, or turning the main switch off and on, or unplugging and
plugging power cord. This is known as "fake recovery".
A163
2-17
SM
Rev. 5/95
4.4.3 Toner Density Sensor
Toner Density Sensor
Control
Circuit
Main Board
2
CN104-A11
CN104-B20
CN104-A10
CN104-B21
[12V]
TS Control
TS. FB
GND
Coils
The toner density sensor circuit controls the amount of toner in the developer
mixture.
The toner density sensor is powered by 12 volts from CN104-A11 of the main
board. (The potential of CN104-A11 is 24 V when the connector is disconnected.)
The sensors sensitivity is based on the feedback signal applied from
CN104-A10. The input signal to the sensor passes from the main board at
CN104-B20.
The active sensor element is a very small transformer with three coils. When iron
ferrite (carrier) is near the sensor element, the inductance of the coils changes,
causing the current through the transformer to change. As the amount of toner in
the developer increases, the effect of the carrier particles decreases and the
voltage applied to CN104-A10 decreases. Conversely, when the toner
concentration drops as toner is used up, the effect of the carrier on the sensor
coils increases and the voltage at CN104-A10 increases.
SM
2-18
A163
4.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS

4.5.1 Basic Concept
When the drum is exposed, most of the negative charge is eliminated from the
areas where light strikes the drum. This leaves a negative charge pattern
corresponding to the dark areas of the original. After exposure, however, a small
residual charge of about --100 volts (for white paper) remains in the exposed
areas. This residual charge could attract positively charged toner from the
development roller, resulting in dirty background on the copy.
The development bias prevents dirty background. A negative bias that is a little
larger than the residual charge is applied to the development roller. This prevents
the positively charged toner from being attracted to the background areas of the
latent image.
Bias
Manual ID Bias
(Volts)
Manual ID Setting
4.5.2 Manual Image Density Bias

The development bias is applied as shown by the above chart.
In addition to the development bias, the image density is also controlled by
varying the exposure light intensity. (See the exposure section.)
A163
2-19
SM
4.6 TONER SUPPLY
[C]
[B]
[A]
[B]
To allow a compact design, the toner supply mechanism is built into the toner
cartridge. An agitator [A] in the toner cartridge turns when the toner supply clutch
is engaged. As the agitator rotates, mylar strips [B] on the ends of the agitator
force toner through small holes (0.5 mm in diameter) in a plastic strip [C] along
one side of the toner cartridge. The toner particles thus ejected from the cartridge
fall into the development unit and are mixed into the developer. The toner agitator
turns at 75 rpm and the toner supply rate is approximately 22.5 grams per minute.
SM
2-20
A163
Rev. 5/95
5.
IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION
[B]
[A] [C] [D]
[E]
5.1 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP (PTL)

After the latent image is developed but before the image is transferred to the
copy paper, the drum surface is illuminated by the pre-transfer lamp [A]. This
illumination reduces the negative potential on the drum surface. This prevents
toner particles from being re-attracted to the negatively charged drum during the
paper separation process. It also makes image transfer and paper separation
easier.
5.2 IMAGE TRANSFER

The registration rollers [B] feed the copy paper through the transfer entrance
guides to the transfer section. A high negative voltage (about --5.0 kV) is applied
to the transfer corona wire [C], and the corona wire generates negative ions.
These negative ions are applied to the copy paper, and the negative charge
attracts the positively charged toner away from the drum and onto the paper. In
addition, the paper is held against the drum by the positive counter charge on the
drum.
5.3 PAPER SEPARATION

After image transfer, the copy must be separated from the drum. To break the
attraction between the paper and the drum, the separation corona wires [D] apply
an ac corona (5.0 kV) to the reverse side of the paper. The stiffness and weight
of the paper cause it to separate from the drum.
The separation corona has a negative component of approximately --250 volts. This
negative component holds the toner on the paper to prevent it from scattering the drum
during paper separation. The two pick-off pawls [E] ensure that thin paper, paper with
low stiffness, or upward curled paper separates completely from the drum.
A163
2-21
SM
5.4 PICK-OFF MECHANISM
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
The pick-off pawl solenoid [A] is energized after the registration clutch turns on to
feed the copy paper to the drum. The pick-off shaft [B] then rotates clockwise and
the pick-off pawls [C] touch the drum surface.
Just after the leading edge of the copy paper passes the pick-off pawls, the
pick-off solenoid turns off again. The pick-off spring [D] then rotates the pick-off
shaft counterclockwise and moves the pick-off pawls away from the drum.
SM
2-22
A163
5.5 T/S CORONA CIRCUIT
Rev. 5/95
The T/S power pack is powered by +24 volts (Va) from the PSU. The dc/dc
converters and dc/ac inverter change the +24 volts supply into the high voltages
used by the transfer and separation coronas.
The main board turns on the transfer corona using PWM signal (T.Drive). This
turns on the dc/dc converter, which applies a high voltage of approximately --5.0
kV to the transfer corona wire. The main board turns on the separation corona
using PWM signals (S.AC Drive and S.DC Drive). The dc/dc converter and dc/ac
inverter circuits then apply approximately 5.0 kV ac and --200 V dc to the
separation corona wires.
A larger transfer current is applied when the fusing unit is in high or low
temperature mode than in normal temperature mode. In high or low mode, thin
copying paper (translucent paper or film) may be wrapped around the drum. This
may cause the paper to be jammed or transported incorrectly. To correct for this,
the separation current is increased in high and low modes. To ensure good copy
quality in high mode, the PTL (pre-transfer lamp) is off during the copy process.
A larger separation current is applied at the leading edge of the paper to improve
the separation in high temperature mode.
When roll feeder is installed, a larger transfer current is applied at the trailing
edge of the paper to improve transfer at the curled trailing.
A163
2-23
SM
6.
CLEANING
6.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
[C]
[B]
This copier uses the counter blade system for drum cleaning. The blade [A] is
angled against the drum rotation. This counter blade system has the advantage
of high cleaning efficiency.
The cleaning blade removes any toner remaining on the drum after the image is
transferred to the copy paper. The toner that is wiped off by the cleaning blade
drops onto the toner collection coil [B], which then moves it to the toner collection
bottle.
The cleaning blade pressure spring [C] applies pressure to the exact center of
the cleaning blade so that pressure is evenly applied across the entire length of
the cleaning blade. Blade pressure is applied constantly.
SM
2-24
A163
6.2 COLLECTION OF USED TONER
[A]
[D]
[C]
[C]
[B]
The toner collection coil [A], which is rotated by the main motor [B] through the
gears [C], moves used toner from the cleaning unit to the toner collection bottle
[D]. The toner collection bottle capacity is enough to hold used toner from making
1220 m copies. The CPU uses the copy quantity to detect the used toner
overflow. The used toner overflow condition is detected when the copy length
counter (SP52) reaches the used toner detection threshold setting (SP51, Default
value: 1220m). When this condition occurs, "FULL" is indicated in the copy
counter and copying is disabled.
After disposing of the toner in the toner collection bottle and closing the paper
path section, pressing of the Clear Modes/Stand by key should be done by
customers themselves to clear the memory counter for the copy quantity. The
memory for the copy quantity can be cleared using SP53. SP52 shows the length
of copies made since the used toner was emptied. When "0" is input in SP53, the
value of SP52 is cleared.
A163
2-25
SM
Rev. 5/95
7.
QUENCHING
[B]
[A]
After the drum [A] is cleaned by the cleaning blade, light from the quenching lamp
[B] neutralizes any charge remaining on the drum. The quenching lamp turns on
and off at the same time as the main motor.
The main board turns on the quenching lamp LEDs by dropping CN104-B26 to 0
volt.
SM
2-26
A163
8.
FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
8.1 OVERVIEW
[C]
[F]
[J]
[B]
[H]
[I]
[G]
[D]
[A]
[E]
After separation from the drum, copy paper rides on the transport plate [A]. The
small separation rollers [B] hold the paper against the transport plate so that the
back curled paper is straightened before it enters the fusing section.
Two rollers fuse the image to the copy paper by applying heat and pressure. The
hot roller [C] is made of carbon-teflon and the pressure roller [D] is made of
silicone rubber. Pressure is constantly applied by the pressure levers at the ends
of the fusing unit.
The fusing lamp [E], which is located at the hot roller axis, turns on and off to
maintain the operating temperature. The temperature control circuit on the main
board monitors the surface temperature of the hot roller and the pressure roller
through a thermistor [F and G respectively].
There are three operating temperature settings: normal, high, and low. The
normal setting has a choice of 7 temperature settings, adjustable by SP1 or key
operation. The high setting has a choice of 4 temperature settings. The low
setting also has a choice of 4 temperature settings.
The hot roller strippers [H] separate the copy from the hot roller and direct it to
the fusing exit rollers [I].
The thermofuse provides backup overheat protection. (See the section on fusing
temperature control.)
The fusing exit sensor [J] is used for jam detection.
A163
2-27
SM
8.2 DRIVE MECHANISM

8.2.1 Fusing Unit Drive
[I]
[J]
[A]
[J]
[C]
[B]
[H]
[G]
[D]
[F]
[E]
The hot roller [A] is turned by the hot roller drive gear [B] as shown. The pressure
roller [C] is friction driven by the hot roller. The fusing rollers turn constantly when
the main motor [D] is on, driven via the gear [E], through the fusing drive chain
[F], sprocket [G], and gear [H], to the hot roller drive gear.
The exit section is driven by the exit unit drive belt [I] through the hot roller drive
gear and gears [J].
SM
2-28
A163
8.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Rev. 5/95
8.3.1 Fusing Circuit Operation
The fusing lamp is powered by the ac drive board and controlled by the main
board.
The ac drive board receives direct wall voltage ac power (not stepped down) at
T201 and T202. It also receives +24 volts at CN202-1. The ac power is applied to
the drive circuit, the fusing lamp, and the triac (TRC201). The dc power drives
PTC201 and RA201.
To turn on the fusing lamp, the main board drops CN106-B14 to LOW. This
activates the photocoupler (PTC201) which in turn energizes the drive circuit.
The drive circuit turns on the triac to complete the lamp circuit, thus turning on
the lamp.
RA201 guards against a failure of the +24 volt power supply. When +24 volts is
applied at CN202-1 and CN106-B15 drops to LOW, RA201 is energized and its
ac contacts stay open. If the +24 volts power from CN 106-A2 stops, the ac
contacts of RA201 close, stopping the drive circuit and turning off the fusing lamp.
A163
2-29
SM
8.3.2 Overheat Protection

The overheat protection circuit on the main board turns off the fusing lamp if the
temperature goes too high.
The input from TH1 (Hot Roller Thermistor) goes to pin 3 of IC17 as well as to the
CPU. As the temperature of TH1 increases, its resistance decreases and
therefore the voltage at pin 3 of IC17 increases. If this voltage becomes greater
than the voltage at pin 2, the output at pin 1 becomes HIGH. Q1 then turns off
and cuts the +24 volt supply to ac drive board. The fusing lamp then turns off.
The overheat protection circuit becomes effective at about 215C.
TF1 provides overheat protection in case a short bypasses the control and drive
circuits. This fuse will open if it reaches approximately 192C.
SM
2-30
A163
8.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Hot
Roller
Temp. (C)
Pressure Roller Temp. (C)
Operating Temperature
Lower Limit
Lower Limit
The main board monitors the temperature of the hot roller through TH1 and the
temperature of the pressure roller through TH2. The CPU determines whether or
not to turn on the fusing lamp based on the combination of the input from these
two thermistors. If the pressure roller is cool, the CPU keeps the hot roller
temperature high. However, if the pressure roller is hot, the CPU decreases the
operating temperature of the hot roller. The above graph shows the relationship
between the temperatures of the hot and pressure rollers.
A163
2-31
SM
The operating temperature of the hot roller and pressure roller can be adjusted
using SP #--7 and SP #--8. These programs are used to compensate for
variations in the response of different thermistors. SP #--7 adjusts the hot roller
temperature and SP #--8 adjusts the pressure roller temperature. SP #--7 shift the
temperature in 1 degree increments (--9C to +9C). The fusing temperature can
be monitored using SP #--9.
- The ready condition When the hot roller temperature reaches the ready temperature, the copier
enters the ready condition, and copying is possible. The ready temperature is
anywhere that is 5 lower than the hot roller operating temperature in the
selected fusing unit mode.
- Fusing Unit Operating Modes There are three operating temperature modes, selected with the Copy Media key:
normal (for use with plain paper), high (for translucent paper), and low (for
translucent film).
The normal temperature mode can have one of 7 temperature settings (modes 1
to 7; see the diagram on the previous page); the setting is selected using SP#1
or by key operation. The high temperature mode can have one of 4 temperature
settings (mode 5 to 8); the setting is selected by SP#2 or by key operation. The
low temperature mode can also have one of 4 temperature settings (mode 2 to
5); the setting is selected using SP#3 or by key operation. In this way, the setting
of the fusing unit temperature modes can be adjusted to match the paper type
more exactly, either by a service technician using SP Modes, or by a key
operator.
The key operation sequence is as follows. The setting input by this procedure
does not overwrite the setting that is stored in the SP Mode.
First, select the temperature mode to be adjusted, using the Copy Media key.
Then hold the Copy Media key down for longer than 2 seconds; the Density
indicator inverts, and the unlit lamp on the indicator shows the current setting.
SM
2-32
A163
The position of the unlit lamp corresponds to the fusing temperature mode as
shown below.
(Normal)
Mode1
Mode 5
Mode 7
Mode 2
Mode 4
Mode 6
Mode 3
(High)
Mode 5
Mode 6
Mode 8
Mode 7
(Low)
Mode 2
Mode 3
Mode 5
Mode 4
Select the required setting with the Density keys, then press the Copy Media key
to store the setting. The Density indicator reverts to its normal operating mode,
but it is blinking if the setting just selected is not the same as that stored in the
SP Mode setting for the same temperature mode.
As can be seen on the diagrams on the previous page, modes 1 to 7 are similar
in principle. However, Mode 8 (the highest temperature mode) is a bit different.
The hot roller temperature is kept at 195C and it starts to rotate to keep the
pressure roller temperature between 130C and 145C. When the hot roller or
pressure roller temperature is below the lower limit, copying is disabled.
After fusing, paper shrinks slightly, and expands again after a few minutes. The
shrinkage and expansion are different at different fusing unit temperatures.
Therefore, if the fusing unit operating mode settings have been changed, cutting
length adjustment of the roll feeder unit may be required.
A163
2-33
SM
8.5 ENERGY SAVER FUNCTION

When the copier is not in use, the energy saver function reduces the power
consumption by decreasing the fusing temperature.
When the Clear Modes/Stand-by key is hold down for over 2 seconds, the copier
goes into the energy saver mode. A message is displayed on copy counter and
all the other indicators turn off.
The fusing temperature is decreased by 15C from one of the normal mode
settings for copying. The energy saving ratio is approximately 14%. The waiting
time until the copier returns to the ready condition is approximately 60 seconds.
NOTE: The above energy saving ratio is a standard value measured in
laboratory tests under controlled conditions. The actual ratio will vary
depending on environmental conditions, copy modes, power supply
conditions and measurement instruments.
Press the Clear Mode/Standby key. The copier is returned to the ready condition
after a warm-up time.
When the auto energy saver mode (SP #10) is selected, the copier automatically
goes to the energy saver mode at the auto reset time selected by SP #9.
SM
2-34
A163
8.6 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE HEIGHT
[A]
Paper creasing may occur depending on the type of paper used. The fusing
entrance guide [A] height is changed by adjusting a lever (there are three
settings).
A163
2-35
SM
9.
ROLL CUTTING RAIL
9.1 ROLL CUTTING RAIL
[A]
[D]
[B]
[C]
The roll cutting rail cuts sheets of paper from the paper roll.
For inserting paper between the slide shafts [A] and cutter guide stay [B], the
holders [C] hold the slide shafts at the upper position by keeping the gap
constant. To stop paper dropping from the roll cutting rail, the holders hold the
slide shafts at the lower position by holding the paper against the cutter guide
stay.
The guide shaft [D], made of resin, protects the paper knife blade from damage
by metal parts of the unit.
SM
2-36
A163
INSTALLATION
1. ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range:
15oC to 30oC (59oF to 86oF)
2. Humidity Range:
20% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination:
Less than 1,500 Lux (do not expose to

direct sunlight).
4. Ventilation:
Minimum space 20 m3
Room air should turn over at least 30
m3/hr/person.
5. Ambient Dust:
Less than 0.15 mg/m3

(4 x 10-3 oz/yd3)
6. If the installation place is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine as

follows:
a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from
low to high, or vice versa.
b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner
in the summer.
c) Where it will be directly exposed to reflected heat from a space heater
in the winter.
7. Avoid placing the machine in an area filled with corrosive gases.
8. Avoid any area higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level.
9. Place the machine on a strong and level base.
10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent strong
vibration.
SM
3-1
A163
1.1 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Back
600 mm
Right
600 mm
Left
600 mm
Front
1000 mm
1. Front:
2. Back:
3. Right:
4. Left:
1,000 mm (39 in)

600 mm (24 in)
600 mm (24 in)
600 mm (24 in)
1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

1. Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
2. Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
Make sure that the machine is level using a carpenters level.
A163
3-2
SM
1.3 POWER SOURCE

1. Input Voltage Level:
115 V/60 Hz
More than 15 A (for U.S.A. version)
220 V/230 V/240 V/50 Hz
More than 7 A (for European version)
2. Permissible Voltage Fluctuation:
10%
3. Do not set anything on the power cord.

NOTE: a) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
b) Avoid multi-wiring.
SM
3-3
A163
1.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

Copier
Check the accessories and their quantities according to the following list:
Guide Wire ............................................................. 2 pcs
Copy Tray ............................................................... 1 pc
Copy Guide ............................................................ 1 pc
A163
3-4
SM
[D]
[B]
[E]
[E]
[C]
[A]
1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the copier is being
installed on the table.
2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] (Place the copier feet [D] into the table
holes [E]).
Warning: The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier
too hard may cause it to drop onto the floor. While moving
the copier, push the table.
SM
3-5
A163
Rev. 5/95
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
[E]
3. Open the paper path section [A] and remove two strips of shipping tape [B].
4. Remove the right upper cover [C] (2 screws).
5. Remove the drum protection sheet [D], and remove the screw [E] to apply
cleaning blade pressure to the drum. Remove paper from transport section.
Close the paper path section.
A163
3-6
SM
Rev. 5/95
[A]
[E]
[C]
[B]
[D]
6. Open the original feed unit [A], manual feed table [B], and toner supply cover
[C]. Remove a sheet [D] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of the
developer [E] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown,
then close all doors.
7. Plug in the power supply cord and turn on the main switch.
SM
3-7
A163
Rev. 5/95
[D]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60C when the main switch is
turned on, the main motor will rotate. In this case, it is not necessary to
access the SP mode when loading the second Kg of developer (in
step 11).
Turn off the main switch to stop the main motor after the developer is
loaded from the development entrance.
8. Press the following keys on the operation panel:
Clear Mode key [A]
+ key [B]
+ key
Clear/Stop key [C]
9. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The wrench and
toner end indicators will blink (SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode).
10. Select 23 using the + key [D] and press the RF Select key [E]. The main
motor will rotate.
11. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor after the developer is loaded
from the development entrance. Pour in another kg of developer into the
development unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 Kg). Press the Clear
Modes/Stand by key 3 times to leave the SP mode.
A163
3-8
SM
Rev. 5/95
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[F]

Clear key [A]
+ key [B]
--key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
13. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The roll paper end
and call service indicators will blink (SP mode).
14. Select 36 using the + and - keys. Enter "1" by pressing the following keys.
Function Select key [E]
+ key
RF Select key [F]
Five minutes later, the copier will automatically return to the normal operating
mode from SP mode. (New developer initialization)
SM
3-9
A163
[A]
[B]
[C]
15. Install the toner cartridge [A] as shown.

16. Remove the sealing tape [B] from the cartridge and turn the knob [C] until it
stops.
A163
3-10
SM
[A]
[C]
[B]
17. Attach the guide wires [A] to the copy tray [B].
18. Install the copy tray [B] and copy guide [C].
19. Reinstall all the covers.
20. Check the copy quality and copier operation.
SM
3-11
A163

Table
Top Plate ................................................................ 1
Left Side Plate ........................................................ 1
Right Side Plate ..................................................... 1
Middle Plate ........................................................... 1
Rear Cover ............................................................. 1
Screws with Spring Washer - M4x8 .......................14
A163
3-12
SM
Rev. 5/95
[E]
[D]
[H]
[C]
[A]
[E]
[G]
[C]
[A]
[A]
A, B
[F] [A]
[D]
[A]
[B]
NOTE: To ensure grounding, paint has been removed from the surfaces around
the screw holes [A] (only from the surfaces where the two components
meet) and from the surface around the screw hole [B] at the inside of the
left plate.
1. Temporarily install the top plate [C], left [D], and right side plate [E] (6 screws).
2. Turn the table up-side down in the direction of A.
3. Install the middle plate [F] and rear cover [G] (4 screws each).
4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [H] of screws are flattened.
5. Flip the table the correct way.
SM
3-13
A163

Roll Cutting Rail
Cutter Guide ........................................................... 1 pc
Cutter Knife ............................................................ 1 pc
Roll Paper Arm ....................................................... 2 pcs
Roll Paper Shaft ..................................................... 1 pc
Roll Shaft Holder .................................................... 2 pcs
Roll Flange ............................................................. 2 pcs
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B]
1. Remove the small caps [A] from the lower front cover.
2. Attach the roll shaft holders [B] as shown.
A163
3-14
SM
[J] [G]
[K]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[B]
[H]
[G]
[A]
[D] [C] [F]
[H]
[I]
[I]
3. Attach the roll paper arms [A] to the cutter guide [B]. (Install each arm pin [C]
into each cutter guide hole [D]. Position the cutter guide pin [E] in the lower
slot of the roll paper arm [F].)
4. Install the cutter guide on the roll shaft holder [G].
5. Slide the roll paper shaft [H] into the roll paper.
6. Fit the roll flanges [I] onto the roll paper shaft (both ends).
7. Push the roll flanges [I] inside to fix the roll paper position.
8. Set the roll paper shaft on the roll shaft holder.
9. Set the paper between the cutter guide stay [J] and slide shafts [K].
10. Check the roll cutting rail operation.
SM
3-15
A163
SERVICE TABLES
1.
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
1.1
PM TABLE
Symbol key: I=Inspect L=Lubricate R=Replace A=Adjust C=Clean
EM
2.1KM
(3.6K)
(
A. Original Feed
1 First original
feed roller
2 Second
original feed
roller
3 1st and 2nd
press rollers
4.3KM
6.4KM
8.6KM
(7.2K) (10.8K) (14.4K)
) A1 sideways/D size
10.8KM
(18K)
Alcohol
Alcohol
4 Original table
B. Optics
1 Fiber optics
array
2 Exposure lamp
3 Exposure glass
4 Reflection plate
C. Development
1 Developer
3 Entrance seal
4 Development
filter
SM
Alcohol
Alcohol
Clean with
lens paper if
necessary
Clean using
water if
necessary
Water or
alcohol
Alcohol
Replace at 20K
(A1 sideways/
D size)
Clean using a
dry cloth if
necessary
Clean using a
dry cloth if
necessary
Clean at 60K
(A1 sideways/
D size)
2 Cartridge
holder
D. Around drum
1 Corona wires
2 Grid wires
3 Charge corona
end blocks and
casing
4 Pre-transfer
lamp
Notes
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
R
C
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
C
Clean using
blower brush if
necessary
4-1
A163
EM
5 T/S corona
wires
6 T/S corona
end blocks and
casing
7 Pick-off pawls
8 Quenching
Lamp
2.1KM
(3.6K)
(
4.3KM
6.4KM
8.6KM
(7.2K) (10.8K) (14.4K)
10.8KM
(18K)
3 Toner tank
F. Paper Feed
1 Registration
roller
2 Paper feed
guide plate
3 Manual feed
table
G. Fusing
1 Hot roller
3 Thermistors
C
C
6 Entrance guide
plate
A163
Replace at
20K
(A1 sideways/
D size)
Replace if
damaged
Empty used
toner
Water
Water
Water
Replace at 60K
(A1 sideways/
D size)
Clean using
suitable solvent
Clean using
suitable solvent
4 Hot roller
strippers
7 Exit turn guide
Dry cloth
Clean using
blower brush if
necessary
Replace at
48K
(A1 sideways/
D size)
2 Pressure roller
5 Pressure roller
stripper
Dry cloth
Dry cloth
E. Cleaning
1 Cleaning blade
2 Cleaning seal
Notes
4-2
Clean using
suitable solvent
Clean using
suitable
solvent if
necessary
Clean using
alcohol
SM
EM
2.1KM
(3.6K)
(
4.3KM
6.4KM
8.6KM
(7.2K) (10.8K) (14.4K)
10.8KM
(18K)
8 Exit guide plate
Clean using
suitable
solvent if
necessary
Others
1 Chain
I
3 Ozone filter
F. Roll Feeder
1 Feed Roller
2 Gears
SM
Notes
4-3
Lubricate with
G501 if
necessary
Lubricate with
G501 if
necessary
Alcohol
A163
1.2
REGULAR PM PROCEDURE
1. Make a copy
Make a copy of OS-A1 chart.
2. Original Feed
(every 3.6K)
Clean the original table using alcohol.

Inspect the 1st and 2nd press rollers. If they are dirty,
clean them using alcohol.
Original Feed
(every 7.2K)
1. Clean the first and second original feed rollers

using alcohol.
2. Clean the first and second press rollers using
alcohol.
3. Optics
(every 3.6K)
1. Clean the reflection plate using alcohol.
2. Clean the exposure glass using water.

3. Clean the exposure lamp using water if necessary.
4. Clean the fiber optics array using lens paper if
necessary.
4. Around Drum
(every 3.6K)
NOTE: After removing the drum, wrap it in clear

sheets of paper to protect it.
1. Clean the charge corona wire, T& S corona wires
and grid wires using a dry cloth. (Do not expand
the corona wires.)
2. Clean the T/S corona end blocks, casing using a
dry cloth.
3. Clean the pick-off pawls using a dry cloth.
4. Clean the pre-transfer lamp if it is dirty.
5. Clean the quenching lamp if it is dirty.
A163
4-4
SM
Around Drum
(every 7.2K)
Clean the charge corona end blocks and casing.
Around Drum
(every 18K)
Replace the charge corona wires and T/S corona

wires.
5. Cleaning Unit
(every 3.6K)
1. Inspect the cleaning blade. Replace it, if it is

damaged.
2. Inspect the cleaning seal. Replace it, if it is
damaged.
Cleaning Unit
(every 20K)
6. Development Unit
(every 3.6K)
Replace the cleaning blade.
1. Clean the cartridge holder using a dry cloth if it is

dirty.
2. Clean the entrance seal using a dry cloth if it is
dirty.
SM
Development Unit
(every 30K)
Replace the developer.
Development Unit
(every 60K)
Clean the development filter.
4-5
A163
7. Paper Feed
(every 3.6K)
1. Clean the registration roller using water.
2. Clean the paper feed guide plates using water.

3. Clean the manual table using water.
8. Fusing Unit
(every 3.6K)
Fusing Unit
(every 6.4K)
Clean the small separation rollers using suitable

solvent.
1. Clean the fusing thermistors using suitable

solvent.
2. Clean the hot roller strippers using suitable
solvent.
Fusing Unit
(every 48K)
9. Others
(every 3.6K)
Replace the hot roller.
1. Inspect the drive chain. Lubricate using G501 if

necessary.
2. Inspect the drive gears. Lubricate using G501 if
necessary.
3. Replace the ozone filter.
10. Roll Feeder

(every 3.6K)
1. Clean the feed roller using alcohol.
11. Copy Quality.
1. Check the copy quality.

2. Perform the light sensor adjustment.
A163
4-6
SM
2.
SERVICE TABLES
2.1
TEST POINTS
Main Board
Number
TP101
TP102
TP103
TP104
TP105
Function
VAA (+24V)
Vcc (+5V)
GND
Toner density sensor (CN104-A10)
Light sensor output (CN104-B1)
Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack

Number
TP1
TP2
2.2
Function
Development Bias Voltage
Grid Voltage
VARIABLE RESISTORS
Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack

Number
VR1
Function
Charge Corona Voltage
Caution: VR1 should not be changed in the field. Charge corona can be
adjusted using SP #--10.
T&S Power Pack

Number
Function
VRT
Transfer Corona Voltage
VRD (DC) Separation Corona Voltage (DC)
VRD (AC) Separation Corona Voltage (AC)
Caution: VRT, VRD (DC), and VRD (AC) should not be changed in the field.
They can be adjusted using SP #--12 to --17.
SM
4-7
A163
3.
SERVICE TOOLS
3.1
SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
The service program (SP) mode is used to check electrical data, change mode or
adjustment values.
3.1.1 Service Program Mode Access Procedure
How to access the SP mode for service representatives (All service program
modes can be accessed with this procedure.)
Press the following keys in sequence.
The second time that the

seconds (until the
and
key is pressed, hold it down for more than 3

indicators blink).
How to access the SP mode for customers and sales representatives

modes 1 to 35 are accessible by a customer with this procedure.)
Press
and
key then hold down

indicators blink).
(SP
key more than 3 seconds (until the
How to leave the SP mode

Press the following keys in sequence
or turn off the main switch.

NOTE: Each of the above procedure must be finished within 20 seconds.
How to select the program number
The program number can be selected by the
and
keys. The
selected program number is displayed in the lead edge erase indicator (the two
digit indicator beside the
mark).
To select the program number quickly, hold down
or
key.
A163
4-8
SM
How to change settings

1. Access the SP mode and select the program number.
2. Press the
key to select the paper length indicator (the four digit
indicator beside the
mark).
3. The present setting is displayed in the paper length indicator.
4. Select the setting using the
key to enter the selected setting.
and
keys, then press the
5. Leave the SP mode.

How to read data
1. Access the SP mode and select the program number.
2. Press the
key and select the paper length indicator (the four digit
mark).
3. Press the
4. Press
SM
key, then the paper length indicator shows the data.

key again to stop displaying the data.
4-9
A163
3.1.2 Service Program Mode Table

1: A "*" before the mode number means that the mode can be accessed by
custormers or sales representative.
2: In the data colum, the default value is printed in bold letters. The default
settings for several items depend on the machine destination (refer to page
4-26.).
Mode No.
Fusing
Temperature 1
(Normal)
*1
*2
*3
*4
Fusing
Temperature 2
(High)
Fusing
Temperature 3
(Low)
Copy Count
Up/Down
Beeper On/Off
*5
*6
*7
A163
Paper Feed Out

Waiting Time
Setting
Function
Selects the fusing temperature for plain
paper.
Data
0: Mode 1
1: Mode 2
2: Mode 3
3: Mode 4
4: Mode 5
5: Mode 6
6: Mode 7
Selects the fusing temperature for translucent 0: Mode 5
paper.
1: Mode 6
2: Mode 7
3: Mode 8
Selects the fusing temperature for translucent 0: Mode 2
film.
1: Mode 3
2: Mode 4
3: Mode 5
Selects the copy count amount up or down. 0: Up
1: Down
Selects if the beeper sounds or not.
0: On
1: Off
2: Only when the
edge margin or
paper length is
changed
continuously,
the beeper is off.
Selects the time to when the paper is
automatically fed out after it has been set on
the manual table, or after the Roll Feed
Select key is pressed.
0: 2 minutes
1: 1 minute
2: 3 minutes
3: 4 minutes
4: 5 minutes
Manual Feed Start Selects the time to when the registration
0: 2 seconds
Time Setting
roller starts rotating after the entrance sensor 1: 0.7 second
detects the paper leading edge.
2: 1 second
3: 3 seconds
4: 4 seconds
5: 5 seconds
4-10
SM
Rev. 1/26/96
Mode No.
Function
Data
Count up/down at
To change the leading edge margin (print
Leading Edge
every:
Increase/Decrease number) increase/decrease speed, the
0: 0.1 second
customer holds down the + or -- key. Then,
Speed Setting
*8
1: 0.50 second
after a few 0.25 second intervals (See SP
2: 0.25 second
mode 12), the speed begins to change. SP
3: 0.05 second
mode 8 determines the rate of speed
4: 0.02 second
increase/decrease.
Auto Reset Time Selects the time to return to the initial setting. 0: 2 minutes
1: 1 minutes
Setting
2: 3 minutes
*9
3: 4 minutes
4: 5 minutes
5: No auto reset
Auto Energy
The machine goes into energy saver mode at 0: No
*10 Saver Mode
auto reset time.
1: Auto Energy
Saver Mode
Screen Message
Setting
Selects one of the options indicated on the

display in the energy saver mode.
0: None
1: Pre-HEAt
2: HEllo i lovE yoU
3: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4: SLEEPinG
5: HAvE A Good
dAy.
The leading edge margin (print number,

paper length) increase/decrease speed starts
to change several 0.25 second intervals after
the customer starts the adjustment
procedure. This SP mode adjusts the
number of 0.25 second intervals.
0: 3 intervals
1: 1 intervals
2: 2 intervals
3: 10 intervals
Auto off time can be selected
1 ~ 120 minutes
(1 minute per step)
Default: 30 minutes
*11
Leading Edge
Increase/Decrease
*12 Adjustment
Preliminary Interval
13
Not Used
14
Not Used
Auto Off
15
16
to
19
Not Used
Paper Length
Count Up/Down
*20
Setting
*21
*22
Paper Length
Up/Down Speed
Setting
Fixed Paper Size

Pattern Setting
Optional Paper
*23 Size Setting
to
*32
SM
Selects if the paper length is in count down or 0: Down

up when the preset cut key is pressed.
(Long Short)
1: Up
(Short Long)
To change the paper length
increase/decrease speed, the customer holds
down the + or -- key. Then, after a few 0.25
second intervals (See SP mode 12), the
speed begins to change. SP mode 21
determines the rate of speed
increase/decrease.
Selects the fixed paper size pattern chosen
when the "Preset Cut" key is pressed.
0: 0.10 second
1: 0.5 second
2: 0.25 second
3: 0.05 second
4: 0.02 second
5: 0.01 second
Refer to page 4-25.
Up to 10 different paper size can be stored

UdEF: Undefined
from 23 to 32. If "19" is selected in SP No.
22, this data is used as fixed paper size when
the "Preset Cut" key is pressed.
4-11
A163
Rev. 12/22/95
*23
to
*32
33
to
34
Mode No.
Optional Paper
Size Setting
Function
Data
Up to 10 different paper size can be stored
UdEF: Undefined
from 23 to 32. If "19" is selected in SP No.
22, this data is used as fixed paper size when
the "Preset Cut" key is pressed.
Not Used
All Indicators On
Turns on all the indicators on the operation

panel when the Roll Feed Select key is
pressed.
0: No
1: All indicators on
New Developer
Initialization
Carries out the new developer initialization for

5 minutes. The machine counts down the
remaining time on the display. After the
initialization, the machine automatically
adjusts the toner sensor output to 4.0 0.1V.
During the toner sensor adjustment, "Adj" is
displayed. When the adjustment is
completed, the machine automatically returns
to normal operating mode.
If the initialization is
canceled before
returning to the
normal operating
mode, do it again
from the beginning. If
the machine fails to
adjust the toner
sensor output, "E=11"
is indicated.
Recovers from the fusing unit SC condition.

After it has been recovered, the machine
returns to its initial (power on) condition.
0: Release SC
1: SC condition
*35
36
37
Not Used
38
Release Fusing
Unit Service Call
39
Not Used
Roll Feeder
Identification
Identify the roll feeder installation.
40
0: No
1: Roll Feeder
Installed
41
Roll Feeder
Speed Setting
(Factory Use)
To adjust the paper feed speed of the roll

feeder.
0: Standard
--50 0 50
Faster
Slower
42
Roll Feeder
Cutting Length
Adjustment (300
mm, Plain Paper)
To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm in the

plain paper mode.
0: Standard
--9.9 0 9.9 mm
Longer
Shorter

translucent paper mode.
43
Roll Feeder
Cutting Length
Adjustment (300
mm, Translucent
Paper)

translucent film mode.
44
Roll Feeder
Cutting Length
Adjustment (300
mm, translucent
Film)
A163
4-12
SM
45
46
47
48
Mode No.
Roll Feeder
Cutting Length
Adjustment (1100
mm, Plain Paper)
Roll Feeder
Cutting Length
Adjustment (1100
mm, translucent
Paper)
Roll Feeder
Cutting Length
Adjustment (1100
mm, Translucent
Film)
Not Used
Main Motor Speed
Adjustment
49
50
Toner End
Detection Setting
Used Toner
51
Used Toner
Counter
52
SM
Function
To adjust the cutting length of 1100 mm in
the plain paper mode.
Data
0: Standard
--50.00 50.0 mm
Longer
Shorter

the translucent paper mode.

the translucent film mode.
To change the main motor speed.
0: Standard
--9 0 11
Slower
Faster
If the main motor
speed is incorrect,
PJ56 or PJ57 will be
indicated when a long
copy is made. In
these cases this
adjustment is
required.
Determines the possible number of copies
0: 27 sheets
(when A1 paper is used) after the toner near 1: 9 sheets
end condition.
2: 18 sheets
3: 36 sheets
Determines the total copy length before the 0: 1220
toner overflow indicator lights.
1: 610
2: 915
3: 1000
4: 1464
5: 1830
6: 2000
7: 2440
8: No overflow
indication
9: 10m (Should be
used for test)
Indicates the copy length after clearing the
tF=XX,XXX
used toner counter. This counter is
(Beeper)
automatically cleared if the clear mode key is
pressed after turning off and on the main
switch in the full toner condition.
4-13
A163
Mode No.
Used Toner
Counter Clear
53
54
Developer
Warm-up Setting
Paper Length
Limit Setting
Function
Clear used toner counter.
Data
0: Full toner
condition is not
detected
1: Full toner
condition is
detected.
To clear the counter,
input "0" even if "0" is
already indicated.
Determines the warm-up time to increase the 0: 1 minute
Q/M of the developer. This warm-up is done 1: 2 minute
2: 3 minute
if the fusing temperature is lower than 60C
3: None
when the main switch is turned on.
Determines the maximum paper length.
Note:
If paper longer than 2000 mm is used, skew
copy, poor fusing, crease copy original
damage might occur.
(In mm mode)
0: 2000 mm
1: 3600 mm
2: 5200 mm
3: 6800 mm
4: 8400 mm
5: 9999 mm
55
Copy Number
Limit Setting
Determines the maximum copy number.
56
57
to
58
59
60
A163
(In inch mode)

0: 80.0 inch
1: 160.0 inch
2: 240.0 inch
3: 320.0 inch
4: 400.0 inch
5: 480.0 inch
0: 99 sheets
1: 10 sheets
2: 20 sheets
3: 30 sheets
4: 40 sheets
5: 50 sheets
6: 67 sheets
7: 70 sheets
8: 80 sheets
9: 90 sheets
Not Used
Misfeed Special
Recovery Mode
Fixed Paper
Length Special
Mode
While the Emergency Stop key is held down,

the main motor and the registration clutch are
energized.
Each time +/-- key is pressed while holding
the Preset Cut key down, the length selected
in SP mode 61 is increased/reduced from the
preset paper size.
4-14
0: No
1: Misfeed Special
Recovery Mode
0: Normal
1: Fixed Paper
Length Special
Mode
SM
Mode No.
Fixed Paper
Length Special
Mode
Function
Selects the interval of each step for SP60.
Data
(In mm mode)
0: 100 mm
1: 50 mm
2: 60 mm
3: 120 mm
4: 200 mm
5: 240 mm
6: 250 mm
7: 500 mm
8: 600 mm
61
(In inch mode)
0: 10.0 inch
1: 5.0 inch
2: 6.0 inch
3: 12.0 inch
4: 20.0 inch
5: 24.0 inch
6: 25.0 inch
7: 50.0 inch
8: 60.0 inch
Special Toner
Supply Mode
62
63
Not Used
SP Mode Display
Speed Setting
In the energy saver mode, 10% toner supply 0: No

is done while the "Emergency Stop" key is
1: Special Toner
pressed. Toner sensor voltage is displayed
Supply Mode
on the "Paper Length" indicator. If the voltage
is lower than 1V, toner is not supplied.
Selects the indication speed on the display.
0: 300 ms/letter
1: 100 ms/letter
2: 200 ms/letter
3: 400 ms/letter
4: 500 ms/letter
Indicates the ROM version.
Example:
vEr_1994_06_06_01
64
ROM Version
Display
Year
65
Date
Month
Internal Use Only
RAM Abnormal
Condition Check
Displays the total number of abnormal

conditions of the back-up RAM.
66
67
to
69
SM
A number is added if
an abnormal RAM
condition is detected
when the machine is
powered on.
Not Used
4-15
A163
Mode No.
Total Copy
Length/Number
Display
Function
Displays the total copy length/number
according to the following units.
SP70 = Yard
SP71 = meter
SP72 = 100 inches
SP73 = 50 inches
SP74 = A1 length (594 mm)
SP75 = sheet (any size)
OPC Counter
Displays the total length of copied paper after do = XX,XXX

the OPC drum is installed.
This counter should
be cleared when the
OPC drum is
replaced. (SP #--1)
Displays the total length [m] of copied paper dE = XX,XXX
This counter is
after the new developer is poured.
automatically cleared
when the new
developer
initialization is done.
Displays the total length of copied paper [m] dt = XX,XXX
after a new toner cartridge is installed.
This counter is
when the new toner
cartridge is installed.
Indicates the present toner sensor level.
dL = ab -- -- c
a: Toner density
setting n, H, L
b: TS level
0~5
c: Copy number step
0: ~30m
1: ~60m
3: ~90m
4: ~120m
5: ~150m
6: 150m ~
Displays the total number of paper misfeeds J = XXX
by location. Misfeed location codes displayed Jt = Total Jam
in each SP number are as follows:
SP80: Jt, J90, J98, J99
SP81: J01, J02, J03, J04
SP82: J20, J21, J22, J23
SP83: J30, J31, J32
SP84: J40, J41, J42, J43
SP85: J56, J57, J58, J59
70
to
75
76
Developer
Counter Display
77
Toner Counter
Display
78
Toner Supply
Level Indication
79
Number of
Misfeeds by
Location
80
to
85
A163
4-16
Data
SP70: t0 = XXX,XXX
SP71: t1=XXX,XXX
SP72: t2=XXX,XXX
SP73: t3=XXX,XXX
SP74: t4=XXX,XXX
SP75: t5=XXX,XXX
SM
Mode No.
Misfeed Record
Display
Function
Displays the locations of the last five
misfeeds one after the other.
86
87
to
89
90
to
92
Not Used
Number of
Service Calls by
Location
Service Call
Records
93
94
to
99
SM
Data
J1 = XX (Last jam)
J2 = XX (1 before
the last jam)
J3 = XX (2 before
the last jam)
J4 = XX (3 before
the last jam)
J5 = XX (4 before
the last jam)
Beeper
(XX = Jam Location)
E = XXX
Displays the total number of service calls
(SC) by location. SC codes displayed in each Et = Total SCs
SP number are as follows:
SP90: Et, E1, E9, E10, E11
SP91: E2, E3, E4, E5
SP92: E6, E7, E8
Displays the last five service calls one after E1 = XX (The last
error code)
the other.
E2 = XX (1 before
the last error code)
E3 = XX (2 before
E4 = XX (3 before
E5 = XX (4 before
Beeper
(XX= Error Code)
Not Used
4-17
A163
Mode No.
RAM Clear
--1
Function
Data
Clears selected data items form the RAM. To 0: Not Used
clear the memory, input the number of the
1: Copy Number
item you want to delete, then press the
Counter
(The memory for
key.
SP75)
Note:
2: Copy Length
If all the memory is cleared (if a number from
Counter
20 to 28 is selected), reinput the factory
(SP70 to 74)
settings that are shown on the decal attached
3: OPC Counter
inside the upper right cover.
(SP76)
Please refer to page 4-26 to know the default
4: Developer
settings for each destination. (When No. 10
Counter
to 26 is selected.)
(SP77)(*Note1)
5: Toner Counter
(SP78)
6: Counter for toner
density
step.(*Note2)
7: Clear data No.1 to
9 and 53.
8: SC Counter
(SP90 to 93)
9: Jam Counter
(SP80 to 86)
10: Not Used
* Note: 1
This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described on
page 2-16).
* Note: 2
For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to
0 (m) after the developer initialization. When the developer initialization is
done, this counter to 150 and after 150m of copies, the counter stays at 0.
If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.
A163
4-18
SM
Mode No.
Function
Data
11: Change the
setting to the
U.S.A. version
12: Not Used
13: Not Used
14: Not Used
15: Not Used
16: Not Used
17: Factory use
18: Not Used
--1
19: Not Used

20: Not Used
21: Clear all the
memories and
change the setting
to the U.S.A
version
22: Not Used
23: Not Used
24: Not Used
25: Not Used
26: Not Used
--1
27: Factory use

28: Clear all the
memories
Total Counter Unit Selects the unit in which the total counter
Setting
counts up by.
--2
--3
--4
--5
SM
Inch/mm
Exchange
Not Used
Registration
Adjustment
0: 1 yard
1: 1 m
2: 100 inches
3: 50 inches
4: A1 length
(594 mm)
5. Sheet (Any size)
Selects the unit in which the edge margin and 0: mm
paper length is indicated by.
1: Inch
Adjusts the paper registration.
4-19
0: Standard
--9.9 0 9.9 mm
Advance
Delay
A163
Mode No.
Light Sensor
Adjustment
Function
Data
Change the light sensor setting.
50: Standard
Turn on and off the exposure lamp using the
0 50 99
Copy Media key.
Darker
Lighter
Tracing paper: ON
Film: OFF
Change the hot roller temperature setting.
--7
Hot Roller
Temperature
Adjustment
--8
Pressure Roller
Temperature
Adjustment
Change the pressure roller temperature

setting.
Hot Roller/
Pressure Roller
Temperature
Display
Displays the hot roller temperature and

Fu = XXX
Pr = XXX
pressure roller temperature.
Fu: Hot roller
Even if the SP mode is canceled when the
temperature
temperature is displayed, the temperature is
Pr: Pressure roller
continuously displayed during stand-by
temperature
condition or copy cycle.
If the hot roller temperature
To release this condition, turn the main
switch off and on.
is lower than 100 C
(pressure roller
temperature is lower
than 50C), "LLL" is
indicated.
If the hot roller
temperature is higher
than 210C (pressure
roller temperature is
higher than 180C),
"HHH" is indicated.
Drum Charge
Setting
Determines the drum charge voltage.

200: Standard
In this mode, the charge corona can be
150 200 249
turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Low
High
Translucent paper = ON
Translucent Film = OFF
--6
--9
--10
Copy Grid Setting Determines the copy grid voltage.

In this mode, the grid voltage can be turned
on and off using the Copy Media key.
--11
A163
9: Standard
0 9 15
Low
High
Transfer Corona
Voltage Setting
Determines the transfer corona voltage.

80: Standard
In this mode, the transfer corona can be
40 80 120
turned on and off using the Copy Media key. Low
High
Transfer Voltage
at Paper Trailing
Edge Setting
Determines the transfer corona voltage at the 120: Standard

paper trailing edge.
40 120 249
In this mode, the transfer corona can be
Low
High
turned on and off using the Copy Media key.
--12
--13
0: Standard
--9 0 9C
Decrease
Increase
0: Standard
--9 0 9C
Decrease Increase
4-20
SM
Mode No.
Separation AC
Voltage Setting
Function
Data
Determines the AC separation corona
170: Standard
voltage.
130 170 220
In this mode, the separation corona can be
Low
High
Separation AC
Voltage at the
Paper Leading
--15 Edge Setting

190: Standard
voltage at the paper leading edge.
130 190 220
Low
High
--14
Separation DC
Voltage Setting
Determines the DC separation corona

200: Standard
voltage.
0 200 249
Low
High
Separation DC
Voltage at the
Paper Leading
--17 Edge Setting
Determines the DC separation corona

200: Standard
voltage at the paper leading edge.
0 200 249
Low
High
--16
--18 Not Used

to
--19
Bias Voltage for
the Image Area
Setting
--20
Bias Voltage for

Non-image Area
Setting
--21
SM
Determines the development bias voltage for 3: Standard

the image area.
038
In this mode, the bias voltage can be turned Low
High
Determines the development bias voltage for 4: Standard
the non-image area.
048
In this mode, the bias voltage can be turned Low
High
4-21
A163
Mode No.
Toner Density
Setting
Copy length
(A1 size)
~ 30 m
(~50 sheets)
~ 60 m
(~100 sheets)
~ 90 m
(~150 sheets)
~ 120 m
(~200 sheets)
~ 150 m
(~250 sheets)
--22
23
to
24
Std.
Low
High
4.25V 4.35V 4.00V

4.00V 4.30V 3.50V
3.50V 4.25V 3.00V
3.00V 3.75V 2.50V
2.50V 3.25V 2.00V
Not Used
Toner Density
Sensor Voltage
Setting
--30
Toner Sensor
--31 Voltage Display
(Last Copy)
A163
Function
Data
Selects the toner density setting. The toner 0: Standard
density changes according to the copy length 1: Low
after the developer is replaced.
2: High
Changes the toner density sensor voltage.

Normally, the value is automatically adjusted
when the new developer initialization (SP36)
is done.
In this mode, PTL, main motor, QL and the
bias voltage for non-image area can be
Displays the toner sensor output voltage for
the last copy.
4-22
80: Standard
50 80 120
Low
High
A = X,XX
(Beeper)
SM
Mode No.
Toner Sensor
Voltage Display
(Real Time)
--32
Function
Displays the real time toner sensor output
voltage.
In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL and
the bias voltage for non-image areas can be
Even if the SP mode is canceled when the
voltage is displayed, the voltage is displayed
during the stand-by condition or copy cycling
(the toner sensor output voltage, paper
length and copy counter are displayed one
after the other).
switch off and on.
Data
A = X,XX
A = Toner Sensor
Voltage
During the stand-by
condition, and copy
cycling the following
data is displayed.
A=X,XX
LE=X,XXX
CO=XX
(Beeper)
LE = Paper Length
(ex.
297 mm: LE=0.297
12 inch: LE=0.120)
CO=Copy counter
--33 Not Used

to
--44
Forced Ready
Condition
--50
(Factory Use)
--51
Lamp Off Mode
No Misfeed
--52 Detection Mode
Free Run Mode
--53
Goes to "Ready" condition ignoring the fusing 0: Normal

temperature. This mode cannot be used
1: Forced Ready
during the development idling.
Condition
Fluorescent lamp does not turn on during the
copy cycle.
Ignores jam detections except for initial
jams. The setting automatically returns to "0"
when the main switch is turned off.
The machine caries out copy operation
without an original. This mode can be used if
the optional roll feeder is installed and
selected paper length is more than 594mm.
The machine starts operation when the roll
feed select key is pressed, and stops when
the Emergency Stop key is pressed.
0: Normal
1: Lamp off
0: Normal
1: No Misfeed
Detection
0: Normal
1: Next Paper is fed
when the fusing
exit sensor is
deactivated.
2~250: Next paper is
fed (X-1) seconds
after the fusing exit
sensor is deactivated.
X = Input Number
--54 Not Used

to
--59
Fluorescent Lamp Counts the time when the exposure sensor is 0~250: The total time
Abnormal Time
more than 1 V higher than the target value. (seconds) that the
--60 Check 1
lamp voltage is more
than 1 volt higher
than the target value.
SM
4-23
A163
Mode No.
Function
Data
Fluorescent Lamp Counts the time when the fluorescent lamp is 0~250: The total time
Abnormal Time
in full power during the copy cycle.
(seconds) that the
--61
Check 2
fluorescent lamp is at
full power.
--62 Not Used
--63 Factory Use Only
Manual Feed
Beeper sounds if a sheet is set on the
0: NO
--64 Attention Mode 1 manual feed table before the "Set Paper"
1: Manual Feed
indicator lights.
Attention Mode 1
Manual Feed
Beeper sounds when the manual table is
0: NO
--65 Attention Mode 2 ready to accept the next sheet.
1: Manual Feed
Attention Mode 2
Partial copy
Enable to make "+" margin in the partial copy 0: NO
Leading Edge
mode, ("--" margin cannot be made.)
1: "+" margin can be
--66
Margin
made in the part
copy mode
Toner Full Supply In the Special Toner Supply mode (SP62), if 0: NO
Mode
the "clear/stop" key is pressed while the
1: Toner Full Supply
--67
"Emergency Stop" key is pressed, 100%,
Mode
toner supply is done.
Combine Originals Normally the copy process stops at the
0: Normal
Mode
trailing edge of paper or original which ever 1: Combine
comes first. If this mode is selected, copy
Originals Mode
--68
process continues to the paper trailing edge
even if the original trailing edge comes first.
Using this mode, several originals can be
combined on copy sheet.
A163
4-24
SM
Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No.22)
In mm Mode
0:
1189, 841, 594, 420, 297
1:
2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245
2:
2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000, 900, 800, 700, 600,
500, 400, 300, 245
3:
2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245
4:
2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 245
5:
2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 245
6:
1456, 1030, 728, 515, 364, 257
7:
2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 257, 245
8:
2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 245
9:
2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880, 841, 813, 788,
765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364, 297, 257
10:
2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 245
11:
2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 245
12:
2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500, 1450, 1400, 1350,
1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800, 750, 700, 650, 600, 550,
500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 245
13:
2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750, 700, 650, 594, 550,
500, 420, 297, 245
14:
2000, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625, 594, 515, 420,
364, 297, 245
15:
2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 245
16:
2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 245
17:
2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297, 245
18:
2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 280, 245
19:
The data stored in SP23 to 32
In inch Mode
0:
48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0
1:
44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0
2:
80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:
8:
9:
10:
11:
12:
SM
80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6

80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6
80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 10.0, 9.6
80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 10.0, 9.6
80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6
80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0,
12.0, 11.0, 9.6
80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 47.5, 45.0,
42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0, 12.5, 10.0, 9.6
80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0,
34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6
80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 36.0,
24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
4-25
A163
13:
80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 44.0, 34.0,
22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6
80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0, 56.0, 54.0, 52.0,
50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0, 26.0, 24.0, 22.0,
20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 10.0, 9,6
80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0, 9.6
80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0, 45.0, 42.0, 39.0,
36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0, 9.6
80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7, 24.0, 23.4, 22.0, 20.3,
18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.1, 9.6
The data stored in SP23 to 32
14:
15:
16:
17:
18:
19:
Default Settings (SP # --1)

SP. No.
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#8
#9
#10
#20
#21
#22
#--2
#--3
A163
U.S.A.
2
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
5
1
4-26
SM
3.2
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE
The input check mode allows you to check the current status of electrical
components (such as sensors, switches, etc.) from the operation panel.
The output check mode allows you to turn the individual electrical components
(such as motors, solenoids, etc.) ON/OFF from the operation panel.
3.2.1 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ACCESS PROCEDURE
How to access the output check mode
The second time that the

seconds (until the
and
key is pressed, hold it down for more than 3

indicators blink).
How to leave the input/output check mode

or turn off the main switch.

NOTE: Each of the above procedures must be finished within 20 seconds.
How to select the program number

The program number can be selected by pressing the
To select an input check mode, press the
To select an output check mode, press the
and
keys.
key.
key.
The selected number is displayed on the lead edge erase indicator (the two digit
mark).
To select the program number quickly, hold down the
SM
4-27
or
key.
A163
Rev. 5/95
3.2.2 INPUT CHECK MODE TABLE

The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed on the paper
length indicator ("ON" or "OFF" is displayed.). If a program number not used is
selected, "NOT" is displayed.
Program
No.
--1
--2
--3
--4
Sensor/Switch /Signal
Registration Sensor
Exit Sensor
Original Registration Sensor
Entrance Sensor
Main Motor LOC Signal (Status is

"ON" when the main motor is normally
rotating.)
Door Switch (Status is "ON" when the
--6
door is open.)
--7 to --9 Not Used
--10
R/F Leading Edge Sensor
--11
Roll Feeder Door Switch
--12
Right Cutter Switch
--13
Left Cutter Switch
--14
Paper End Sensor
--5
A163
4-28
SM
3.2.3 OUTPUT CHECK MODE TABLE

Press the
key to turn on the selected electrical component. The status of
the component is displayed on the paper length indicator.
To turn off the component, press the
Program
No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 to 19
20
21
22
key again.
Electrical Component
Main Motor
Toner Supply Clutch
Pick off solenoid
Registration Clutch
Total Counter
Pre-transfer Lamp
Quenching Lamp
Fusing Lamp
Exposure Lamp (100% duty ratio)
Exposure Lamp (selected ID level)
Main Charge Corona
Grid Voltage
Transfer Charge Corona
Not Used
Separation Charge Corona
Not Used
Bias Voltage for the Image Area
Bias Voltage for the Non-image Area
Main Charge Corona + Grid Voltage
Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage for
23
the Non-image Area + Quenching
Lamp
24 to 25 Not Used
26
Roll Feeder Dehumidity Heaters
27
Roll Feeder Cutter Motor *Note
28
Roller Feeder Paper Feed Motor
NOTE: The cutter unit continuously moves between the left and right cutter
switches. The number of the movement (0~9999) is displayed on the
paper length indicator.
SM
4-29
A163
3.3
POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODE
The initial setting, when the main switch is turned on, can be changed in this
mode. The procedure is as follows:
1. Turn on the main switch while holding the Emergencey stop key down
and
indicators blink).
2. Input the operation panel setting that the customer requires (paper size,
image density, etc.).
3. Turn off the main switch.
The setting, just before the main switch is turned off, is memorized as the power
on initial setting. It appears again when the main switch is turned on.
A163
4-30
SM
4.
JAM CODE LIST
When a document (original) jam or paper jam occurs, the cause of the jam is
displayed by using the following jam code.
4.1
ACCESS PROCEDURE
1. When a document jam or paper jam occurs, press and hold the Clear/Stop
key.
2. Read the jam code.
4.2
JAM CODE TABLE
Code
PJ01
PJ02
Cause of Jam
Initial misfeed at the registration sensor.
Initial misfeed at the exit sensor.
PJ03
PJ04
Initial misfeed at the original registration sensor.

Initial misfeed at the entrance sensor.
Initial misfeed at the leading edge sensor of the roll
feeder.
Registration sensor OFF check at the paper leading
SP82
edge.
(Manual Feed and
Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge. Registration Jams)
Registration sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.
Registration sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge.
PJ05
PJ20
PJ21
PJ22
PJ23
PJ30
PJ31
PJ32
PJ40
PJ41
PJ42
PJ43
PJ56
PJ57
PJ58
PJ59
SM
Exit sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge.

Exit sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.
Exit sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.
Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper leading
edge.
Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper leading
edge.
Paper cutter failure.
Door open during the roll feeding.
Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper trailing
edge.
SP Mode No.
SP81
(Initial Jams)
SP83
(Jams at Fusing Unit)
SP84
(Roll Feeder Jams)
SP85
(Roll Feeder Jams)
Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper trailing

edge.
Entrance sensor ON during the roll feeding.
Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge
(in roll feeding).
4-31
A163
Code
PJ90
PJ98
PJ99
Cause of Jam
SP Mode No.
Roll feeder.
SP80
motor does not turn off after paper is fed 500 mm more (Others)
than the maximum paper length.
Registration sensor does not turn off after paper is fed
2500 mm.
Original registration sensor does not turn off after paper
is fed 2500 mm.
NOTE: To display total jam number, access SP mode No. 80.
A163
4-32
SM
5.
SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS

No.
SM
DESCRIPTION
PART NO.
Digital Multimeter
54209507
Deluxe Test Lead

Accessory Kit
54209508
Grease -- Mobil Temp.78
54479078
Grease-G501
52039501
Current Measuring Drum
A0239520
Test Chart OS-A1

(2 sheets/set)
A0239504
Spring Hook
54199653
Setting Powder
54429101
4-33
REMARKS
BECKMAN RMS3030
BECKMAN DL241
400 g/can
A163
6.
SERVICE REMARKS
6.1
DRUM UNIT
6.1.1 Drum
The organic photoconductor drum is comparatively more sensitive to light and
ammonia gas than a selenium drum.
1. Never expose the drum to direct sunlight.
2. Never expose the drum to direct light of more than 1,000 Lux for more than a
minute.
3. Never touch the drum surface with bare hands. When the drum surface is
touched with a finger or becomes dirty, wipe with a dry cloth or clean with wet
cotton. Wipe with a dry cloth after cleaning with wet cotton.
4. Never use alcohol to clean the drum; alcohol dissolves the drum surface.
5. Store the drum in a cool, dry place away from heat.
6. Take care not to scratch the drum as the drum layer is thin and is easily
damaged.
7. Never expose the drum to corrosive gases such as ammonia gas.
8. Always keep the drum in the protective sheet when inserting or pulling the
drum unit out of the copier to avoid exposing it to bright light or direct sunlight.
This will protect the drum from light fatigue.
9. Before removing the drum, place a sheet of paper under the drum to catch
any falling toner.
10. Dispose of used drums according to local regulations.
11. Perform the light sensor adjustment when a new drum is installed.
12. Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it.
13. Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when removing or
reinstalling the drum.
14. When installing and/or removing the pick-off pawl unit, do not press too
strongly. Otherwise, the drum unit may deform.
A163
4-34
SM
15. When the drum unit is removed from the copier, do not close the paper path
section if possible. Otherwise, the gas springs at both sides open the paper
path section forcibly if the paper path section is released. If you close the
paper path section, take care not to injure yourself by opening the paper path
section. Also, releasing only one side of the paper path section deform the
copier machine, which may cause paper jam and copy image problem.
Release both levers together while holding the paper path section to open the
paper path section slowly.
16. The drum unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by dropping the
drum unit when removing and installing it.
6.2
CHARGE CORONA
1. The wire can also be cleaned with a blower brush. If the wire is cleaned with
a dry cloth, make sure that the wire does not become stretched. Do not use
sand paper or a solvent.
2. Do not touch the corona wire and the grid wires with oily hands. Oil stains
may cause uneven image density on copies.
3. Make sure that the corona wire is correctly positioned and that there is no
foreign material (iron filings, etc.) on the casing.
4. Clean the grid wires with a dry cloth.
5. When reinstalling the charge corona unit, make sure that the 2 connectors (C
for the charge corona, G for the grid bias) are set properly.
6. Make sure that the grid wires are correctly placed on the eight slots, are all
straight, and not crossed.
7. Do not expand and bend the corona wires and grid wires.
8. Make sure that the wire junction is positioned inside the right endblock.
SM
4-35
A163
6.3
OPTICS
1. Clean the exposure glass with water or alcohol.

2. Clean the fiber optics array with lens paper or silicone cloth.
3. Make sure that the exposure glass is under the rear original guide plate when
reassembling.
4. Make sure that the direction of the aperture of the exposure lamp is towards
the fiber optics array side (rear side) when reassembling.
5. When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side of the fiber optics
array by touching the optics side plate.
6.4
DEVELOPMENT
1. Be careful not to nick or scratch the development roller.

2. Clean the drive gears after removing used developer.
3. Initial conditioning (SP#36) is necessary when the developer is replaced.
4. Dispose of used developer according to local regulations.
5. Do not loosen the painted screws which determine the development doctor
blade height and do not push the doctor blade too hard, otherwise the doctor
gap may change.
6. Be careful not to bend the bias terminal.
7. When the development unit is removed from the copier, do not close the
paper path section if possible. Otherwise, the gas springs at both sides open
the paper path section forcibly if the paper path section is released. If you
close the paper path section, be careful not to injure yourself when opening
the paper path section. Also, releasing only one side of the paper path
section deform the copier machine, which may cause paper jam and copy
image problem. Release both levers together while holding the paper path
section to open the paper path section slowly.
8. The development unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by dropping
the development unit when removing and installing it.
9. During the developer initialization, do not turn off the main switch, or do not
open the original feed unit or the paper path section, or do not unplug the
copier power cord. If these conditions happen, do the developer initialization
again, the toner density sensor cannot be adjusted.
A163
4-36
SM
6.5
TRANSFER AND SEPARATION
1. Clean the corona wires with a blower brush. If the wires are cleaned with a
dry cloth, make sure that the wire does not become stretched.
2. When adjusting the corona current, always use the drum current
measuring drum.
3. Make sure that the T & S corona unit is set correctly by pressing it down
when reinstalling.
4. Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may cause
uneven charge on the drum.
5. Do not expand and bend the corona wires.
6. Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper,... etc.) as this
will damage the corona wire.
7. Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause uneven charge on
the drum.
6.6
CLEANING UNIT
1. Be careful not to damage the edge of the cleaning blade.

2. Dispose of used toner according to local regulations.
3. Do not press the cleaning blade too hard. Otherwise, the drum unit may
deform.
4. When installing or replacing the cleaning blade, release the pressure several
times manually, and then hold down the cleaning blade gently along its entire
length ensure that the cleaning blade contacts the drum. Otherwise, cleaning
failure may occur.
5. When replacing the cleaning blade, apply setting powder on the edge of the
cleaning blade.
6. Empty the toner collection bottle every service call and clear the memory
counter SP#52 for used toner overflow detection by SP#53. Do not perform
SP#53 without emptying the toner collection bottle.
If "FULL" is indicated in the copy counter, SP#52 can also be reset to 0 by
pressing the Clear Modes/Standby key after opening and closing the paper
path section. Instruct customers to deal with the toner collection bottle if the
"FULL" condition is indicated.
SM
4-37
A163
Rev. 9/27/96
6.7 FUSING UNIT

1. Be careful not to damage the edges of the hot roller strippers and tension
springs.
2. Do not touch the fusing lamp with bare hands.
3. Make sure that the fusing lamp does not touch the hot roller.
4. Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor and pressure roller
thermistor when removing and reinstalling hot roller or the pressure
roller.
5. The fusing unit is heavy. Take care not to injure yourself by dropping the
fusing unit when removing and installing it.
6.7A
PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE
The following procedure is a method to determine whether the pressure

roller should be replaced.
1. Access Sp mode with the steps below.
In order, press Clear Modes (C) key, Plus (+) key, Minus (-) key,
Clear/Stop key, press and hold the Clear/Stop key again for longer than
3 seconds.
2. Select Lamp Off Mode with the steps below.
a) Confirm that "Lead Margin" indicators lights.
If "Lead Margin" indicator does not light, press Function Select key
until it lights.
b) Select "-51" by pressing Minus key. ("-51" is the number to select
Lamp Off Mode.)
c) Press Function Select key until "Paper Length" indicator lights.
d) Select "1" by pressing Plus key. ("1" is the number to set Lamp Off
Mode.)
e) Press RF Select key to set Lamp Off Mode.
3. To prevent a paper misfeed create a lead edge margin with the steps
below.
a) Press Function Select key until "Lead Margin" indicator lights.
b) Continue to press Plus key until "99 mm" or "4.0 inches" (max. value)
is indicated.
4. Make a copy using a less fusible kind of paper like film, translucent paper
or thicker plain paper with vertical grain direction.
Note:
A163
Before making a copy, set the fusing temperature setting to

the mode which is one step lower than the proper setting for
the particular kind of paper. For example, if the proper
setting is Mode 3, select Mode 2 for this test. Refer to TSB
No. FW740-010 for more information regarding the proper
settings for particular types of paper and the adjustment
procedure for non-listed papers.
4-38
SM
Rev. 9/27/96
5. Scrape some black areas on the copy using a cotton cloth approximately
5 times.
6. Check whether the toner is peeled off on the areas that correspond with
the scraped parts of the pressure roller. If white lines and/or bands
appear, the pressure roller should be replaced with a new one.
7. Before turning the main switch "OFF" to reset the SP mode, reset "Lamp
Off Mode", "Lead Margin" and "Fusing Temperature Setting" back to the
original settings.
6.8 ORIGINAL FEED

1. Do not touch the original feed rollers, original registration rollers, platen
roller and press rollers with bare hands.
2. Clean the white plate with water or alcohol.
6.9 PAPER FEED

Service Tables
1. Do not touch the manual feed rollers and registration rollers with bare
hands.
2. A worn out registration roller causes paper to crease. It should be
replaced.
6.10 ROLL FEEDER

1. The copier is not attached to the table and roll feeder is attached to the
table and copier. Do not lift the copier from the table, otherwise roll
feeder unit is deformed.
2. When the copier and roll feeder is moved, loosen the screws for angle
bracket and spacer and retighten them for absorb floor distortion.
6.11 OTHERS
1. When replacing the main board, if the RAM on the old main board is still
usable, remove and place it on the new main board. Then, install the new
main board in the copier.
2. After installing the new main board with a new RAM, clear the RAM
memory. (Do not clear RAM memory if you have placed the old RAM on
the new main board.)
3. Take care not to damage the mylars on the rear feed table during
servicing.
4. When replacing a sensor, do not overtighten the screws. This may
damage the sensor.
SM
4-39
A163
REPLACEMENT AND
ADJUSTMENT
1.
EXTERIOR COVERS
[A]
[B]
[J]
[I]
[C]
[H]
[G]
[D]
1.1
[E]
[F]
LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL
1.1.1 Left Upper Cover

1. Remove the left upper cover [A] (2 screws).
1.1.2 Left Lower Cover
1. Open the paper path section [B].
2. Remove the left lower cover [C] (2 screws).
1.2
RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL
1.2.1 Right Upper Cover

1. Remove the right upper cover [D] (2 screws).
1.2.2 Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right Lower Rear Covers
1. Open the paper path section.
2. Remove the right lower cover [E] (2 screws), right lower middle cover [F], and
toner collection bottle [G].
3. Remove the right lower rear cover [H] (1 screw).
1.3
REAR COVER REMOVAL
1.3.1 Rear Cover

1. Remove the rear cover [I] (2 screws).
NOTE: When re-installing the rear cover, push in the rear cover hooking
portion [J] over the copier bottom plate as shown.
SM
5-1
A163
2.
OPTICS
[C]
[A] [D]
[B]
[E]
[G]
[F]
2.1
ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL
1. Remove the left and right upper covers.

2. Remove the copy tray [A].
3. Push the projections [B] into the holes [C] of the rear side of the original feed
unit as shown and remove the operation panel [D] (2 connectors).
4. Open the original feed unit [E] and unhook the stoppers [F] at both ends.
5. Turn the original feed unit and two bushings [G] at both ends 1/4 of a turn and
remove.
A163
5-2
SM
[C]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[E]
[D]
2.2
[A]
EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL
1. Remove the original feed unit.

2. Remove the exposure glass bracket [A] (2 screws).
3. Remove the rear original guide plate [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the exposure glass [C] by sliding it out to the right side and lifting up
the left side as shown.
NOTE: Make sure that the exposure glass is under the rear original guide
plate when reassembling.
2.3
EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL
1. Remove the exposure glass.

2. Remove the front original guide plate [D] (2 screws).
NOTE: If the exposure lamp is too tight to be turned, remove one side of the
exposure lamp socket (1 screw) and remove the exposure lamp.
3. Turn the exposure lamp [E] 1/4 of a turn and remove.
NOTE: Make sure that the direction of the aperture [F] of the exposure lamp
is towards the fiber optics array side (rear side).
SM
5-3
A163
2.4
FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL
[C]
[B]
[D]
[A]
1. Follow the steps from 1 to 3 of the exposure lamp removal.

2. Remove the original registration sensor bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Lift up the fiber optics array [B] and remove it from the left side by sliding it
out to the right side as shown.
NOTE: When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side [C] of
the fiber optics array by touching the optics side plate [D].
A163
5-4
SM
2.5
LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT
Rev. 5/95
[A]
1. Remove the exposure lamp.

2. Replace the light sensor [A] (1 screw, 1 connector).
3. Perform light sensor adjustment. See page 5-39
SM
5-5
A163
3.
DEVELOPMENT
3.1
DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL
[B]
[A]
[C]
1. Remove the left and right upper cover.

2. Open the paper path section and original feed unit.
3. Remove the toner supply cover [A].
4. Remove the manual entrance feed cover [B] (2 pins).
5. Remove the paper feed driven unit [C] (2 screws and 1 connector).
A163
5-6
SM
[A]
[B]
[A]
[A]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[F]
[G]
6. Remove the 4 shoulder screws [A] and 2 screws [B] fixing the development
unit.
7. Disconnect the 14p connector [C] and remove it out of the cutout [D].
8. Remove the development unit [E].
CAUTION: Do not loosen the painted screws [F] which determine the
development doctor blade height and do not push the doctor
blade [G] too strongly, otherwise the doctor gap may change.
SM
5-7
A163
3.2
DEVELOPER REMOVAL
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
NOTE: Be careful not to bend the bias terminal.

1. Remove the development unit and place it on a large sheet of paper [A] as
shown.
2. Remove the toner supply unit casing [B] (2 pins) and development filter [C]
and bracket [C] and clean them.
3. Stand up the development unit as shown (the drive section of the unit is the
upper side).
4. Turn the paddle roller knob [D] clockwise. The developer will fall out onto the
paper.
5. Repeat step 4 until all of the developer has been dumped out.
6. Clean the development unit prior to reassembling. Especially, clean the right
end of the unit.
A163
5-8
SM
3.3
TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT

[C]
[E]
[D]
[B]
[A]
1. Remove the development unit.

2. Disconnect the harness connector [A] and take the harness from the 2
clamps [B].
3. Remove the 2 screws [C] of the toner density sensor holder.
4. Pull out the harness from the toner density sensor side until the relay
connector [D] appears.
5. Replace the toner density sensor [E] (2 screws and 1 connector).
SM
5-9
A163
3.4
PTL REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
1. Remove the paper feed driven unit (follow the steps from 1 to 5 of the
development unit removal).
2. Remove the PTL assembly [A] (4 screws, 3 connectors, and 4 clamps [B]).
A163
5-10
SM
3.5
DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: This adjustment is required when the charge/bias/grid power pack is

replaced.
Preparation:
1. Turn off the main switch, and remove the rear cover.
2. Connect the ground terminal of the multimeter to the machine ground, and
connect the voltage terminal to TP1 on the charge/bias/grid power pack.
3. Set the multimeter range to dc 1500 V.
4. Turn on the main switch.
3.5.1 Bias Voltage for Image Area
ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --180 10 V.
1. Access SP mode and select No. --20.
2. Press the
key to turn on the bias voltage.
3. Check the multimeter. If the voltage is not that of the standard voltage, press
the
key and then change the voltage using
and
keys.
4. If the voltage is within that of the standard voltage, press the
SM
5-11
key.
A163
3.5.2 Bias Voltage for Non-image Area

ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --200 10V
2. Press the
key to turn on the bias voltage.
the
and
keys.
4. If the voltage is within the standard, press the
A163
5-12
key.
SM
4.
DRUM UNIT
4.1
DRUM UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[A]
[F]
[C]
[D]
[E]

2. Remove the 2 screws [A] at both ends.
3. Remove the timing belt [B] and disconnect the harness connector [C].
4. Remove the drum unit [D].
5. Place the drum unit on the flat floor.
NOTE: (1) When reinstalling the drum unit, hook the drum unit guides [E] on
the pins [F] of the copier side plates.
(2) Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it.
SM
5-13
A163
Rev. 5/95
4.2
DRUM REPLACEMENT
[E]
[D]
[B]
[F]
[C]
[B]
[A]
1. Remove the drum unit.

2. Remove the pulley [A] (1 C-ring).
3. Remove the 2 bearing holders [B] (2 screws each).
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when
removing or reinstalling the drum.
4. Remove the drum [C] with the drum shaft.
5. Loosen the drum knob [D] by turning it counter clockwise as shown.
6. Remove the drum flange [E].
7. Replace the drum with new one.
NOTE: when reinstalling the gear [F], make sure that the direction of the
projection of the gear is on the drum side.
A163
5-14
SM
Rev. 5/95
4.3
CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT
[E
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
[F]

2. Remove the charge corona unit (Pg 5-16)
3 Remove the quenching lamp unit [A].
4. Remove the pressure spring [B] and bushing [C].
5. Slide the cleaning blade [D] to the left side and remove it from the right side.
NOTE:
SM
1. Do not press the cleaning blade too strongly. Otherwise, the drum
unit may deform.
2. When installing or replacing the cleaning blade, release the pressure
[E] several times manually, and then hold down the cleaning blade
gently along its entire length to ensure that the cleaning blade
contacts the drum. Even if the drum is installed already, this action
[F] can be taken through the rear side from where the rear feed table
assembly is removed (follow steps 1 to 3 of the ozone filter
replacement).
3. When replacing the cleaning blade, apply setting powder on the
edge of the cleaning blade.
5-15
A163
4.4
CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL

[A]
[A]
[B]

2. Remove the ground springs [A].
3. Remove the charge corona unit [B] (2 connectors).
NOTE: When reinstalling the charge corona unit, make sure that the 2
connectors (C for the charge corona, G for the grid bias) are set
properly.
A163
5-16
SM
4.5
CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT

[E]
[B]
[A]
[C]
[B]
[D]
1. Remove the charge corona unit.
2. Remove the 4 grid wires [A] (4 springs).
3. Remove the endblock covers [B].
4. Replace the corona wire [C] (1 spring).
NOTE: (1) Make sure that the grid wires are correctly placed on the eight
slots [D], are all straight, and not crossed.
(2) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may
cause uneven charge on the drum.
(3) Do not expand and bend the corona wires and grid wires.
(4) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper,...
etc.) as this will damage the corona wire.
(5) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause
uneven charge on the drum.
(6) Make sure that the wire junction [E] is positioned inside the right
endblock.
SM
5-17
A163
4.6
PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
1. Remove the drum unit and place it as shown.

2. Remove the pressure spring [A] and pick-off pawl unit [B] (2 screws and 1
connector).
NOTE: When installing and/or removing the pick-off pawl unit, do not press
too strongly. Otherwise, the drum unit may deform.
A163
5-18
SM
4.7
GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT
Rev. 2/7/96
ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc --940 10V.

NOTE: This adjustment is required when the charge/bias/grid power pack is
replaced.
1. Turn off the main switch and remove the rear cover.
2. Connect the ground terminal of the multimeter to the machine ground, and
connect the voltage terminal to TP2 on the charge/bias/grid power pack.
3. Set the multimeter range to dc 1500 V.
4. Turn on the main switch.
6. Press the
key to turn on the grid voltage.
the
and
keys.
SM
5-19
key.
A163
4.8
DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: a) The drum currents vary with environmental conditions such as

humidity and atmospheric pressure. Generally it is not necessary to
adjust the drum currents because they have already been adjusted
for a wide range of environments at the factory.
b) Drum current adjustment is necessary whenever the power packs
are replaced: adjustment may also be necessary to correct problems
with paper separation, incomplete toner transfer, or image density.
c) Make sure that the main switch is turned off when you change the
range on the digital multimeter. If it is not, the multimeter may be
damaged.
d) There are variable resistors to change the charge currents, but they
should not be changed. The drum currents should be adjusted by
changing SP mode setting.
Preporation
1. Remove the developer unit.
3. Remove the OPC drum from the drum unit, and install the current
measurement drum [A] instead of the OPC drum.
[A]
A163
5-20
SM
4. Install the drum unit [B] on the machine.
[B]
CAUTION: Be careful not to turn on the main motor. If the main motor
accidentally turns on, some parts around the drum may be
damaged.
SM
5-21
A163
4.8.1 Charge Current Adjustment
ADJUSTMENT STANDARD: dc--1000 20 A

WARNING: Make sure that the machine is unplugged before connecting
the multimeter on the charge/bias/grid power pack.
Pay extreme attention when connecting the multimeter. The
potential of the charge corona terminal becomes --5kV.
1. Connect all the terminals of the current measurement drum to the machine
ground.
2. Disconnect the charge corona terminal of the charge/bias/grid power pack.
3. Connect the multimeter as shown in the illustration.
4. Set the multimeter range at dc 2 mA.
5. Plug in the machine and turn on the main switch.
7. Press the
key to turn on the charge corona.
the
and
keys so that the charge current is dc --1000 20 A.

A163
5-22
key.
SM
4.8.2 Transfer Current Adjustment
ADJUSTMENT STANDARD:
dc --100 5 A (Leading edge to 20 mm from the trailing edge)
dc --150 5 A (20 mm trailing edge)
1 Connect the multimeter as shown above.
2. Set the multimeter range at dc 200 A.
5. Press the
key to turn on the transfer corona.
6. Check the multimeter. Press the

voltage using
--100 5 A.
key and then change the
and
keys so that the transfer current is dc
key.
8. Select SP mode No. --13.

9. Press the
key to turn on the transfer corona.

voltage using
--150 5 A.
key and then change the
and
keys so that the transfer current is dc
SM
5-23
key.
A163
4.8.3 Separation Current Adjustment
ADJUSTMENT STANDARD:
ac 250 10 A (Normal Paper)
ac 350 10 A (Film and leading
edge of translucent paper)
dc --20 2.5 A
1. Connect the multimeter as shown above.
2. Set the multimeter range at ac 2 mA.
5. Press the
key to turn on the separation corona.

using
10 A.
and
key and then change the current
keys so that the ac separation current is ac 250
key.
8. Select SP mode No. --15

9. Press the

using
10 A.
and
keys so that the ac separation current is ac 350
A163
5-24
key.
SM
Rev. 5/95
12. Set the multimeter range at dc 200 A.

14. Press the

using
2.5 A.
and
keys so that the dc separation current is dc --20
key.

18. Press the

using
2.5 A.
and
keys so that the dc separation current is dc --20
SM
5-25
key.
A163
5.
FUSING
5.1
FUSING UNIT REMOVAL

[I]
[H]
[H]
[E]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[A]
[B]
[G]
1. Remove the copier rear cover.

2. Open the exit cover [A] and remove the shoulder screws [B] at both ends.
3. Disconnect the connector [C] and flex the hinge arms [D] of the exit cover
slightly to the outside of the exit unit shafts and remove.
4. Turn the exit unit 1/4 of a turn to the front side (rear view) and remove it by
pulling out.
NOTE: When reinstalling the exit unit, set the right hinge [F] between the two
pulleys [G] and raise the left hinge [H] using tape [I].
A163
5-26
SM
[F]
[E]
[G]
[C]
[D]
[C]
[B]
[A]
5. Disconnect the connectors [A].

6. Remove the screw [B] fixing the safety switch bracket.
7. Remove the 2 screws [C].
8. While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [D], pull out the fusing
unit.
NOTE: While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [D], set the
fusing unit on the guides [E] and align the cuts [F] to the side plates
[G] at both ends when reinstalling the fusing unit.
SM
5-27
A163
Rev. 5/95
5.2
HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[B]
[F]
[B]
[C]
[C]
[D]
[E]
[G]
[J]
[K]
[I]
[G]
[A]
[A] [J] [I]
[H]
NOTE: Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor when removing and
reinstalling the hot roller.
1. Remove the fusing unit.
2. Remove the pressure springs [A].
3. Remove the fusing lamp brackets [B] and cushions [C] (1 screw each).
4. Remove the fusing lamp [D] from the left side as shown (1 connector [E], rear
view).
5. Remove the 2 C-rings [G], 1 gear [H], 2 bushings [I], and 2 bearings [J]).
6. Slide the hot roller [K] to the right side and remove it from the left side.
A163
5-28
SM
5.3
Rev. 5/95
PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT

[H]
[G]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[B]
[F]
[A]
[I]
[I]
[J]
CAUTION: 1) Do not touch the hot roller or pressure roller while they
are hot.
2) Be careful not to damage the hot roller thermistor [A]
and pressure roller thermistor [B] when removing and
reinstalling the pressure roller.
1. Remove the hot roller.
2. Push the projection [C] of the fusing entrance guide stopper and remove the
fusing entrance guide [D].
3. Remove the pressure roller stripper unit [E] (4 screws).
4. Lift up the pressure roller (access the pressure roller from the cut [F] of the
frame), slide out the pressure roller shaft [G] to the left, then remove the
pressure roller [H].
5. Replace the pressure roller (2 stoppers [I] and 1 shaft [J]).
NOTE: When reinstalling pressure roller, set the right pressure roller stopper
and push the pressure roller shaft to the right from the left, and set
the left pressure roller stopper [ ].
SM
5-29
A163
[A]
[B]
[C]
5.4
PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT
1. Follow step 1 to 5 of the fusing unit removal.

2. Remove the pressure roller thermistor [A] (1 screw).
5.5
PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT

2. Remove the pressure roller stripper unit [B] (4 screws).
5.6
HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT

2. Remove the hot roller stripper unit [C] (2 screws).
A163
5-30
SM
[A]
[E] [D]
[E]
[E]
[G]
[C]
[B]
[A]
[F] [G]
5.7
HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT

2. Remove the 4 screws [A] of the fusing stay.
3. Disconnect the thermofuse connector [B] from the fusing lamp harness [C].
4. Remove the hot roller thermistor [D] (1 screw and 1 spring, 7 clamps [E]).
5.8
FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT
1. Follow step 1 to 3 of the hot roller thermistor replacement.

2. Remove the fusing thermofuse [F] (1 screw and 4 clamps [G]).
SM
5-31
A163
5.9
FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
Caution: When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly
start to drive the fusing section. Keep your hands away from
any mechanical and electrical components during this period.
This procedure is required only when the hot roller thermistor is replaced.
Adjustment standard: Mode 1 (155C), Mode 2 (160C), Mode 3 (165C), Mode 4
(170C), Mode 5 (180C), Mode 6 (190C), Mode 7 (196C)
3. Remove the pressure roller thermistor screw and hang the thermistor by the
harness.
4. Actuate the fusing exit safety switch [A].
5. Turn on the main switch, select the normal fusing temperature mode, and
wait for longer than 10 minutes.
6. Using a digital thermometer and probe [B], measure the temperature at the
middle of the hot roller.
7. If the actual temperature is different from the value for the mode being used
(use SP#1 to find out the current mode), adjust the temperature using SP#-7.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 and confirm the temperature.
9. Reassemble the machine.
A163
5-32
SM
6.
T & S CORONA UNIT
6.1
T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[C]
[C]
[D]
1. Open the paper path section [A] and take out the T & S corona unit [B] (2
connectors [C]).
NOTE: 1) Make sure that the T & S corona unit is set correctly by pressing it
down when reinstalling.
2) Remove the connector cover [D] (1screw) for connecting the 2
connectors.
SM
5-33
A163
6.2
TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE

REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[I]
[C]
[B]
[F]
[H]
[E]
[H]
[D]
[G]
NOTE: (1) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may
cause uneven charging of the drum.
(2) Do not stretch or bend the corona wires.
(3) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper,
etc.) as this will damage the corona wire.
(4) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause
uneven charging of the drum.
6.2.1 Preparation
1. Remove the T & S corona unit.
2. Remove the paper guides [A] and endblock covers [B].
A163
5-34
SM
6.2.2 Separation Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the separation corona wire [C].
2. Hook the new separation corona wire on the terminal [D] of the right endblock.
NOTE: Make sure that the wire junction [E] is positioned inside the right
endblock.
3. Hook the other side of the separation corona wire on the spring hook [F]
(special tool: 54199653). While pushing the spring [G] in the direction of the
arrow, hook the separation corona wire on the spring.
4. Set the wire on the slots [H].
6.2.3 Transfer Corona Wire Replacement
1. Remove the transfer corona wire [I].
2. Install the new transfer corona wire.
SM
5-35
A163
7.
OTHERS
7.1
OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT
[A]
[H]
[G]
[F]
[E]
[I]
[D]
[I]
[B]
[C]
NOTE: Take care not to damage the mylars [A] on the rear feed table.
1. Open the fusing exit cover [B] and exit unit [C].
2. Remove the copy tray [D].
3. Remove the rear feed table assembly [E] (2 screws and 1 connector).
4. Unhook the blower duct [F] and remove.
5. Unhook the fan support plate [G] and remove.
6. Replace the ozone filter [H].
NOTE: When reinstalling the rear feed table assembly, fix the 2 screws [I]
while pushing the assembly.
A163
5-36
SM
7.2
ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION
[C]
[A]
[B]
[C]
1. Remove the rear cover of the machine (2 screws).

2. Remove the T&S corona unit.
3. Install the anticondensation heater [A] (3 screws).
4. Put the harness of the heater into the cutout [B] of the frame.
5. Connect the connector of the heater [C] with the one beside the ac drive
board.
SM
5-37
A163
Rev. 5/95
8.
COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT
-- General Information -Image density is affected by the following factors:

(1) Light Intensity
(2) Bias Voltage
(3) Toner Density
(4) Grid Voltage
(5) Charge Corona Current
The items listed above must be kept in balance to maintain correct image density.
In the field, image density should be adjusted first by changing the light
intensity. (Adjust the light sensor voltage.) If results are unsatisfactory, the
bias voltage can be changed. Also, if requested by the customer, the
overall image density can be changed by changing the toner density.
Normally, this should be kept at the normal position (factory setting).
The grid voltage and charge corona current are carefully adjusted at the factory.
Any adjustment out of the adjustment standards will result in over toning, toner
scattering, dirty background, or light image density problems. The grid voltage
and charge corona current adjustment should be done only when replacing the
Charge/Bias/Grid power pack, or to correct certain problems with image density
after checking all other possible causes.
NOTE: Adjusting grid voltage will not affect toner supply amount, but will
affect the amount of charge reaching the drum. Exposing the the
drum to light will not disipate all residual voltage resulting in
overtoning and background.
A163
5-38
SM
8.1
LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT
1. Every Call
2. When replacing the following part
When:
Exposure lamp Light sensor

Drum
Purpose:
Adjustment
Standard:
Perform:
How:
RAM on the main board
To maintain the correct light intensity.

Level 2 (10%) of the 9 step gray scale on the OS-A1 chart
should be slightly visible when the 4th manual image density
level is selected.
Change SP #-6 setting.
Change the light sensor voltage.

2. Clean the following parts:
Item No.
Section
Method
(1)
Optics (Exposure glass, fiber

optics array)
Damp cotton and dry soft

cloth
(2)
Corona wires (charge, transfer and

separation) and casing.
Dry cloth
(3)
PTL
Dry cloth or blower brush
3. Remove the middle right cover.

4. Make several copies at manual image density level 4 with OS-A1 chart.
5. Confirm that level 2 (10%) of the 9 step gray scale is slightly visible on the
copy. If the copy image density is not correct, proceed with the following step.
6. Change SP #-6 setting in the SP mode.
If the image density is too dark: Increase SP #-6 setting.
If the image density is too light: Decrease SP #-6 setting.
7. Confirm that image density is within the adjustment standard.
SM
5-39
A163
8.2
IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT
1. The image is blurred even though the image density in

black solid areas is acceptable.
When:
2. Dirty background, where the problem is not caused by

excess toner and cannot be solved by adjusting the light
sensor voltage.
Purpose:
To improve the copy image.
Perform:
SP #-20
How:
SP #-20
Change the development bias voltage for image density

control by SP #-20.
3 Standard
038
Darker
Lighter
1. Make a copy after adjusting the light intensity.

2. If the image is blurred:
Decrease bias voltage by one step and readjust light intensity.
If the background is dirty:
Increase bias voltage by one step and readjust light intensity.
A163
5-40
SM
8.3
TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT
When:
Customer wants to change the overall image density of the

copies.
Purpose:
To change toner concentration inside development unit.
Perform:
SP #-22
How:
Change the toner density setting by SP #-22
NOTE: The toner density can also be adjusted using SP #-30 (toner density
sensor voltage setting). To return SP #-30 to the initial value, take memo
when the value is changed.
8.4
REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
When:
Purpose:
Adjustment
Standard:
Perform:
How:
Registration is not within the adjustment standard.

To maintain proper registration.
0 3 mm (0 0.12")
SP #-5
Change the registration roller start timing by SP #-5.
1. Make several copies by using the manual feed or roll feeder and check the
registration.
2. Adjust the registration using SP #-5 if the registration is not within the
adjustment standard.
SM
5-41
A163
TROUBLESHOOTING
1. COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING

1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY
Is the used paper moist or extremely dry?
No
Yes
Replace the paper.
Is the toner sensor voltage within the no toner supply level (level 0) ?
(Refer to Page 2-16.)
Yes
No
Is there sufficient toner in the cartridge?
Yes
No
Replace the toner cartridge.
Is the toner supply clutch energized?

Yes
No
Check the main board and the toner supply clutch.
Does the toner sensor voltage decrease in the special toner supply mode (SP#62)?
Yes
No
Check the toner supply mechanism.
The amount of toner used exceeds the toner supply amount.

Supply toner until the toner sensor voltage reaches the target value.
Is the solid black copy dark enough? (Make a solid black copy using SP#
--51.)
Yes
No
Does the image density recover (without dirty background) after forcing supply of toner
using SP#62?
Yes
No
Check the charge corona, transfer corona and development bias.
Check the toner sensor and main board.

Check the light sensor, FL regulator and main board.
SM
6-1
A163
1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE
Make a solid black copy using SP#--51. Is the image density even?
Yes
No
Is the developer level in the development unit?
Yes
No
Check and correct the machine level.

Clean the charge corona wire, grid wire, and transfer corona wire. Check if they are correctly
set
on the slots of the end blocks.
Clean the optics. If the problem is not fixed, replace the exposure lamp.
A163
6-2
SM
1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND
Clean the optics and check the copy image.

No good
Change the light sensor setting to a lighter position using SP#
--6.
No good
Is the bias voltage correct?
Yes
No
Adjust the bias voltage.

Is the toner sensor voltage much lower than the threshold between level 0 and 1?
(Check using SP#--32 referring to Page 2-16.)
No
Yes
Check the main board and toner supply clutch.
Is the image density of solid areas high?

No
Yes
Check the toner sensor.
Make several blank copies. Is the background still dirty?

Yes
No
Check the cleaning blade.

Are the grid voltage and the charge corona current correct?
Yes
No
Adjust the grid voltage and/or the charge corona current.

Replace the drum.
SM
6-3
A163
1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND
Vertical line or band?

Yes
No
Does the black line appear at 251 mm intervals?
No
Yes
Clean or replace the drum.
If a black band appears 250 mm from the leading edge, turn the main switch off and on . If
the problem is not fixed, check the T& S corona leakage.*NOTE
Check the part of the following items that corresponds to the position of the vertical line or band.
Charge corona wire

Grid wires
Light path (Exposure lamp, fiber optics array, exposure glass)
Cleaning blade
Development unit
Drum
NOTE:
A163
If the separation corona leakage is detected, the separation corona will

be turned off. This condition will not be reset until the main switch is
turned off and on. If the separation corona does not turn on, a black
band appears 250 mm from the paper leading edge.
6-4
SM
1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY
Is the used paper moist?

No
Yes
Replace the paper.
Are the terminals of the charge corona unit and the T& S corona unit connected properly?
Yes
No
Set the terminals properly.

Is the charge corona wire or the T & S corona wire broken?
No
Yes
Replace the broken part.
Are the charge corona and transfer corona applied?

Yes
No
Check the main board, charge/bias/grid power pack, and T & S power pack.
Does leakage occur in the T & S endblocks?
No
Yes
Replace the defective parts.
Are the development drive gears broken?

No
Yes
Replace the broken gears.
Check the drum drive mechanism.
SM
6-5
A163
1.6 PAPER CREASING
Is the used paper moist?

No
Yes
Change the paper.
Is the paper feed direction the same as the paper fiber direction?
No
Yes
Change the paper transport direction, if possible.(NOTE 1.)
Decrease the fusing temperature using SP mode #1 to #3.(NOTE 2.)
NOTE:
A163
1. If there is rib shape creasing, the paper feed direction should be

the same as the paper fiber direction.
2. After decreasing the fusing temperature, check if the image is
completely fused on the paper.
6-6
SM
2. SERVICE CALL CONDITION

When a service call condition occurs, the Call Service indicator
and service
call codes are displayed.
When the service call conditions E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, and E8 conditions occur,
for safety reason they cannot be cleared by turning the main switch off and on.
Accessing SP38 and changing the date from "1" to "0" must be done to clear
these service call conditions.
2.1 SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal

-DefinitionThe light sensor voltage is less than 0.4 volts for 10 seconds.
<Points to check>
Exposure lamp
Light sensor
FL regulator (CN402-1,2,4, and 5, CN401-1, -2, -4)
Main board (CN106-A3, and CN104-B1, -B2, -A29 -A30)
2.2 SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open

-DefinitionThe temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach 100 C within
4 minutes and 30 seconds after the main switch is turned on.
<Point to check>
Fusing thermofuse
Hot roller thermistor
AC drive board (T202-2, RA201-T4)
Main board (CN106-A2, A4, B12, B14, B15)
SM
6-7
A163
2.3 SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open

-DefinitionThe temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach 50C within
3 minutes after the main switch is turned on.
<Point to check>
AC drive board ( T202-2, RA201-T4)
Fusing thermofuse
Main board (CN106-A2, -A5, -B11, -B14, -B15)
2.4 SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short

-DefinitionThe resistance of the the hot roller thermistor is less than 0.11 K.
<Point to check>
2.5 SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open

-DefinitionThe resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is more than 0.53 M.
<Point to check>
Pressure roller thermistor
A163
6-8
SM
2.6 SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short

-DefinitionThe resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is less than 0.55 K.
<Point to check>
2.7 SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat

-DefinitionThe temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor becomes higher than 250C
<Point to check>
Fusing thermofuse
Main board (CN106-A2, -B14, -B15)
SM
6-9
A163
2.8 SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error

-DefinitionThe temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor does not reach the target
ready temperature within 12 minutes after main switch is turned on.
<Point to check>
Fusing lamp
Fusing thermofuse
AC harness
2.9 SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal

-DefinitionThe toner density sensor voltage is less than 0.5 volts or more than 4.5 volts.
NOTE:
This condition is not detected until 251 copies since initializing

developer.
<Point to check>
Toner density sensor
Flow of the developer at the toner density sensor area
Main board (CN104-A10, -A11, -B20, -B21)
A163
6-10
SM
2.10 SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal

-DefinitionThe main board does not receive a signal from the main motor for 2 seconds
while the main motor is on.
<Point to check>
Main motor
Mechanical interference of the main motor drive
Main board (CN106-A12, -A13)
2.11 SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor adjustment Error

-DefinitionThe toner density sensor voltage cannot be adjusted to its standard value (4.1
0.1 volts) during the new developer initialization.
NOTE:
If clearing the SC condition, the previous data of SP#-30 is still used

until its next initialization.
<Point to check>
Developer
SM
6-11
A163
Rev. 5/95
3. BLOWN FUSE TABLE

3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Europe version
Fuse
No.
Specification
FU1
250V 4A
FU2
250V 6.3A
No indication.
Beeper sounds.
FU3
250V 6.3A
E=10 is indicated.
FU4
250V 6.3A
Not used.
Symptom
No power.
USA version
Fuse
No.
Specification
FU1
125V 8A
No power.
FU2
250V 5A
No indication.
Beeper sounds.
FU3
250V 5A
E=10 is indicated.
FU4
250V 5A
Not used.
Symptom
FU5 125V 1A Counter No symptoms
A163
6-12
SM
ROLL FEEDER
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Roll Paper Size:
Width:
210 mm to 914 mm, 81/2" to 36"
Length:
150 meters
Diameter: Less than 170 mm
Cut Size:
--Preset Cut: 1189 mm, 841 mm, 594 mm,

420 mm, 297 mm
48", 36", 24", 18", 12"
46", 34", 22", 17", 11"
Up to 10 extra preset cut length can
be specified by SP23 ~ 32.
--Selected Length Cut: 245 mm to 2000 mm
(1 mm per step)
9.6" to 80" (0.1" per step)
Cutting Time:
Within 0.80 second
Paper Transport Velocity:
50 mm/s
Repeat Quantity:
1 to 99
Control:
Microprocessor
Power Source:
+24 volts and +5 volts from the copier
Power Consumption:
Maximum 110 W
1,080 mm x 475 mm x 295 mm

42.71" x 18.70" x 11.61"
Weight:
29 kg, 63.8 lb
SM
7-1
A163
2. MECHANICAL COMPONENT AND DRIVE

LAYOUT
4
3
2
1
A163
1. Paper Feed Motor
5. Paper Feed Rollers
2. Idle Pulley
6. Paper Roll Spool
3. Timing Belt
7. Paper Roll
4. Cutter Motor
8. Cutter Unit
7-2
SM
Rev. 5/95
3. ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

The index numbers refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of
the Point to Point (Water proof paper).
Name
Motors
Paper Feed
Cutter
Switches
Door
Left Cutter
Right Cutter
Sensors
Paper End
Leading Edge
Humidity
Function
Drives all mechanical components except the cutter unit
(DC Stepper Motor).
Drives the cutter (DC Reversible Motor).
SM
32
39
Indicates "Door Open" on the operation panel and

disables the key operation.
Detects whether or not the cutter is at the left home
position.
Detects whether or not the cutter is at the right home
position.
38
Detects when the roll paper runs out.

Misfeed detector. Also detects the leading edge of the
paper to start the paper length pulse count.
Detects humidity and turns on the RF antihumidity heaters
while copying is not being done (if the humidity is higher
than 45%).
35
42
Printed Circuit Board

RF Control
Controls all roll cutter unit functions in accordance with
copier CPU.
Others
Upper RF
Antihumidity Heater
Lower RF
Antihumidity Heater
Index No.
40
33
34
37
Removes humidity from the roll paper
41
Removes humidity from the roll paper
36
7-3
A163
A163
7-4
SM
4. MECHANICAL OPERATION
4.1 BASIC OPERATION
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
The paper feed rollers [A], which are turned by the paper feed motor, feed paper
from the paper roll [B] through the cutter unit [C] to the paper leading edge
sensor [D] according to the signal from the copier. When the paper feed motor
starts, the copier CPU starts measuring the length of the paper. (The paper
length is measured by counting the number of steps as the paper feed motor
[stepper motor] turns.)
SM
7-5
A163
Rev. 5/95
[C]
[B]
[A]
[D]
After the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers [A], the paper is
directed to the copier registration roller [B]. The registration roller stops rotating
after the registration sensor [C] detects the leading edge of the copy paper. The
copy paper is fed to the registration roller and stops to wait for the original. At the
appropriate timing after the original registration sensor is activated by the original,
the registration roller and roll paper feed motor start to rotate. The copy paper
starts to be fed again. Just before the cut length of copy paper is fed, the speed
of the roll paper feed motor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edge
of the copy paper. When the paper reaches the proper length, paper feed motor
stops and the cutter unit cuts the paper. During the time that paper feed motor
has stopped, the registration roller continues to feed the copy paper forward. The
paper is cut during the time it takes for the paper buckle to be pulled straight.
This allows for a neat cut.
When the selected cut length is between 245 mm and 309 mm, the roll cutter unit
cuts the paper after the first rotation of the roll paper feed roller [D], as the paper
reaches the selected length before the registration roller starts to rotate again.
After the registration roller stops rotating, the roll paper feed motor continues to
rotate and a paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the paper. When the
selected cut length is between 309 mm and 410 mm, the roll cutter unit cuts the
paper after the second rotation of the roll paper feed roller. The paper buckle
forms after the first rotation of the roll paper feed motor, because the paper feed
roller is still rotating after the registration roller has stopped. The registration roller
brake ensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate the registration
rollers when the paper buckles while it is stopped at these rollers.
A163
7-6
SM
4.2 CUTTER UNIT OPENING AND CLOSING MECHANISM
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
The gear [A] from the paper feed motor disengages from the cutter unit gears [B]
when the roll cutter unit is unlocked from the lower position and lifted up. At this
time, the cutter unit is locked at the upper position by the lock lever [C], and the
wheel [D] on the right side can be rotated manually to position the leading edge
of the roll paper.
SM
7-7
A163
4.3 CUTTER OPERATION
[C]
[B]
[C]
[A]
The cutter unit uses a sliding rotary cutting blade [A] which is pulled past a fixed
blade by a drive wire. The rotary cutting blade allows the cutter unit to cut paper
in both directions. There are home position switches [B] at both ends of the cutter
unit. The cutter motor turns off, stopping the cutting action, when the rotary
cutting blade knob plate [C] turns off one of these switches.
A163
7-8
SM
5. SERVICE TABLES
5.1 TEST POINTS
Function
TP No.
GND
TP903
VA (24 V)
TP901
VC (5 V)
TP902
5.2 BLOWN FUSE CONDITION

Component
Unit
Symptom
F901 (250V/1.0A)
RF Main board
The AC line for the

R/F antihumidity
heaters is cut. The
heaters are not
turned on.
SM
7-9
A163
6. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
Roll Feeder (A571)
CAUTION: Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following
procedure.
Harness Cover ............................................................................ 2 pcs
Angle Bracket .............................................................................. 1 pc
Spacer ......................................................................................... 1 pc
Small Cap..................................................................................... 1 pc
Screws - M4x8 ............................................................................ 8 pcs
Screws with Spring Washer - M4x8 ............................................. 2 pcs
NOTE: When the Roll Feeder is installed on the copier, the table (A714) is
required.
A163
7-10
SM
[A]
[D]
[C]
[C]
[C]
[H]
[G]
[E]
[H]
[B]
[F]
1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the roll feeder is
being installed on the table and the copier.
NOTE: Do not place the roll feeder unit [B] onto the floor roughly, to prevent
the left and right covers from being damaged.
2. Remove the shipping tapes [C] and shipping cushions [D].
3. Remove the left and right covers [E and F] (3 screws each).
4. Remove the front cover [G] (2 screws) and lower the front cover arms [H] to
the down position.
SM
7-11
A163
[A]
[E]
[B]
[C]
[D]
[F]
[G]
5. Open the copier paper path section and remove the copier left lower cover [A]
(2 screws), lower right front cover [B] (2 screws), lower right middle cover [C],
toner collection bottle [D], and rear cover [E] (2 screws).
6. Remove the small caps [F] from the copier rear cover using cutting pliers.
7. Remove the table rear cover [G] (4 screws).
A163
7-12
SM
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
NOTE: Take care not to drop the manual feed table when removing the
bracket [A].
8. Remove the lower front cover [B] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1
screw), bracket [A] (4 screws) (which is changed by the harness), and the
manual feed table [D].
[C]
SM
7-13
A163
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
9. Mount the roll feeder unit on the copier (hook the mounting arms [A] on both
sides into the mounting rail [B]).
NOTE: Lift the unit by holding the plate [C] just under the size marks.
10. Install the angle bracket [D] and spacer [E] (4 screws).
11. Install the small cap [F] (2 screws).
A163
7-14
SM
[A]
[H]
[I]
[G]
[C]
[D]
[J]
[A]
[B]
[F]
[E]
NOTE: To ensure grounding, tighten the screws for the ground wire until the
spring washers [A] are flattened.
12. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw with spring washer) to the inside of
the table.
13. Run the roll feeder harness [C] and roll feeder heater harness [D] through the
holes in the table rear cover (right [E] and left [F])
14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board {2 connectors [G]
and 1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw with spring washer)}.
15. Connect the roll feeder heater harness connector [I] to the copier ac drive
board connector.
16. Install the harness covers [J] (1 screw each).
17. Reinstall Manual Feed Table
18. Reattach all the covers and manual feed table excluding the roll feeder right
cover.
SM
7-15
A163
[C]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[D]
[F]
Length
Temperature
NORMAL
HIGH (VELLUM)
LOW (FILM)
300
XX
XX
XX
PRG.
No.
42
43
44
1100
XX
XX
XX
PRG.
No.
45
46
47
Clear Modes key [A]
+ key [B]
- key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
20. Press the Clear/Stop key again and hold it down for longer than 3 seconds.
The roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode).
21. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter "1" by pressing the following keys.
+ key
RF Select key [F].
22. Input values into SP modes 42 to 47 in accordance with the decal that is
attached to the right side plate.
23. Press the Clear Modes key 3 times to leave the SP mode.
24. Reattach the roll feeder right cover.
25. Check the roll feeder operation.
A163
7-16
SM
7. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

7.1 EXTERIOR COVER REMOVAL
7.1.1 Front Cover Removal
[A]
[C]
[C]
[B]
1. Remove the front cover [A] (2 screws).

NOTE: If the screw holes for the front cover become worn by the screws,
extra holes are provided next to the original screw holes.
7.1.2 Left and Right Cover
NOTE: Be careful not to drop and damage the lower front cover [B].
1. Remove the left and right covers [C and D] (3 screws each).
NOTE: When reattaching the left and/or right covers, unlock and lift the
cutter unit for easier assembly.
SM
7-17
A163
7.2 CUTTER UNIT REMOVAL
[D]
[C]
[A]
[B]
[A]
1. Remove the roll feeder left and right covers.
2. Remove the 4 screws [A] of the cutter unit.
3. Take out the cutter unit [B] (1 connector [C]).
NOTE: When reinstalling the cutter unit, attach the cutter unit cover [D] with
the cutter unit.
A163
7-18
SM
7.3 PAPER FEED ROLLER REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[C]
[I]
[H]
[D]
[E]
[H] [G]
[E]
[F]
1. Remove the cutter unit.

2. Unlock and lift the paper feed roller unit [A] using the release lever [B].
3. Remove the release lock lever [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the feed roller guide plate [C] (6 screws).
5. Replace the paper feed roller [D] (2 allen screws [E], 1 gear [F], 1 snap ring
[G], 2 bushings [H], and 1 retaining ring [I]).
SM
7-19
A163
7.4 PAPER FEED MOTOR TIMING BELT TENSION

ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
If the timing belt tension for the paper feed motor is not correct, the paper cut
length varies for each copy paper. Readjust the timing belt tension for the paper
feed if this occurs.
1. Remove the small cap [A] (2 screws).
2. Loosen the screw [B] and re-tighten it.
A163
7-20
SM
7.5 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT
Rev. 5/95
The cut length adjustment should be done when the roll feeder is installed to
correct cutting errors. The cut error correction data is determined in the factory
without the copier installed. The cut length varies depending on the copier on
which it is installed and/or paper type used. If required, adjust the cut length as
follows:
NOTE: The cut length should be measured 10 minutes or later after copying
because the fusing unit dries the paper and reduces its length
temporarily.
7.5.1 Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: 3 mm (for length shorter than 420
mm) 5 mm (for 420 to 1189 mm)
NOTE: There are three settings of the cut length depending on the temperature
mode. They are set in the factory to match a standard paper type.
[Normal (SP#42, 45), High (SP#43, 46), Low (SP#44, 47)].
1. Make 5 copy samples of A0 lengthwise (1189) and A3 sideways (297) in the
preset cut mode.
2. Measure the difference of the length between the each copy sample and
preset cut length (1189 and 297). Then, calculate the average difference.
3. Input the average value using SP modes #42 to 47 so that the cut length is
within the adjustment standards.
Example: 1. Current SP data #42....0
Copy sample length = 297 -- 4
Set SP mode #42...4.0
2. Current SP data #42....0
Copy sample length = 297 -- 4
Set SP mode #42...+ 4.0
4. Make A0 lengthwise and A3 sideways copies using preset cut mode and
check their length.
5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 if necessary.
SM
7-21
A163
7.6 ROLL FEED PAPER SKEW ADJUSTMENT

[B]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[E]
[D]
1. Mark a line [A] on the exposure glass [B].
2. Make 594 x 1189 mm copies from the roll feeder unit.
NOTE: 594 mm wide paper is easier to adjust than 841 mm wide paper.
3. Measure the lengths [C] and [D].
4. Loosen the 2 screws [E] which determine the paper spool height.
5. If C > D, lower the right side of the paper spool. If C < D, do the opposite.
6. Make another copy. Check the lengths [C] and [D].
NOTE: If the 10 or more copies are made continuously, the nip band width
of the fusing unit may change. For correct adjustment, do this
procedure at least 10 minutes after a continuous copy run of 10 or
more.
A163
7-22
SM
A251/A252
Service Manual
The A251/A252 machines are based on the A163 copier.

Only the differences from the base copier are described in the following pages.
Therefore, this documentation should be treated as an insert version of the base
copiers service manual. It should always be utilized together with the base
copiers service manual.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ......................................... 1-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 PAPER PATH ............................................................................................ 1-3
1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT ................................................................... 1-4
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT ........................................................................................ 1-6
1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ........................................ 1-7
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS........................................ 2-1

2.1 DRUM ........................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE.............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.3 EXPOSURE............................................................................................... 2-2

2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (A252 ONLY) ............................................................ 2-2
2.4 DEVELOPMENT........................................................................................ 2-4

2.4.2 TONER DENSITY CONTROL..................................................................................... 2-4
2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ...................................................................... 2-5

2.8.1 OVERVIEW (A252 COPIER) ...................................................................................... 2-5
3. INSTALLATION............................................................................ 3-1
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ........................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................... 3-2
3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL........................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.4 POWER SOURCE ...................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURES ............................................................... 3-4

3.2.1 COPIER....................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.2 TABLE (A836) ........................................................................................................... 3-12
3.2.3 COPY TRAY (A836-10)............................................................................................. 3-14
3.2.4 ROLLER FEEDER (A571)......................................................................................... 3-18
4. SERVICE TABLES ....................................................................... 4-1

4.3 SERVICE TOOLS...................................................................................... 4-1
4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ..................................................................................... 4-1
4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ................................................................................ 4-9
4.4 JAM CODE LIST...................................................................................... 4-11

4.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE.................................................................................................... 4-11
4.6 SERVICE REMARKS .............................................................................. 4-15

4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD.................................................................................................. 4-15
5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ......................................... 5-1

5.2 OPTICS ..................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ...................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) .......................................................... 5-2
5.2.3 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ..................................................... 5-2
5.2.4 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL ................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY) ....................................................... 5-4
5.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY) .......................................... 5-5
5.4 DRUM UNIT............................................................................................... 5-6

5.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL.............................................................................................. 5-6
TOC
A251/A252
5.5 FUSING ..................................................................................................... 5-7

5.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL........................................................................................... 5-7
5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT................................................................................ 5-9

6.5.1 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT......................... 5-9
5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT ............................................................. 5-11

5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT .............................................................................. 5-11
6. TROUBLESHOOTING.................................................................. 6-1
6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIION................................................................... 6-1
6.2.12 SC CODE E-14: ZERO CROSS SIGNAL DETECTION ABNORMAL ...................... 6-1
6.2.13 SC CODE E-15: MAIN SWITCH ABNORMAL (U.S.A. VERSION ONLY) ................ 6-1
6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE .............................................................................. 6-2

6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT .............................................................................................. 6-2
A251/A252
ii
TOC
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

your bare hands.
7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turning to

intervals.

those models.
2. Caution: The RAM pack on the main control board has a lithium battery
which can explode if replaced incorrectly. Replace the RAM pack only with
an identical one. The manufacturer recommends replacing the entire RAM
pack. Do not recharge or burn this battery. Used RAM packs must be
handled in accordance with local regulations.

4. When keeping used RAM packs in order to dispose of them later, do not put
more than 100 RAM packs per sealed box. Storing larger numbers or not
sealing them apart may lead to chemical reactions and heat build-up.
A251/A252 REPLACEMENTS AND ADJUSTMENT
A251/A252 TROUBLESHOOTING
TAB
POSITION 1
TAB
POSITION 2
TAB
POSITION 3
TAB
POSITION 4
TAB
POSITION 5
A251/A252 SERVICE TABLES
TAB
POSITION 6
A251/A252 INSTALLATION
TAB
POSITION 7
A251/A252 DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS
TAB
POSITION 8
A251/A252 OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION
Drive Layout
Drum Area
Drum Drive
Charge
Charge Corona Circuit
Auto. Charge Wire Cleaning
Exposure
Exposure Lamp
Development
Development Drive
Manual Image Density (ID)
Auto Image Density Control
Toner Density Control
Toner Supply
Transfer and Separation
Cleaning / Quenching
Fusing and Paper Exit
Fusing Drive
Fans
Mechanical Component Layout
Syncronized Cut Mode

Fusing Lamp
Self Diagnostic Codes
Configuration
Copy Speed
First Copy
Warm-up Time
Multiple Copy
Paper Feed
1 motor, 1 fan
A163
A163
A163
A163
No
A163
140 V, 26 W
A163
Main Motor
14 steps
No
A163
A163
A163
A163
A163
A163
1 Exhaust
A163
Table Top
3 cpm
24 seconds
5 minutes
No
Manual Feed, (roll feed
optional)
No
Ni-chrome Wire Lamp
11 codes, displayed in
copy counter
1 motor, 1 fan
A163
A163
A163
A163
No
A163
140 V, 26 W
A163
Main Motor
14 steps
No
A163
A163
A163
A163
A163
A163
1 Exhaust
A251
Table Top
3 cpm
24 seconds
5 minutes
No
optional)
Semi-auto synchro Cut
Ni-chrome Wire Lamp
13 codes, displayed in
copy counter
Same as A163
A252
Table Top
3 cpm
30 seconds
5 minutes
1 10 copies
optional)
Full Auto Synchro Cut
Ni-chrome Wire Lamp
13 codes, displayed in copy
counter
Similar to A163, different in
original feed area
2 motors, 1 fan
A163
A163
A163
A163
No
A163
140 V, 26 W
A163
Main Motor
14 steps
No
A163
A163
A163
A163
A163
A163
1 Exhaust
7 motors, 2 vacuum, 1 fan

Similar to A163
Similar to A163
Similar to A163
Similar to A163
Yes
Similar to A163
125 V, 37 W
Similar to A163
Separate Dev. Motor
26 steps
Yes
Similar to A163
Similar to A163
Similar to A163
Similar to A163
Similar to A163
Separate Fusing Motor
2 Vacuum, 1 Exhaust
A174
Console
7.5 cpm
18 seconds
6 minutes
1 10 copies
Manual Feed, 2 Roll Feeds
(3rd roll feed optional)
Full Auto Synchro Cut
Halogen Lamp
18 codes, displayed in copy
counter
Similar to A163
THE FOLLOWING LIST DEFINES THE DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE A163, A251, A252 and A174 WIDE FORMAT COPIERS.
A163, A251, A252, A174 COMPARISON CHART
OVERALL INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Overall
Information
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration:
Table top
Copy Process:
Original Feed:
Sheet feed
Original Size:
Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm

Copy Size:
Same as Original Size
Copying Speed:
First Copy:
24 seconds (A1/D sideways): A251 copier

30 seconds (A1/D sideways): A252 copier
Warm-up Time:
Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23C)
Multi-Copy:
1 to 1 only (A251 copier), 1 to 10 (A252 copier)
Automatic Reset:
2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set to 1,

3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)
Photoconductor:
Drum Charge:
Single-wire with grid plate (Negative Charge)
Reproduction Ratio:
1 : 1 (0.5%)
Exposure System:
Exposure Lamp:
Development:
Dual-component dry toner system
Cartridge system (750 g toner/cartridge)
Toner Consumption:
Development Bias:
Negative
Direct toner density detection by induction sensor
Paper Separation:
Cleaning:
Cleaning blade
Paper Feeding:
Image Fusing:
Heat and pressure type, teflon (upper) and silicone

rubber (lower) rollers
Fusing Lamp:
Nichrome wire lamp

(115 V: 1,100 W, 230 V: 1,100 W)
13 codes, displayed in copy counter
SM
1-1
A251/A252
SPECIFICATIONS
Power Source:
115 V/60 Hz ..... 15 A

220 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A
230 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A
240 V/50 Hz ..... 7 A
Power Consumption:
Maximum: 1.4 kW
Warm-up: 1.2 kW
Ready:
0.04 to 1.2 kW
Copy cycle: 1.4 kW
A251: 1,080 x 570 x 490 mm

42.1" x 22.2" x 19.1"
A252: 1,080 x 623 x 480 mm
42.1" x 24.6" x 18.9"
Weight:
A251: 79 kg, 174.0 lb

A252: 80 kg, 176.2 lb

Configuration
Main frame
Optional equipment
Roll feeder (A571-06, 07)
A251 copier
Roll cutting rail (A570-06)
Side guides (A569-06)
Roll feeder (A571-06, 07)
A252 copier
Copy tray (A836-10)
Side guide (A569-06)
Table (A714-05)
Table (A836-00)
Table (A836-00)
NOTE: 1) Roll cutting rail cannot be installed on the A252 copier.

2) Key counter cannot be installed on these copiers.
Paper Spool
A251/A252
1-2
SM
PAPER PATH
Overall
Information
1.2 PAPER PATH

- A252 copier -
- A251 copier -
E
A
E
A
B
C
A252V504.WMF
A252V500.PCX
A: Original Path (A251 copier)

B: Paper from the manual feed
C: Paper from the roller feed
D: Paper exit
E: Original Path from Rear Feeder
F: Original Path (A252 copier): Switching back
SM
1-3
A251/A252
MECHANICAL COMPONENT
1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENT

3
21 22 23 24 25 1
20
19
18
5
17
16
15
7
8
9
10
14
11
13
12
A252V502.PCX
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
1st Original Feed Roller

1st Press Rollers
Copy Tray
Exit Rollers
Fusing Exit Rollers
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller
Gas Spring
OPC Drum
T/S Corona Unit
Main Drive Unit
Table
Paper Spool
A251/A252
1-4
Roll Feeder
Paper Registration Rollers
Development Unit
Toner Cartridge
Manual Feed Table
Charge Corona Unit
2nd Original Feed Roller
Original Table
2nd Original Press Roller
Exposure Lamp
Fiber Optic Array
Cleaning Blade
SM
32
30
28
31
Overall
Information
MECHANICAL COMPONENT
26
29
27
A252V505.WMF
26.
27.
28.
29.
SM
Original Guide
Rear Copy Tray (Option Copy Tray)
Original Feed Motor
Original Entrance Roller
1-5
30. Original Rear Roller

31. Original Entrance Press Roller
32. Original Rear Press Roller
A251/A252
DRIVE LAYOUT
1.5 DRIVE LAYOUT

11
12
13
14
15
16
10
4
5
6
A252V503.WMF
- A252 copier only 17
19
18
A252V501.WMF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Original Feed Roller Pulley

Original Feed Roller One Way Pulley
Development Unit
Development Unit Relay Gear
Development Drive Chain
Paper Registration Roller Clutch
Drum Drive Relay Gear
Main Motor
Fusing Drive Chain
Exit Unit Drive Belt
A251/A252
1-6
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Hot Roller Drive Gear

Fusing Drive Sprocket/Gear
Toner Collection Coil Drive Gear
Drum Drive Gear
Original Feed Drive Pulley
Original Feed Drive Belt
Original Feed Motor
Original Rear Roller Pulley
Original Entrance Roller Pulley
SM
1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

(Water proof paper) index numbers.
Name
Motors
Main
Exhaust Fan
Original Feed
(A252 only)
Function
Drives all mechanical components except the
original feed section (A252only) and the fans. (DC
Motor)
section to the ozone filter. (DC Motor)
Drives the original feed section. (DC motor)
Index. No.
32
5
45
Magnetic Clutches
Registration
Toner Supply

30
31
Solenoids
Pick-off Pawl

Cuts AC power when the original or paper feed
unit is opened.
Cuts AC power when the fusing exit unit is
opened.
17
Switches
Main
Original & Paper
Feed Safety
Fusing Exit Safety
Sensors
Door Open
Toner Density
Original Registration
Light
Entrance Feed
Registration
Exit
Original Entrance
(A252 only)
Original Rear
(A252 only)
Exit Cover Open
SM
Indicates Door Open in the operation panel and

prohibits the key operation.
Detects when the original lead edge passes at the
front of the exposure glass.
Detects the intensity of the exposure lamp output.
Detects when copy paper is inserted (jam
detector).
Detects when copy paper arrives at the
Detects the original length and the original jam.
18
12
29
26
4
27
24
25
7
43
Detects the original jam.
44

prohibits the key operation.
47
1-7
A251/A252
Overall
Information
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

Name
Function
Main
through other PCBs.
PSU
Converts the AC voltage to DC voltage.
AC Drive
Provides AC power to the fusing lamp and PSU.
FL Regulator
Operation Panel
Control the operation panel display.
Original Feed Drive
Controls the rotation of the original feed motor.
(A252 only)
Lamps
Exposure
Fusing
Pre-Transfer (PTL)
Quenching (QL)
Power Packs
Charge/Bias/
Grid Power Pack
Transfer/Separation
Thermistors
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller
Thermofuses
Fusing
Heaters
Anticondensation
Others
Total Counter
Circuit Breaker
(Europe, Asia)/
Fuse (U.S.A.)
A251/A252

image transfer.
Provides high voltage power for the charge

corona, charge grid, and development bias.
Provides high voltage power for the transfer
corona and separation.

Monitors the pressure rollers surface
temperature.
Index. No.
22
21
15
23
10
46
2
3
20
1
19
16
8
11
Protects against fusing overheat.
Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier

(option).
13

Guards against voltage surges in the input power.
28
14
1-8
SM
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
DRUM
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2.1 DRUM
Detailed
Descriptions
2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE
[I]
[A]
[H]
[G]
[D]
[F]
[E]
- A252 copier only -
[B]
[C]
[K]
A252D502.WMF
[J]
A252D503.WMF
The OPC drum [A] is 80 millimeters in diameter and 970 millimeters long. It turns
constantly when the main motor [B] is on.
When the main motor turns on, the drive is transmitted to the drum as follows:
main motor drive gear [C] idle gears [D] drum drive gear [E]
drum flange [F] drum
When the drum knob is tightened, the right flange presses firmly against the drum
so that the drum is held tightly between the flanges. The drum and flanges turn
together when the main motor is on. At this time, the drive is also transmitted to the
original feed rollers [G] through the original feed drive pulley [H] and belt [I] (A251
copier).
The original feed rollers [J] (original entrance and rear rollers) for the A252 copier
are driven by the original feed motor [K].
SM
2-1
A251/A252
EXPOSURE
2.3 EXPOSURE
2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (A252 ONLY)
[D]
[J]
[K]
26 mm
[B]
[F]
[C]
[G]
[H]
[I]
15 mm
J: Original Rear Roller

K: Original Rear Sensor
[E]
A252D500.WMF
[A]
A252D501.WMF
In this machine (A252 copier), first, the leading edge [A] of the original is inserted
into the original table and the original is delivered to the appropriate start position.
Then the original is switched back while it is being scanned. Therefore, the original
is scanned from the trailing edge to the leading edge.
When an original is placed on the original table, it activates the original entrance
sensor [B]. The main motor starts rotating and the quenching lamp, development
bias, and PTL begin. Then, the exposure lamp turns on. To ensure correct original
feeding (especially for a thin original), the original is returned toward the operator
side (300 ms) before the original feed. Thus the original will be fed evenly by each
roller on the original entrance roller [C].
4 seconds after the original entrance sensor is activated, the original feed motor
starts rotating 200 mm/s to turn the original entrance rollers [C] and the original
rear rollers [J]. The original is delivered to the original feed start position [D]. The 4
second delay allows time for the operator to align the trailing edge (non-operator
side) against the first set of the rollers (to prevent skewing).
A251/A252
2-2
SM
When the original entrance sensor is turned off by the trailing edge [E] of the
original, the roll paper feed motor turns on and paper feeding starts.
When the trailing edge of the original reaches the original feed start position (26
mm ahead of the original registration sensor [F]), the original feed motor stops to
wait for the copy paper.
The registration clutch is activated after paper feed begins. The copy paper is fed
to the registration roller [G] and the registration clutch turns off when the copy
paper reaches 15 mm ahead of the registration sensor [H]. The voltage is applied
to the charge corona.
At the appropriate time the original feed motor rotates 50 mm/s in opposite
direction and the original is delivered to the exposure glass. The registration clutch
and roll paper feed motor turn on again after the trailing edge of the original passes
the original entrance sensor. The paper feed resumes and the copy paper is
transported to the drum [I].
To measure the original length for synchro-cutting, the copier CPU measures the
time from when the original registration sensor detects the leading edge of the
original until the original entrance sensor detects the trailing edge of the original
(delivering the original to appropriate start position). The copy paper length is
measured by counting the number of steps as the roll paper feed motor (stepper
motor) turns. Just before the cut length of the copy paper is fed, the speed of the
roll paper feed motor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the
copy paper. When the copy paper is fed out to the appropriate length, the roll
paper feed motor stops and the cutter unit cuts the paper.
When making duplicate copies, at the appropriate time after the trailing edge of the
original passes at the original registration sensor, the rotation of the original feed
motor changes in the opposite direction and the speed of the original feed motor
changes to 200 mm/s. The roll paper feed motor starts again. The original is
delivered to the original feed start position and roll paper feed starts again. The
above process is repeated. After all the duplicates have been made, the original is
stopped and caught by the original entrance roller (original hold mode: SP16). If
the original hold mode is canceled by SP16, the original is fed out without being
caught in the original entrance roller. During this procedure the original rear sensor
[K] determines the end of the original.
When the original hold mode is selected, the original is fed out when the $ key is
pressed.
SM
2-3
A251/A252
Detailed
Descriptions
EXPOSURE
DEVELOPMENT
2.4 DEVELOPMENT
2.4.2 TONER DENSITY CONTROL
Recovery from Toner End Condition
main motor rotates the development unit for 60 seconds. During this period, toner
is supplied at 100% of the supply amount until TS level reaches 3. Then, the main
motor rotates the development unit for another 30 seconds. Then copies can be
made.
If the TS level does not reach 3 after rotation of the development unit, the CPU
stops the machine and displays the toner end condition. This prevents the operator
from resetting the toner end condition by simply opening and closing original feed
unit.
A251/A252
2-4
SM
2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT

2.8.1 OVERVIEW (A252 COPIER)
The location of the fusing exit sensor is different from the A163 and A251 copier.
Except for this difference, the A252 copier is identical to the with A251 and A163
copiers. Please refer to A163 copier service manual for details.
SM
2-5
A251/A252
Detailed
Descriptions
The copy paper is delivered to the lower paper exit.
INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
3. INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
15C to 30C (59F to 86F)
2. Humidity Range:
20% to 80% RH
Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct

sunlight).
4. Ventilation:
Minimum space 20 m3
Room air should turn over at least 30 m3/hr/person.
5. Ambient Dust:
Less than 0.15 mg/m3 (4 x 10-3 oz/yd3)
6. If the installation place is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine as

follows:
a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from low to
high, or vice versa.
b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in
the summer.
c) Where it will not be directly exposed to reflected heat from a space heater
in the winter.
7. Avoid placing the machine in an area filled with corrosive gases.
8. Avoid any area higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level.
10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent strong
vibration.
SM
3-1
A251/A252
Installation
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Back 600 mm
Right
600 mm
Left
600 mm
Back 1,000 mm
A252I505.WMF
1. Front: 1,000 mm (39 in)

2. Back:
600 mm (24 in)
3. Right:
600 mm (24 in)
4. Left:
600 mm (24 in)
3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL

2. Right to left:
Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
A251/A252
3-2
SM
3.1.4 POWER SOURCE

120 V, 60 Hz
220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz
2. Permissible Voltage
Fluctuation:
10%
SM
3-3
Installation
NOTE: 1) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.

2) Avoid multi-wiring.
A251/A252
INSTALLATION PROCEDURE

3.2.1 COPIER
Accessory Check
- A252 copier Original Guide ......................................................................... 6 pcs

Operating Instruction Holder ................................................... 1 pc
- A251 copier Guide Wire .............................................................................. 2 pcs

Copy Tray ............................................................................... 1 pc
Copy Guide ............................................................................. 1 pc
Operating Instruction Holder ................................................... 1 pc
A251/A252
3-4
SM
[D]
[E]
[E]
[C]
[A]
A252I500.WMF
1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the copier is being
installed on the table.
2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] (Place the copier feet [D] into the table
holes [E]).
WARNING
The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may
SM
3-5
A251/A252
Installation
[B]
[A]
[B]
[G]
A252I501.WMF
[C]
A252I510.WMF
[E]
[D]
[F]
[E]
A252I502.WMF
3. Open the paper path section [A].

4. Remove the right upper cover [B] (2 screws).
5. Remove the drum protection sheet [C] and remove the screw [D] to apply
cleaning blade pressure to the drum.
6. Open the fusing exit section. Remove the two strips of shipping tape [E] and
protection sheet [F].
7. Remove two strips of shipping tape [G]. (Close the paper path section and
fusing exit section.)
A251/A252
3-6
SM
[B]
[A]
Installation
A252I511.WMF
[F]
[D]
[C]
A252I503.WMF
[E]
A252I504.WMF
8. Remove two shipping cushions [A].

9. Open the original feed unit [B], manual feed table [C], and toner supply cover
[D]. Remove a sheet [E] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of the
developer [F] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown.
NOTE: Close the paper path section while opening the toner supply cover.
Otherwise, the toner supply cover will drop.
SM
3-7
A251/A252
[A]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[E]
A252I508.WMF
NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60C when the main switch is turned
on, the main motor will rotate. In this case, it is not necessary to access the
SP mode to load the total 2kg of developer (Steps 11 to 14).
Turn off the main switch to stop the main motor after the developer is
loaded from the development entrance. Then, pour in another kg of
developer.
Clear Mode key [A]
+ key [B]
+ key
Clear/Stop key [C]
12. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The wrench and
toner end indicators will blink (SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode).
13. Select 23 using the + key and key [D] and press the RF Select key [E]. The
main motor will rotate.
14. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor after the developer is loaded
from the development entrance. Pour in another kg of developer into the
development unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 kg). Press the Clear
A251/A252
3-8
SM
[D]
[E]
[C]
[B]
[F]
A252I508.WMF

Clear key [A]
+ key [B]
key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
16. Press the Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds. The roll paper end
and call service indicators will blink (SP mode).
17. Select 36 using the + and keys. Enter 1 by pressing the following keys.
+ key
RF Select key [F]
Five minutes later, the copier will automatically return to the normal operating
mode from SP mode.
SM
3-9
A251/A252
Installation
[A]
[A]
[B]
[C]
A252I507.WMF

19. Remove the sealing tape [B] from the cartridge and turn the knob [C] until it
stops.
A251/A252
3-10
SM
[A]
[B]
[D]
A252I506.WMF
Installation
[C]
A252I509.WMF
A252 copier only (step 20)

20. Install the original guides [A].
A251 copier only (step 21 and 22)

21. Attach the guide wires [B] to the copy tray [C].
22. Install the copy tray [C] and copy guide [D].
SM
3-11
A251/A252
3.2.2 TABLE (A836)

Accessory Check
Top Plate ............................................................................... 1
Left Side Plate ........................................................................ 1
Right Side Plate ..................................................................... 1
Middle Plate ........................................................................... 1
Rear Cover ............................................................................. 1
Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 ..................................... 14
A251/A252
3-12
SM
[A]
[G]
[A]
[C]
[E]
[F]
[A]
A, B
[D]
Installation
[B]
[A]
[I]
[J]
A836I501.WMF
[A]
[E]
[D]
[H]
[C]
A836I500.WMF
NOTE: To ensure grounding, paint has been removed from the surfaces around
the screw holes [A] (only from the surfaces where the two components
meet) and from the surface around the screw hole [B] at the inside of the
left plate.
1. Temporarily install the top plate [C], left [D], and right side plate [E] (6 screws).
2. Turn the table up-side down in the direction of A.
3. Install the middle plate [F] and rear cover [G] (4 screws each).
NOTE: If the optional copy tray is installed after copier installation, install the front
copy tray stay [I] and rear copy tray stay [J] after step 3.
4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [H] of screws are flattened.
5. Put the table the correction way up.
SM
3-13
A251/A252
3.2.3 COPY TRAY (A836-10)

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list:
Front Copy Tray Stay.............................................................. 1
Rear Copy Tray Stay .............................................................. 1
Copy Tray Support.................................................................. 1
Copy Tray Guide..................................................................... 2
Copy Tray Sheet ..................................................................... 3
Nylon Clamp ........................................................................... 1
Rear Copy Tray....................................................................... 3
Copy Tray Stopper.................................................................. 2
Screw...................................................................................... 13
Rear Copy Tray Sheet - Short................................................. 2
Rear Copy Tray Sheet - Center .............................................. 1
NOTE: The copy tray is an option for the A252 copier. When the copy tray is
installed on the copier, the table (A836-00) is required.
A251/A252
3-14
SM
Installation
[B]
[A]
[C]
A836I501.WMF
[D]
A836I502.WMF
1. Install the front copy tray stay [A] and rear copy tray stay [B] (4 screws each).
NOTE: This step should be done during the table installation when the table and
the copy tray are installed at the same time. Refer to the table installation
procedure. If the copy tray is installed after the copier installation, remove
the roll feeder and copier from the table, then loosen the screws of the
table, then do step 1.
2. Install the copy tray guides [C] (1screw each).
3. Install the copy tray support [D] (2 truss screws).
SM
3-15
A251/A252
[C]
[A]
[D]
[A]
[C]
[B]
A836I503.WMF
[F]
[G]
[E]
[E]
[D]
A836I504.WMF
4. Adhere the copy tray sheets with rubber [A] to the middle plate [B] of the table
so that the copy tray sheets are positioned between the screw holes [C] on the
rear copy tray stay [D] as shown in the illustration.
5. Hook the rear copy trays [E] onto the rear copy tray stay [D].
6. Secure the copier power supply cord [F] to prevent the cord from interfering
with the paper path (1 nylon clamp [G] and 1 screw).
A251/A252
3-16
SM
[C]
A836I505.WMF
265 5 mm
[D]
[C]
265 5 mm
A836I506.WMF
[A]
[B]
[A]
[B]
A836I508.WMF
7. Adhere the rear copy tray sheet - center (long) [A] and the two rear copy tray
sheets - short [B] onto the exit cover as shown.
8. Adhere the copy tray stoppers [C] to the front side of the table middle plate [D].
SM
3-17
A251/A252
Installation
[D]
3.2.4 ROLL FEEDER (A571)
CAUTION
Unplug the copier power cord before starting the following procedure.
Accessory Check
Harness Cover ....................................................................... 2 pcs
Angle Bracket ......................................................................... 1 pc
Spacer ................................................................................... 1 pc
Small Cap ............................................................................... 1 pc
Screws - M4 x 8 ..................................................................... 8 pcs
Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 ...................................... 2 pcs
Washer (220 ~ 240 V versions only) ....................................... 2 pcs
Ground Plate (220 ~ 240 V versions only) .............................. 2 pcs
Screws with Spring Washer - M4 x 8 for Ground Plate
(220 ~ 240 V versions only) .................................................... 2 pcs
NOTE: When the Roll Feeder is installed on the copier, the table (A714 or A836) is
required.
A251/A252
3-18
SM
A571I500.WMF
[A]
Installation
[D]
[C]
[C]
[H]
[G]
[C]
A571I501.WMF
[E]
[H]
[B]
[F]
A571I502.WMF
1. Lower the feet [A] so that the table does not move while the roll feeder is being
installed on the table and the copier.
NOTE: Do not place the roll feeder unit [B] onto the floor roughly, to prevent the
left and right covers from being damaged.
2. Remove the shipping tapes [C] and shipping cushions [D].
3. Remove the left and right covers [E and F] (3 screws each).
4. Remove the front cover [G] (2 screws) and lower the front cover arms [H] to the
down position.
SM
3-19
A251/A252
[A]
[E]
[D]
[C]
[B]
A571I503.WMF
[F]
A571I504.WMF
[G]
A571I505.WMF
5. Open the copier paper path section and remove the copier left lower cover [A]
(2 screws), lower right front cover [B] (2 screws), lower right middle cover [C],
toner collection bottle [D], and rear cover [E] (2 screws).
6. Remove the small caps [F] from the copier rear cover using cutting pliers.
7. Remove the table rear cover [G] (4 screws).
A251/A252
3-20
SM
Installation
[A]
[B]
[D]
[C]
A571I506.WMF
NOTE: Take care not to drop the manual feed table when removing the bracket
[A].
8. Remove the lower front cover [B] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw),
bracket [A] (4 screws) (which is changed by the harness), and the manual feed
table [D].
SM
3-21
A251/A252
[A]
[B]
[D]
[E]
[F]
A571I507.WMF
[C]
A571I508.WMF
9. Mount the roll feeder unit on the copier (hook the mounting arms [A] on both
sides into the mounting rail [B]).
NOTE: Lift the unit by holding the plate [C] just under the size marks.
10. Install the angle bracket [D] and spacer [E] (4 screws).
11. Install the small cap [F] (2 screws).
A251/A252
3-22
SM
- A251 copier -
[G]
[I]
[G]
[C]
[C]
[N]
[D]
[L]
[H]
[N]
[F]
[K]
[A]
[M]
[A]
[J]
A571I513.WMF
[B]
[E]
A571I510.WMF
NOTE: To ensure grounding, tighten the screws for the ground wire until the spring
washers [A] are flattened.
12. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw with spring washer) to the inside of the
table.
13. Run the roll feeder harness [C] and roll feeder heater harness [D] through the
holes in the table rear cover (right [E] and left [F]).
NOTE: There are two versions of the ferrite core [N] for the roll feeder harness.
One is gray and the other is white. When installing the gray core version on
the A252 copier, unwind one loop, as shown.
For A252 copier

14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board and original feed
motor drive board [K] {2 connectors [G] and 1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw with
spring washer)}.
For A251 copier

14. Connect the roll feeder harness to the copier main board {2 connectors [G] and
1 grounding wire [H] (1 screw with spring washer)}.
15. Connect the roll feeder heater harness connector [I] to the copier ac drive
board connector.
16. 220 ~ 240 V versions only
Install the ground plates [L, M] (1 screw with spring washer and 1 washer
each).
17. Install the harness covers [J] (1 screw each).
18. Reattach all the covers and manual feed table excluding the roll feeder right
cover.
SM
3-23
A251/A252
Installation
A571I512.WMF
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[B]
[F]
Length
Temperature
NORMAL
HIGH (VELLUM)
LOW (FILM)
A571I514.WMF
300
XX
XX
XX
PRG.
NO.
42
43
44
1100
XX
XX
XX
PRG.
NO.
45
46
47
Clear Modes key [A]
+ key [B]
key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
21. Press the Clear/Stop key again and hold it down for longer than 3 seconds. The
roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP mode).
22. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter 1 by pressing the following keys.
+ key
RF Select key [F].
23. Input values into SP modes 42 to 47 in accordance with the decal that is
attached to stuck on the right side plate.
25. Reattach the roll feeder right cover.
A251/A252
3-24
SM
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE TOOLS
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.3 SERVICE TOOLS
4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
All items except for the following are common with the A163 copier. Please refer to
the A163 copier service manual.
Service Program Mode Table
*13
*14
*15
*16
*17
*18
SM
Function
Refer to the A163 service manual for details.
The paper from the roll feeder is fed out only
when the roll feeder is attached to the A251
copier.
Data
0: 2 minutes
1:1 minute
2: 2 minutes
3: 4 minutes
4: 5 minutes
0: 2 minutes
Original Feed Out Select the time to when the original is
automatically fed out after it has been set on 1:1 minute
Waiting Time
2: 2 minutes
the original table in the manual feed mode.
Setting
3: 4 minutes
(A252 copier only)
4: 5 minutes
5: No auto feed out
Original Feed Start Selects the time to when the original feed
0: 1 second
Time Setting
roller starts rotating after the original
1: 2 seconds
entrance sensor or original rear sensor for
2: 3 seconds
the rear feed is actuated (A252 copier only). 3: 4 seconds
4: 5 seconds
5: 6 seconds
6: 7 seconds
Auto Shut-off Time Determines the auto shut-off time.
1 30 240
Setting (120 V
machines only)
0: No
Original Hold
After original scanning is finished, the
1: Original Hold mode
Mode
original exit roller stops before completely
feeding out the original. This is to prevent
the original from dropping onto the floor after
scanning.
key is
The original is fed out when the
pressed or when the next original is inserted
A252 copier only).
Length Size
Adjusts the speed of the original feed motor -1.0 (shorter) 0.0
Magnification
(A252 copier only).
1.0 (longer)
The setting can be changed by the key
operation.
Semi-synchro Cut Selects whether the roll paper cut key must 0: Pressing the roll
paper cut key
Original Scanning be pressed at the appropriate time when the
trailing edge of the original passes the Semi- 1: Inserting the original
Mode
synchro cut mark, or whether the original
again
must be inserted again after the original is
scanned and the length is measured (A251
copier only).
4-1
A251/A252
Service
Tables
*6
Mode No.
Paper Feed Out
Waiting Time
Setting
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Function
Synchro-cut
Adjusts the cut length in the semi-synchro
Length Adjustment cut mode (A251 copier).
Adjusts the cut length in the synchro cut,
*19
preset cut, and variable cut modes (A252
copier). The setting can be changed by a
key operation.
Fixed Paper Size
42.0 size is added to the following modes
Pattern Setting
in the inch mode: Refer to the A163 copier
manual and page 4-13 of this manual for
*22
details.
0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8, 9, 11, 12, 13, and 18
*33 Not Used
Semi-synchro-cut Adjusts the cut length in the semi-synchro
48 Length Adjustment cut mode (A251 copier only).
49
56
57
58
67
69
80
81
Data
-25 (Shorter) 0 25
(Longer)
1 mm/step
-10 (Shorter) 0 10
(Longer)
0.1 %/step
0: Standard
-9 0 11
Main Motor Speed (Jam code numbers have been changed

Adjustment
from those used in the A163 copier.) If the
main motor speed is incorrect, rJ98 or rJ99
will be indicated when a long copy is made.
In these cases this adjustment is required.
Copy Number
Determines the maximum copy number. The 0: 99 sheets (A251)
1: 10 sheets (A252)
default settings for the A251 and A252
Limit Setting
2: 20 sheets
copiers are different.
3: 30 sheets
4: 40 sheets
5: 50 sheets
6: 60 sheets
7: 70 sheets
8: 80 sheets
9: 90 sheets
Not Used
0: 1,200 mm/48 inch
Repeat Copy
Determines the maximum copy length for
Length Limit
1: The maximum paper
repeat copy (A252 copier only).
length determined by
Setting
SP55.
dc = X,XXX
Machine
Displays the total time (hours) of the
Operation Counter machine operation (total time of the motor
rotation).
SP69: t6 =XXX,XXX
Total Copy Length Displays the total copy length by feet.
/Number Display
(Feet)
dnF = XX (total number
Displays the total number of developer
Developer
of developer
initializations (SP36). Also displays the
Initialization
initializations)
developer counter (SP77) at the last
Number Counter
Hde = XX,XXX
developer initialization.
(developer
counter at the
last developer
initialization
dtE = XX
Toner End
Displays the total number of toner end
Hdt = XX,XXX
Number Counter
conditions (dtE). Also, displays the toner
counter (SP78) at the last toner end
condition (Hdt).
A251/A252
4-2
SM
82
83
84
Mode No.
Toner Near End
Counter
Not Used
Not Used
Number of
Misfeeds by
Location
Function
Displays the total number of toner near end
conditions (dtn). Also, displays the toner
counter (SP78) at the last toner end
condition (Hdt).
Data
dtn = XX
Hdt = XX,XXX
Displays the total number of originals in the

paper length indicator and paper misfeeds
by location in the leading edge indicator.
Jt = X,XXX (Total Jam)

J1 J8 (initial jam)
J10 J45 (original
jam)
J51 J72 (copy paper
jam)
J80 J99 (roll feeder
paper jam)
Et = X,XXX (total SCs)
E1 E15 (each SC)
85
90
Number of Service Displays the total number of service calls

(SC) in the paper length indicator and SC
Call by Location
codes by location in the leading edge
indicator.
Service Call
Displays the last five service calls one after
Records
the other.
91
92
93
SM
E1 = XX (The last SC
code)
E2 = XX (1 before the
last SC code)
last SC code
last SC code
last SC code
Beeper (XX = SC code)
Not Used
Not Used
4-3
A251/A252
Service
Tables
SERVICE TOOLS
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
RAM Clear
Function
Clears selected data items from the RAM.
To clear the memory, input the number of
the item you want to delete, then press the
key.
Note: If all the memory is cleared (if a
number from 20 to 28 is selected),
reinput the factory settings that are
shown on the decal attached inside
the upper right cover.
Please refer to page 4-14 for the
default settings for each destination.
(When No. 10 to 26 is selected.)
-1
Data
0: Not Used
1: Machine Operation
(The memory for
SP67)
2: Copy Length Counter
(SP69 to 75)
3: OPC Counter (SP76)
4: Developer Counter
(*Note1)
(SP77)
/
Developer
Initialization Number
(SP80)
5: Toner Counter (SP78)
/Toner End Number
(SP81)/Toner Near
End Number (SP82)
(*Note2)
density step.
7: Clear data No.1 to 9
and 53.
8: SC Counter
(SP90 to 91)
9: Jam Counter
(SP85 to 86)
10: Change the settings
to the Japan version
*Note1:
This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described on page 2-16 in the A163
manual).
*Note2:
For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to 0 (m) after the
developer initialization. When the developer initialization is done, this counter is set to 150 and
after 150 m of copies, the counter stays at 0. If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.
A251/A252
4-4
SM
Mode No.
Function
-1
SM
4-5
Data
to the U.S.A. version
to the Europe
version
to the Asia version
14: Charge the settings
to the Hoechst
version
to the Regma
version
to the K+E version
17: Factory use
18: Not Used
19: Not Used
20: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings
to the Japanese
version
21: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings
to the U.S.A. version
22: Clear all the
memory and change
the settings to the
Europe version
23: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings
to the Asia version
24: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings
to the Hoechst
version
25: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings
to the Regma
version
26: Clear all the
memory and
change the settings
to the K+E version
27: Factory use
28: Not Used
29: Not Used
30: Clear all the
memory
A251/A252
Service
Tables
SERVICE TOOLS
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Total Counter Unit
Setting
Function
Selects the unit in which the total counter
counts up by.
Registration
Adjustment
Adjusts the paper registration.
-2
-5
Toner Supply
Periods in Toner
-23
End Condition
Selects the periods for supplying toner after

clearing the toner end condition.
Original Feed
-24 Motor Speed
Adjustment
-27 Factory Use Only
Length Size
Magnification
Compensation on
Leading Edge
-28
Adjusts the speed of the original feed motor

(A252 copier only).
Registration
Adjustment for the
Rear Feed
-29
Synchro-cut
Length Auto
Adjustment
(297 mm)
-35
The fusing rollers speed is slightly higher

than the drum speed.
The speed of the copy paper transport will
slightly increase after the leading edge of
the copy paper enters the fusing unit.
To compensate for this, the speed of the
original feed motor is corrected from the
leading edge to 183 mm (A252 copier only).
Adjust the paper registration for the rear
original feed (A252 only).
If the setting of SP#-74 is 1, this setting is
used for the paper registration for the front
original feed as well as the rear original
feed. In this case, this adjustment is added
to the SP#-5 adjustment.
Adjusts the original cut length in Synchro
Cut mode at 297 mm (standard length).
Insert the 297 mm length original five times
(this number displayed on the copy number
indicator can be changed : 1 to 10). If the
actual original length is different from the
standard length, input the following value in
the cut length indicator before inserting the
original:
Data
0: 1 yard
1: 1 m
2: 100 inches
3: 50 inches
4: A1 length (594 mm)
5: Sheet (Any size)
6: 1 foot
0: Standard
9.9 0 9.9 mm
Advance
Delay
0: 60 s
1: 70 s
2: 80 s
3: 90 s
-50 (Faster) 0 50
(Slower)
0.025 %/step
-100 10 100
(Shorter)
(Longer)
2.5%
+2.5%
0: Standard
9.9 0 9.9 mm
Advance
Delay
-9.9 0 9.9
1 step = 0.1 mm
Actual Length - Standard Length

Then the machine automatically calculates
the correction value. The data is overwritten
on SP#-38.
A251/A252
4-6
SM
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Synchro-cut
Length Auto
Adjustment
(1,189 mm)
-36
Function
Data
Adjusts the original cut length in Synchro
-50 0 50
Cut mode at 1189 mm.
1 step = 0.1 mm
Insert the 1189 mm length original five times
(this number displayed on the copy number
indicator can be changed : 1 to 10). If the
actual original length is different from the
standard length, input the following value in
the cut length indicator before inserting the
original:
Then the machine automatically calculates
the correction value. The data is overwritten
on SP#-39.
Synchro-cut
Length Manual
-39 Adjustment
(1,189 mm)
Light Sensor
Voltage Display
(Factory use)
-62
Synchro-cut Rear
Feed Mode
-70
SM
-9.9 0 9.9
1 step = 0.1 mm
(This value is over
written when SP#-35 is
performed.)
Adjusts the synchro cut length when a 1,189 -50.0 0 50
mm original is used. Increasing the number 1 step = 0.1 mm
will shorten the paper cut length.
(This value is over
written when SP#-36 is
performed.)
Fd = X,XX
Displays the real time light sensor output
Fd = Light Sensor
voltage.
Voltage
In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL and
the bias voltage for non-image areas can be
Even if the SP mode is canceled, the
voltage is displayed during the stand-by
condition or copy cycling.
switch off and on.
0: Normal
Normally, an original cannot be inserted
from the rear side in Synchro-cut mode. If 1 1: Synchro-cut Rear
is selected in this mode, an original can be
Feed Mode
inserted from the rear side even if Synchrocut mode is selected. This mode cannot be
used with the trailing edge margin function.
In this mode, the copy will be 194 mm longer
than the original (A252 copier only).
Adjusts the synchro cut length when a 297
mm original is used. Increasing the number
will shorten the paper cut length.
4-7
A251/A252
Service
Tables
-37 Not Used

Synchro-cut
Length Manual
-38 Adjustment
(297 mm)
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Cut Length
Display Mode
-71
Original Feed
-72 Motor Returning
Speed Setting
Roll Feeder Start
Timing
-73
Original Transport
Mode
-74
Fusing
Temperature
Recovery Setting
Function
In semi-synchro cut mode, the machine
stores the 1st original cut length and
displays it in the paper length counter. In this
case, the paper cut mode will be
automatically changed to the
Preset/Variable cut mode. It is not
necessary to press the cut key at the trailing
edge of the original from the 2nd copy
paper.
Before the 2nd original is inserted in the
original table, the cut length in the cut length
counter can be changed with the +/
keys within the range of the semi-synchro
cut (410 mm ~ 2,000, 16.5' ~ 80.0').
Selects the speed of the original feed motor
in returning original mode. A slower speed
may be effective for the thinner original.
Selects the Roll Feeder start timing, just
after the original entrance sensor detects the
trailing edge of the original, or just after the
original entrance sensor detects the
insertion of the original.
The setting change from 0 to 1 makes the
first copy faster and 1 to 1 CPM increases. If
the emergency stop key is pressed while the
original is being transported to the scanning
start position from the original insertion, it is
necessary to check for paper left between
the copier and roll feeder. Whichever setting
is selected, the first copy and 1 to 1 CPM
are within specification.
Select whether the original is transported
from the original table to the scanning start
position directly, or whether the original is
returned to the scanning start position after
the trailing edge of the original passes
through the original registration sensor
(A252 copier only).
The default setting (= 0) is effective for
usage of curled originals. If the setting is
changed from 0 to 1, perform the
synchro-cut length auto adjustment (SP#-35,
#-36).
Determines how the machine recovers when
the fusing temperature becomes lower than
the target value during repeat copy
operation when selecting mode 8 (highest
temperature mode) (A252 copier only).
-75
A251/A252
4-8
Data
0: Non-Length Display
1: Length Display
0: 200 mm/s
1: 150 mm/s
2: 100 mm/s
0: Trailing edge is
detected.
1: Original insertion
0: Original is
transported directly
to the start position.
1: Original is returned to
the start position after
the original passes
through the original
registration sensor.
0: No recovery
(The machine simply
continues copying,
ignoring the fusing
temperature.)
1: Stops copying and
feeds out the
original.
2: Stops copying but the
original is not fed out.
Copying starts again
after the fusing
temperature recovers.
SM
SERVICE TOOLS
4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE

Input Check Mode Table
The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed in the paper
length indicator (ON or OFF is displayed). If a program number not used is
selected, NOT is displayed.
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-16
SM
Sensor/Switch/Signal
Registration Sensor
Exit Sensor
Entrance Sensor
Main Motor LOC Signal
(Status is ON when the main motor is normally rotating.)
Door Switch
(Status is ON when the door is open.)
Original Entrance Sensor (A252 copier only)
Original Rear Sensor (A252 copier only)
Not Used
Right Cutter Switch
Left Cutter Switch
Paper End Sensor
Exit Cover Open
4-9
Service
Tables
Program No.
-1
-2
-3
-4
A251/A252
SERVICE TOOLS
Output Check Mode Table

Press the Bypass Select key to turn on the selected electrical component. The
status of the component is displayed in the paper length indicator.
To turn off the component, press the Bypass Select key again.
Program No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15 to 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Main Motor
Toner Supply Clutch
Pick off solenoid
Registration Clutch
Total Counter
Pre-transfer Lamp
Quenching Lamp
Fusing Lamp
Main Charge Corona
Grid Voltage
Not Used
Not Used
Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage for the
Non-image Area + Quenching Lamp
Original Feed Motor (Forward)
(A252 copier only)
Original Feed Motor (Reverse)
(A252 copier only)
Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor
Original Feed Motor
(Forward and Reverse)
(A252 copier only)
30
34
Main Switch OFF (Energy Star)
Note
Original feed motor

operation changes every
time the roll feed key is
pressed.
1st time: Forward
2nd time: Stop
3rd time: Reverse
4th time: Stop
Turn off the main switch.
switches. The number of the movements (0 ~ 9999) is displayed in the
paper length indicator.
A251/A252
4-10
SM
JAM CODE LIST
4.4 JAM CODE LIST

4.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE
dJ10
dJ11
dJ17
dJ18
dJ21
dJ22
dJ23
dJ25
dJ26
dJ27
dJ28
dJ32
dJ33
dJ35
dJ36
dJ40
dJ41
dJ42
dJ43
SM
Cause of Jam
Initial misfeed at the original entrance sensor.
Initial misfeed at the original registration sensor.
Initial misfeed at the original rear sensor.
Initial misfeed at the entrance sensor.
Initial misfeed at the registration sensor.
Initial misfeed at the exit sensor.
Initial misfeed at the leading edge sensor of the roll feeder.
Original entrance sensor OFF check during the original
scanning process.
Original entrance sensor ON check during the original
scanning process.
Original entrance sensor OFF check during the original
returning process.
Original entrance sensor ON check during the original
returning process.
Original registration sensor leading edge ON check during
the original scanning process.
Original registration sensor trailing edge OFF check during
Original registration sensor trailing edge ON check during
Original registration sensor leading edge OFF check during
the original returning process.
Original registration sensor leading edge ON check during
Original registration sensor trailing edge OFF check during
Original registration sensor trailing edge ON check during
Original rear sensor trailing edge OFF check during the
original scanning process.
Original rear sensor trailing edge ON check during the
original scanning process.
Original rear sensor leading edge OFF check during the
original returning process.
Original rear sensor leading edge ON check during the
original returning process.
Emergency stop key pressed
Original registration sensor OFF condition during the original
scanning process.
Original rear sensor OFF condition during the original
returning process.
Original rear sensor ON condition when clearing the original
hold mode by pressing the
key.
4-11
Remarks
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A252 only
A251/A252
Service
Tables
Code
dJ01
dJ02
dJ03
dJ05
dJ06
dJ07
dJ08
JAM CODE LIST

Code
dJ45
pJ51
pJ52
pJ53
pJ55
pJ60
pJ61
pJ62
pJ63
pJ70
pJ71
pJ72
rJ80
rJ81
rJ90
rJ91
rJ95
rJ98
rJ99
A251/A252
Cause of Jam
Original registration sensor does not turn off after paper is
fed 2,500 mm.
Registration sensor OFF condition is detected just after
starting the copy process.
Registration sensor OFF condition is detected before
starting the roll feeder again.
Entrance sensor ON condition is detected during roll
feeding.
2,500 mm.
Registration sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge.
Registration sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.
Registration sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.
Registration sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge.
Exit sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge.
Exit sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.
Exit sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge.
Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper leading edge.
Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper leading edge.
Paper cutter failure
Door open during roll feeding
Roll feeder.
Motor does not turn off after paper is fed 500 mm more than the
maximum paper length.
Leading edge sensor ON check at the paper trailing edge
during roll feeding.
Leading edge sensor OFF check at the paper trailing edge
during roll feeding.
4-12
Remarks
A251 only
SM
JAM CODE LIST
In mm Mode
0: 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297
1: 2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 245
2: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000, 900, 800, 700,
600, 500, 400, 300, 245
3: 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297,
245
4: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 245
5: 2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 245
6: 1456, 1030, 728, 515, 364, 257
7: 2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 257, 245
8: 2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 245
9: 2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880, 841, 813,
788, 765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364, 297, 257
10: 2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 245
11: 2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 245
12: 2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500, 1450, 1400,
1350, 1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800, 750, 700,
650, 600, 550, 500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 245
13: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750, 700, 650, 594,
550, 500, 420, 297, 245
14: 2000, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625, 594, 515,
420, 364, 297, 245
15: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 245
16: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 245
17: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297, 245
18: 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 280, 245
19: The data stored in SP23 to 32
In inch Mode
0: 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0
1: 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0
2: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
3: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6
4: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6
5: 80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 10.0, 9.6
6: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0, 20.0, 15.0, 10.0,
9.6
7: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
8: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6
9: 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0,
17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6
10: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 47.5,
45.0, 42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0, 12.5, 10.0,
9.6
11: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0,
36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0, 9.6
SM
4-13
A251/A252
Service
Tables
Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)
JAM CODE LIST

12: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0,
36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
13: 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0,
34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0, 9.6
14: 80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0, 56.0, 54.0, 52.0,
50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0, 26.0, 24.0, 22.0,
20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 10.0, 9,6
15: 80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0, 9.6
16: 80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 9.6
17: 80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0, 45.0, 42.0, 39.0,
36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0, 9.6
18: 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 42.0, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7, 24.0, 23.4, 22.0,
20.3, 18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.1, 9.6
Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1)

SP. No.
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10
#13
#14
#15
#17
#19
#20
#21
#22
#-2
#-3
Japan
1
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
30
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
1
0
U.S.A.
2
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
30
0.0
0.0
1
0
0
6
1
Europe
2
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
1
0
Asia
2
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
1
0
Regma/Ozalid
2
0
1
1
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0.0
0.0
0
0
0
1
0
K+E
2
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
30
0.0
0.0
1
0
0
6
1
#13, #14, #17: A252 only
A251/A252
4-14
SM
SERVICE REMARKS
4.6 SERVICE REMARKS

4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD
Noise Filter
TB202
Service
Tables
AC Drive Board
TB201
A252M500.WMF
Service Remark for 220 240 V Version

Make sure that the harnesses are connected to the noise filter and ac drive board
as shown correctly
1. Set the power supply cord hot line (brown wire) connector to terminal 1 on the
noise filter.
2. Set the power supply cord neutral line (blue wire) connector to terminal 2 on the
noise filter.
3. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to terminal 3
on the noise filter.
4. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to terminal
4 on the noise filter
5. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to TB201 on
ac drive board.
6. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to TB202
on ac drive board.
SM
4-15
A251/A252
SERVICE REMARKS
AC Drive Board
TB202
TB201
A252M500.WMF
Service Remarks for 120 V Version

Make sure that the harness is connected to the ac drive board as shown correctly
1. Set the power supply cord harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to
TB201 on ac drive board.
2. Set the power supply cord harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to
A251/A252
4-16
SM
OPTICS

5.2 OPTICS
[C]
[A] [D]
[B]
[E]
[G]
[F]
A252R501.WMF
5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the left and right upper covers.
2. Remove the upper original guide [A].
3. Push the projections [B] into the holes [C] of the rear side of the original feed
unit as shown and remove the operation panel [D] (1 screw and 2 connectors).
4. Open the original feed unit [E] and unhook the stoppers [F] at both ends.
5. Turn the original feed unit and two bushings [G] at both ends 1/4 of a turn and
remove.
SM
5-1
A251/A252
Replacement
Adjustment
A252R500.WMF
OPTICS
[D]
[B]
[C]
[G]
[F]
[H]
[B]
[C]
[E]
[I]
[J]
A252R510.WMF
[A]
[K]
A252R502.WMF
5.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the original feed unit.
2. Remove the exposure glass bracket [A] (1 screw).
3. Remove the exposure glass stoppers [B] (2 screws).
4. Remove the exposure glass [C] by sliding it out to the right side and lifting up
the left side as shown.
NOTE: Make sure that the edge cut side [D] of the exposure glass is towards the
upper side when reassembling.
5.2.3 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)

1. Remove the exposure glass.
2. Open the toner supply cover [E] and remove the front original guide plate [F] (1
screw).
3. Remove the rear original guide plate [G] (4 screws and 1 pin [H]).
4. Lift up the fiber optics array [I] and remove it from the left side by sliding it out to
the right side as shown.
NOTE: When reassembling, be careful not to damage the right side [J] of the
fiber optics array by touching the optics side plate [K].
A251/A252
5-2
SM
OPTICS
5.2.4 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL
[B]
[A]
[A]
1. Remove the fiber optics array.

NOTE: If the exposure lamp is too tight to be turned, remove one side of the
exposure lamp socket (1 screw) and remove the exposure lamp.
2. Turn the exposure lamp [A] 1/4 of a turn and remove.
NOTE: Make sure that the direction of the aperture [B] of the exposure lamp is
towards the fiber optics array side (rear side).
SM
5-3
A251/A252
Replacement
Adjustment
A252R511.WMF
OPTICS
5.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY)
[A]
A252R503.WMF
1. Follow the steps from 1 to 2 of the fiber optics array removal.

2. Replace the light sensor [A] (1 screw, 1 connector).
A251/A252
5-4
SM
OPTICS
5.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY)

This adjustment should be carried out when the original registration and/or original
entrance sensor is replaced.
1. Measure the actual length of A3 (297) and A0 (1189) originals.
2. Access SP#-35 (synchro-cut length auto adjustment, 297 mm) and input the
difference between the measured length and 297 mm.
3. Press the RF Select key. The copy quantity indicator blinks. Input the test
copy number (default: 5).
4. Press the RF Select key.
5. Place the measured original (A3) on the original feed table. If the original is not
placed correctly (placed diagonally), by pressing the $ key once, this step
can be canceled only one time. Otherwise, carry out this procedure from the
beginning.
6. Repeat step 5 until the number in the blinking copy quantity indicator is 0.
7. Press the RF Select key.
Replacement
Adjustment
8. Access SP#-36 (synchro-cut length auto adjustment, 1,189 mm) and carry out
the adjustment in the same way as for the 297 mm adjustment.
SM
5-5
A251/A252
DRUM UNIT
5.4 DRUM UNIT

5.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL
[A]
[B]
[B]
[A]
[F]
[E]
[C]
[D]
A252R504.WMF
A252R505.WMF

2. Remove the 2 screws [A] at both ends.
3. Remove the timing belt [B] (A251 copier)/grounding plate spring [B] (A252
copier) and disconnect the harness connector [C].
4. Remove the drum unit [D].
5. Place the drum unit on the flat floor.
NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the drum unit, hook the drum unit guides [E] on the
pins [F] of the copier side plates.
2) Hold both ends of the drum unit to carry it.
A251/A252
5-6
SM
FUSING
5.5 FUSING
5.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL
[J]
[K]
[H]
[G]
[I]
[C]
[D]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[C]
[B]
A252R509.WMF
NOTE: Close the paper path section to remove and reinstall the fusing unit.
2. Open the exit cover [A] and remove the shoulder screws [B] at both ends.
Remove the screws [C] for the grounding wires.
3. Disconnect the connector [D], remove the screw [E], and flex the hinge arms [F]
of the exit cover slightly to the outside of the exit unit shafts and remove.
4. Turn the exit unit [G] 1/4 of a turn to the front side (rear view) and remove it by
pulling out.
NOTE: When reinstalling the exit unit, set the right hinge [H] between the two
pulleys [I] and raise the left hinge [J] using tape [K].
SM
5-7
A251/A252
Replacement
Adjustment
[F]
FUSING
[B]
[A]
[G]
[F]
[H]
A252R507.WMF
[C]
[E]
[C]
A252R508.WMF
[D]
A252R506.WMF
5. Disconnect the connectors [A].

6. Remove the screw [B] fixing the safety switch bracket.
7. 220 ~ 240 V version only:
Remove the 2 screws [C] and bronze plate [D] (2 screws).
8. While pressing down the fusing pressure release bar [E], pull out the fusing
unit.
NOTE: When reinstalling the fusing unit, press down the fusing pressure release
bar [E], set the fusing unit on the guides [F] and align the cuts [G] to the
side plates [H] at both ends.
A251/A252
5-8
SM
T & S CORONA UNIT
5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT

5.6.1 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE
REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
[H]
[C]
[B]
[G]
[E]
[G]
Replacement
Adjustment
[F]
[D]
A252R512.WMF
NOTE: 1) Handle the new wire by the ends only. Oil from your hands may
cause uneven charging of the drum.
2) Do not stretch or bend the corona wires.
3) Do not rub the corona wires with rough material (sand paper, etc.)
as this will damage the corona wire.
4) Do not use any solvent to clean the wire as this will cause uneven
charging of the drum.
Preparation
1. Remove the T & S corona unit.
2. Remove the paper guides [A] and endblock covers [B].
SM
5-9
A251/A252
T & S CORONA UNIT
Separation Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the separation corona wire [C].
2. Hook one end of the new separation corona wire on the terminal [D] of the right
endblock.
3. Hook the center part of the separation corona wire on the spring [E] of the left
endblock.
4. Set the wire on the slots [F].
5. While pushing the spring in the direction of the arrow, hook the other end [G] of
the separation corona wire on the terminal of the right endblock.
6. Make sure the wire is set on the slots [F].
Transfer Corona Wire Replacement

1. Remove the transfer corona wire [H].
2. Install the new transfer corona wire.
A251/A252
5-10
SM
5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
When:
Purpose:
Adjustment
Standard:
Perform:
How:
Registration is not within the adjustment standard.

0 3 mm (0 0.12")
SP#-5, SP#-27 (A252 rear original feed)
Change the registration roller start timing by SP#-5 and/or SP#-27
1. Make several copies by using the manual feed or roll feeder and check the
registration.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Adjust the registration using SP#-5 and/or SP#-27 if the registration is not
within the adjustment standard.
SM
5-11
A251/A252
TROUBLESHOOTING
SERVICE CALL CONDITION
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITION
The following service conditions are newly added as the A251 and A252 copiers.
For other SC conditions, refer to the A163 copier for details. To clear SC E-15,
access SP38 and change the data from 1 to 0.
6.2.12 SC CODE E-14: ZERO CROSS SIGNAL DETECTION

ABNORMAL
- Definition The zero cross signal is not detected within 0.5 second after the main switch is
turned on.
- Points to check Main board
AC Drive board
6.2.13 SC CODE E-15: MAIN SWITCH ABNORMAL

(U.S.A. VERSION ONLY)
The main switch does not turn off within 0.45 second after sending reset signal.
- Points to check Main switch
Main board
SM
6-1
A251/A252
Troubleshooting
- Definition -
BLOWN FUSE TABLE
6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Europe Version
Fuse No.
FU301
FU302
FU303
FU304
Specification
250 V 5A
250 V 6.3 A
250 V 6.3 A
250 V 6.3 A
Symptom
No power.
Flourescent lamp does not light. Black copy.
No indication. Beeper sound.
E = 10 is indicated.
Specification
125 V 8A
125 V 6.3 A
125 V 6.3 A
125 V 6.3 A
Symptom
No power.
Flourescent lamp does not light. Black copy.
No indication. Beeper sound.
E = 10 is indicated.
U.S.A. Version
Fuse No.
FU301
FU302
FU303
FU304
AC Drive Board
Fuse No.
FU201
CB201
A251/A252
Specification
250 V 15 A
(U.S.A. version only)
250 V 8 A
(Europe version only)
Symptom
No power.
No power.
6-2
SM
B047/B048
SERVICE MANUAL
Insert Version
The B047/B048 machines are based on the A163/A251/A252 copiers.

Only the differences from the base copier are described in the following pages.
Therefore, this documentation should be treated as an insert version of the base
copiers service manual. It should always be utilized together with the base
copiers service manual.
INSERTION PROCEDURE OF SERVICE MANUAL

1. Replace the book spine tag with the new one.
2. Insert the B047/B048 service manual after the A163/A251/A252 manual.
B047/B048
TABLE OF CONTENTS
This manual describes new items for the J2SS-C3 (B047/B048).
Please refer to the J2SS Mark II (A251/A252) manual for the descriptions marked
with * in page column.
OVERALL INFORMATION
1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ........................................ 1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................1-1
PAPER PATH............................................................................................1-3
DRUM PROCESSES ............................................................................... *
MECHANICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................1-4
DRIVE LAYOUT ....................................................................................... *
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS..................................................................1-6
DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 2-1
2.1 DRUM....................................................................................................... *
2.1.1 DRUM CHARACTERISTICS ........................................................... *
2.1.2 DRUM DRIVE .................................................................................. *
2.2 CHARGE .................................................................................................. *
2.2.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... *
2.2.2 CHARGE CORONA CIRCUIT ......................................................... *
2.2.3 CORONA UNIT VENTILATION ....................................................... *
2.3 EXPOSURE...............................................................................................2-1
2.3.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... *
2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (B048 ONLY)..................................2-1
Basic Operation (Manual Feed) ........................................................... *
Original Jam Check Timing.................................................................. *
Drive Mechanism ................................................................................. *
Original Positioning ...............................................................................2-1
Scanning...............................................................................................2-2
Start Key Enable ...................................................................................2-3
2.3.3 FL REGULATOR CONTROL........................................................... *
2.3.4 MANUAL ID CONTROL................................................................... *
Manual ID Control................................................................................ *
2.4 DEVELOPMENT .......................................................................................2-4
2.4.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... *
2.4.2 DRIVE MECHANISM....................................................................... *
2.4.3 CROSS-MIXING .............................................................................. *
2.4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL ..........................................................2-4
Toner Near End Condition ................................................................... *
SM
B047/B048
Recovery from Toner End Condition.....................................................2-5

Toner Density Sensor .......................................................................... *
2.4.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS .................................................................... *
Basic Concept...................................................................................... *
Manual Image Density Bias ................................................................. *
2.4.6 TONER SUPPLY ............................................................................. *
2.5 IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION .................................... *
2.5.1 PRE-TRANSFER LAMP (PTL) ........................................................ *
2.5.2 IMAGE TRANSFER......................................................................... *
2.5.3 PAPER SEPARATION .................................................................... *
2.5.4 PICK-OFF MECHANISM ................................................................. *
2.5.5 T/S CORONA CIRCUIT................................................................... *
2.6 CLEANING ............................................................................................... *
2.6.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................... *
2.6.2 USED TONER COLLECTION ..........................................................2-6
2.7 QUENCHING............................................................................................ *
2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT ......................................................................2-7
2.8.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................2-7
2.8.2 DRIVE MECHANISM....................................................................... *
Fusing Unit Drive ................................................................................. *
2.8.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ............................................................2-8
Fusing Circuit Operation ...................................................................... *
Overheat Protection ............................................................................. *
Hot Roller Temperature Control............................................................2-8
2.8.4 TEMPERATURE CONTROL ........................................................... *
The Ready Condition ........................................................................... *
Fusing Unit Operating Modes .............................................................. *
2.8.5 ENERGY SAVER FUNCTION......................................................... *
2.8.6 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE HEIGHT............................................ *
2.9 OTHERS .................................................................................................. *
2.9.1 ROLL CUTTING RAIL ..................................................................... *
2.10 ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES
(ALL THE DESTINATION) ......................................................................2-9
INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 3-1
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ...........................................................3-1
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT ...............................................................................3-1
3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS...............................................3-2
3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL .............................................................................3-2
3.1.4 POWER SOURCE............................................................................3-3
3.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE .................................................................3-4
3.2.1 COPIER............................................................................................3-4
Accessory Check ..................................................................................3-4
B048 copier only (step 21) ..................................................................3-12
B047 copier only (step 22 and 23) ......................................................3-12
B047/B048
ii
SM
Both copiers (step 24 and 25).............................................................3-12

3.2.2 TABLE (B439) ................................................................................3-13
Accessory Check ................................................................................3-13
3.2.3 COPY tray (B440)...........................................................................3-15
Accessory Check ................................................................................3-15
3.2.4 ROLL FEEDER1 and 2 (B435/b436) ..............................................3-19
Accessory Check ................................................................................3-19
3.2.5 Roll Cutting Rail (B437) ..................................................................3-28
SERVICE TABLES
4. SERVICE TABLES...................................................................... 4-1
4.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ........................................... *
4.1.1 PM TABLE....................................................................................... *
4.1.2 REGULAR PM PROCEDURE ......................................................... *
4.2 SERVICE TABLES ................................................................................... *
4.2.1 TEST POINTS ................................................................................. *
Main Board .......................................................................................... *
Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack ............................................................. *
4.2.2 VARIABLE RESISTORS ................................................................. *
Charge/Bias/Grid Power Pack ............................................................. *
T&S Power Pack.................................................................................. *
4.3 SERVICE TOOLS......................................................................................4-1
4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE...........................................................4-1
Service Program Mode Access Procedure .......................................... *
Service Program Mode Table ...............................................................4-1
4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE ....................................................4-23
Input/Output Check Mode Access Procedure ...................................... *
Input Check Mode Table.....................................................................4-23
Output Check Mode Table ..................................................................4-23
4.3.3 POWER ON INITIAL SETTING MODE ........................................... *
4.4 JAM CODE LIST .....................................................................................4-25
4.4.1 ACCESS PROCEDURE .................................................................. *
4.4.2 JAM CODE TABLE.........................................................................4-25
Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)........................................4-27
Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1) ....................................4-28
4.5 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ..................................................... *
4.6 SERVICE REMARKS ..............................................................................4-29
4.6.1 DRUM UNIT .................................................................................... *
Drum .................................................................................................... *
4.6.2 CHARGE CORONA......................................................................... *
4.6.3 OPTICS ........................................................................................... *
4.6.4 DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................. *
4.6.5 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION..................................................... *
4.6.6 CLEANING UNIT ............................................................................. *
4.6.7 FUSING UNIT.................................................................................. *
4.6.8 ORIGINAL FEED ............................................................................. *
SM
iii
B047/B048
4.6.9 PAPER FEED.................................................................................. *

4.6.10 ROLL FEEDER.............................................................................. *
4.6.11 OTHERS........................................................................................ *
4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD .......................................................................4-29
Service Remark for 220 ~ 240 V Version............................................4-29
Service Remarks for 120 V Version ....................................................4-30

5. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 5-1
5.1 EXTERIOR COVERS ............................................................................... *
5.1.1 LEFT SIDE COVER REMOVAL ...................................................... *
Left Upper Cover ................................................................................. *
Left Lower Cover.................................................................................. *
5.1.2 RIGHT SIDE COVER REMOVAL .................................................... *
Right Upper Cover ............................................................................... *
Right Lower Front, Right Lower Middle, and Right Lower
Rear Covers......................................................................................... *
5.1.3 REAR COVER REMOVAL .............................................................. *
Rear Cover .......................................................................................... *
5.2 OPTICS .................................................................................................... *
5.2.1 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)........................... *
5.2.2 EXPOSURE GLASS REMOVAL (A252 ONLY)............................... *
5.2.3 EXPOSURE LAMP REMOVAL (A252 ONLY) ................................. *
5.2.4 FIBER OPTICS ARRAY REMOVAL (A252 ONLY).......................... *
5.2.5 LIGHT SENSOR REPLACEMENT (A252 ONLY)............................ *
5.2.6 SYNCHRO-CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT (A252 ONLY) ............... *
5.3 DEVELOPMENT ...................................................................................... *
5.3.1 DEVELOPMENT UNIT REMOVAL.................................................. *
5.3.2 DEVELOPER REMOVAL ................................................................ *
5.3.3 TONER DENSITY SENSOR REPLACEMENT................................ *
5.3.4 PTL REPLACEMENT ...................................................................... *
5.3.5 DEVELOPMENT BIAS VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT ......................... *
Bias Voltage for Image Area ................................................................ *
Bias Voltage for Non-image Area ........................................................ *
5.4 DRUM UNIT ..............................................................................................5-1
5.4.1 DRUM UNIT REMOVAL ................................................................. *
5.4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT ...................................................................5-1
5.4.3 CLEANING BLADE REPLACEMENT.............................................. *
5.4.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL............................................. *
5.4.5 CHARGE CORONA WIRE REPLACEMENT .................................. *
5.4.6 PICK-OFF PAWL UNIT REMOVAL ................................................. *
5.4.7 GRID VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENT..................................................... *
5.4.8 DRUM CURRENT ADJUSTMENT .................................................. *
Charge Current Adjustment ................................................................. *
Transfer Current Adjustment................................................................ *
Separation Current Adjustment............................................................ *
B047/B048
iv
SM
5.5 FUSING .....................................................................................................5-2

5.5.1 FUSING UNIT REMOVAL ............................................................... *
5.5.2 HOT ROLLER REPLACEMENT ...................................................... *
5.5.3 PRESSURE ROLLER REPLACEMENT.......................................... *
5.5.4 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT ................. *
5.5.5 PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT.............. *
5.5.6 HOT ROLLER STRIPPER UNIT REPLACEMENT.......................... *
5.5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT ..............................5-2
5.5.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT ......................................5-2
5.5.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT .......................................5-3
5.6 T & S CORONA UNIT .............................................................................. *
5.6.1 T & S CORONA UNIT REMOVAL ................................................... *
5.6.2 TRANSFER AND SEPARATION CORONA WIRE
REPLACEMENT.............................................................................. *
Preparation .......................................................................................... *
Separation Corona Wire Replacement ................................................ *
Transfer Corona Wire Replacement .................................................... *
5.7 OTHERS .................................................................................................. *
5.7.1 OZONE FILTER REPLACEMENT................................................... *
5.7.2 ANTICONDENSATION HEATER INSTALLATION.......................... *
5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT ...............................................................5-4
5.8.1 LIGHT SENSOR ADJUSTMENT ..................................................... *
5.8.2 IMAGE BIAS ADJUSTMENT........................................................... *
5.8.3 TONER DENSITY ADJUSTMENT................................................... *
5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT......................................................5-4
TROUBLESHOOTING
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 6-1
6.1 COPY QUALITY TROUBLESHOOTING .................................................. *
6.1.1 LOW IMAGE DENSITY ................................................................... *
6.1.2 UNEVEN COPY IMAGE .................................................................. *
6.1.3 DIRTY BACKGROUND ................................................................... *
6.1.4 BLACK LINE OR BAND................................................................... *
6.1.5 ENTIRELY BLANK COPY ............................................................... *
6.1.6 PAPER CREASING......................................................................... *
6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS .................................................................6-1
6.2.1 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS .............................................................6-1
SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal .............................................6-1
SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open ..............................................6-1
SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open ...........................................6-1
SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short ...........................................6-2
SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open ..................................6-2
SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short ..................................6-2
SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat ............................................................6-2
SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error ...................................................6-3
SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal....................................6-3
SM
B047/B048
SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal...................................................6-3

SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor Adjustment Error ......................6-3
SC Code E-13: Total Counter Abnormal...............................................6-4
SC Code E-14: Zero Cross Signal Detection Abnormal........................6-4
SC Code E-15: Main Switch Abnormal .................................................6-4
SC Code E-17: Unstable Fusing Temperature .....................................6-4
SC Code E-18: Fusing Lamp Continuous Light ....................................6-4
6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE ..............................................................................6-5
6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT....................................................................6-5
Europe Version .....................................................................................6-5
U.S.A. Version ......................................................................................6-5
AC Drive Board .....................................................................................6-5
ROLL FEEDER UNIT B435/B436

1. OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION ........................................ 7-1
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS.....................................................................................7-1
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS ........................................7-2
2. DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS ...................................... 7-3

2.1 MECHANICAL OPERATION .....................................................................7-3
2.1.1 BASIC OPERATION.........................................................................7-3
2.1.2 ROLL EDITION DETECTION ...........................................................7-5
2.1.3 DRIVE MECHANISM........................................................................7-5
2.1.4 CUTTER OPERATION .....................................................................7-6
3. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT........................................ 7-7

3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT...............................................................7-7

ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT.......................7-8
ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL...................................................................7-9
ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT .................................................7-10
ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT ..................................................7-11
ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT...................................................7-12
CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT.................................................................7-13
Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: 3 mm (for Length Shorter
than 420 mm) 5 mm (for 420 to 1,189 mm) 11 mm
(3,000 mm) .........................................................................................7-13
3.8 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT ....................................................7-14
B047/B048
vi
SM
! IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

your bare hands.
7. When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start turning to

intervals.

those models.

B047/B048 INSTALLATION
TAB
POSITION 1
TAB
POSITION 2
TAB
POSITION 5
B047/B048 TROUBLESHOOTING
TAB
POSITION 8
ROLL FEED UNIT B435/B436
TAB
POSITION 7
B047/B048 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
TAB
POSITION 6
B047/B048 SERVICE TABLES
TAB
POSITION 3
B047/B048 DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
TAB
POSITION 4
B047/B048 OVERALL INFORMATION
24 sec.
N/A
Manual Bypass
24 sec.
N/A
Manual Bypass
Warm-up Time
(A1/D Sideways)
1st Copy Time

(A1/D Sideways)
Multiple Copy
Paper Feed
(Standard)
** Copy Speed 1 10
* Copy Speed 1 - 1
Options
174 lb.
79 Kg.
Less than 300 sec.
Less than 300 sec.
Copy Speed
(A1/D)
174 lb.
79 Kg.
3 cpm *
3 cpm *
Process Speed
Weight Copier
Only
50mm/sec
50mm/sec
Syncronized
Cut
1080 x 570 x
490 mm
Yes with Roll Feeder

(Manual)
No
Original Length
Original Setting
1080 x 570 x
490 mm
Face-up
Face-up
Original Size
Dimensions
(W x D x H)
Copier Only
Max. 2m / 6.6ft.
Max. 2m / 6.6ft.
PM Cycle (A1/D
* 1 Roll Feeder
* Roll Cutting Rail
* Table
3.6K
Max. A0/E
3.6K
Max. A0/E
Machine Life
(A1/D Sideways)
* 1 Roll Feeder
* Roll Cutting Rail
* Table
Table Top
60K Copies
Table Top
60K Copies
Configuration
FW750
A251
FW740
A163
Items
176 lb.
80 Kg.
1080 x 803 x
480 mm
* 1 Roll Feeder
* New Table
* Copy Stacker
Manual Bypass
1 to 10 (A0/E)
30 sec.
Less than 300 sec.
3 cpm **
2.4 cpm*
50mm/sec
Yes with Roll Feeder

(Auto)
Face-down
Max. 2m / 6.6ft.
Max. A0/E
3.6K
60K Copies
Table Top
FW760
A252
rd
430 lb.
195 Kg
1230 x 690 x
1070 mm
3 Roll Feeder
2 Roll Feeders +
Manual Bypass
N/A
18 sec.
Less than 360 sec.
7.5 cpm *
6 cpm **
90mm/sec
Yes (Auto)
Face-up
Max. 3.6m / 11.8ft.
Max. A0/E
10K
300K Copies
Console
FW870
A174
174 lbs
79 kg
1080 x 570 x
490 mm
* Roll Feeder, 1 roll

* Roll Feeder, 2 rolls
* Roll Cutting Rail
* Table
* Side Guide
Manual Bypass
N/A
21 sec.
Within 3 min.
(180 sec.)
4 cpm
60mm/sec
Yes, only with Roll

Feeder
Face-down
Max. 3m / 9.8ft.
36" X 118"
3.6K
60K Copies or 5 yrs
Table Top
FW770
B047
Comparison of Major Specifications
176 lbs
80 kg
1080 x 623 x
480 mm
* Roll Feeder, 1 roll

* Roll Feeder, 2 rolls *
* Side Guide
Manual Bypass
1 to 10
25 sec.
Within 3 min.
(180 sec.)
4 cpm
60mm/sec
Yes, only with Roll

Feeder
Face-down
Max. 3m / 9.8ft.
36" X 118"
3.6K
60K Copies or 5 yrs
Condole
FW780
B048
OVERALL INFORMATION
SPECIFICATIONS
Overall
Information

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Configuration:
Table top
Copy Process:
Original Feed:
Sheet feed
Original Size:
Maximum: 914 x 3,000 (36" x 118")mm

Copy Size:
Same as Original Size
Copying Speed:
First Copy:
21 seconds (A1/D sideways): B047 copier

25 seconds (A1/D sideways): B048 copier
Warm-up Time:
Within 3 minutes (Room temperature 23C)
Multi-Copy:
B047: Single copies only,

B048: Up to 10 copies
Automatic Reset:
2 minutes after copying has finished (can be set to

1, 3, 4, or 5 minutes or to no auto reset)
Photoconductor:
Drum Charge:
Scorotron corona wire and grid (Negative Charge)
Reproduction Ratio:
1 : 1 (0.5%)
Exposure System:
Exposure Lamp:
Development:
Dual-component dry toner system
Cartridge system (750 g toner/cartridge)
Toner Consumption:
Development Bias:
Negative
Direct toner density detection using an induction

sensor
Paper Separation:
Dual wire AC corona and pick-off pawls
Cleaning:
Cleaning blade
Paper Feeding:
Image Fusing:
Teflon heat roller (upper) and a silicone rubber

pressure roller (lower)
Fusing Lamp:
Halogen lamp
(115 V: 1,200 W, 230 V: 1,200 W)
SM
1-1
B047/B048
SPECIFICATIONS
16 codes, displayed on the copy counter
Power Source:
115 V/60 Hz, 12 A

220 ~ 240V/50, 60 Hz, 7A
Power Consumption:
Maximum: 1.4 kW
Warm-up: 1.3 kW
Ready:
0.04 to 1.3 kW
Copy cycle: 1.4 kW
B047: 1,080 x 570 x 490 mm

42.5" x 22.4" x 19.3"
B048: 1,080 x 623 x 480 mm
42.5" x 24.5" x 18.9"
Weight:
B047: 79 kg, 174.0 lbs

B048: 80 kg, 176.0 lbs

Main frame
B047 copier
B048 copier
Configuration
Optional equipment
Roll feeder (B435: 1 roll, B436: 2 rolls)
Roll cutting rail (B437)
Table (B439)
Side guides (B438)
Roll feeder (B435: 1 roll, B436: 2 rolls)
Side guide (B438)
Copy tray (B440)
NOTE: 1) Roll cutting rail cannot be installed on the B048 copier.

2) Key counters cannot be installed on these copiers.
3) The B048 requires a roll feeder (either 1 roll or 2 rolls). While the roll
feeders are shipped separately, they are not really optional. One must
be installed for the B048 to function properly. .
Roll Holder Unit (B394)
B047/B048
1-2
SM
PAPER PATH
Overall
Information
1.2 PAPER PATH
- B048 copier -
- B047 copier E
A
B
D
C
B047V102.WMF
B048V102.WMF
A: Original Path
B: Manual Feed Path
C: Roll Feeder Path
D: Paper Exit
E: Original Path: Rear Feeder
There are two versions of this machine. The B047 is the basic version. It can only
make one copy at a time. The B048 is the multi-print version. It can make multiple
copies of an original (scanning and copying an original multiple times).
Both versions can be equipped with either a single or a double paper roll.
SM
1-3
B047/B048
MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
1.4 MECHANICAL COMPONENTS

20 21 22
19
18
17
16
15
6
7
14
8
9
13
10
11
12
B047V101.WMF
1. 1st Original Feed Roller

2. 1st Press Rollers
3. Copy Tray
4. Exit Rollers
5. Fusing Exit Rollers
6. Hot Roller
7. Pressure Roller
8. Gas Spring
9. OPC Drum
10. T/S Corona Unit
11. Main Drive Unit
B047/B048
12. Roll Feed Unit (1 roll or 2 rolls)

13. Roll Paper
14. Paper Registration Rollers
15. Manual Feed Table
16. Development Unit
17. Toner Cartridge
18. 2nd Original Feed Roller
19. Original Table
20. 2nd Original Press Roller
21. Exposure Lamp
22. Fiber Optic Array
1-4
SM
28
27
Overall
Information
MECHANICAL COMPONENTS
29
26
25
23
24
B048V101.WMF
23. Original Guide

24. Optional Copy Tray
25. Original Entrance Roller
26. Original Entrance Press Roller
SM
27. Original Roller Feed Motor

28. Original Rear Press Roller
29. Original Rear Roller
1-5
B047/B048
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
1.6 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

index (Water proof paper).
Name
Motors
Main
Exhaust Fan
Original Feed
(B048 only)
Function
Drives all mechanical components except the fans
(DC Motor).
section to the ozone filter (DC Motor).
Drives the original feed motor (DC Motor).
Index. No.
32
5
45
Magnetic Clutches
Registration
Toner Supply

30
31
Solenoids
Pick-off Pawl

Cuts AC power when the original or paper feed unit
are opened.
Cuts AC power when the fusing exit unit is opened.
Door Open is displayed on the operation panel
when the used toner cover is open.
17
Switches
Main
Original & Paper
Feed Safety
Fusing Exit Safety
Used Toner Cover
Sensors
Door Open
Toner Density
Original Registration
Light
Entrance Feed
Registration
Exit
Original Entrance
(B048 only)
Original Rear
(B048 only)
Exit Cover Open
Toner Overflow
B047/B048
Indicates Door Open on the operation panel and

prevents operation.
Activates when the leading edge of the original
passes the front of the exposure glass.
Measures the intensity of the exposure lamps
output.
Activates when copy paper is inserted (jam
detector).
Activates when copy paper arrives at the
Measures the original length and detects jams.
18
12
48
29
26
4
27
24
25
7
43
Detects original jams.
44

prevents operation.
Detects whether the used toner tank is full or not.
47
1-6
46
SM
Name
Function
Main
through other PCBs.
PSU
Converts the voltage from AC to DC voltage.
AC Drive
Provides AC power to the fusing lamp and PSU.
FL Regulator
Operation Panel
Controls the operation panel display.
Lamps
Exposure
Fusing
Pre-Transfer (PTL)
Quenching (QL)
Power Packs
Charge/Bias/
Grid Power Pack
Transfer/Separation

image transfer.
Provides high voltage power for the charge corona,

charge grid, and development bias.
Provides high voltage power for the transfer corona
and separation.
Index. No.
22
21
15
23
10
2
3
20
1
19
16
Thermistors
Hot Roller
Pressure Roller

Monitors the pressure rollers surface temperature.
8
11
Thermofuses
Fusing
Protects the fusing unit against overheating.
Keeps moisture from forming inside the copier

(option).
13
Heaters
Anti-condensation
Others
Total Counter
Circuit Breaker
(Europe, Asia)/
Fuse (U.S.A.)
SM

Guards against voltage surges in the input power.
1-7
28
14
B047/B048
Overall
Information
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
EXPOSURE

2.3 EXPOSURE
Detailed
Descriptions
2.3.2 PAPER AND ORIGINAL FEED (B048 ONLY)

[E]
[L]
[J]
[C]
[K]
26 mm
[F]
[D]
[H]
[G]
[I]
10 mm
J: Original Rear Roller

K: Original Rear Sensor
L: Fiber Optics Array
[M]
[A]
[B]
B047D500.WMF
B047D501.WMF
NOTE: For claritys sake, the following description will refer to the papers edges
as edge [A] (furthest edge from the operator) and edge [B] (closest to the
operator).
Original Positioning
In the B048 copier, edge [A] of the original is placed onto the original table. This
activates the original entrance sensor [C].
The main motor turns the original entrance rollers [D]. The quenching lamp,
development bias and PTL also turn on.
For proper feeding (especially for a thin original), the original entrance rollers rotate
backwards (feeding towards the operator) for 300 ms. This ensures that the original
is gripped firmly by both of the original entrance rollers [D], feeding it evenly.
SM
2-1
B047/B048
EXPOSURE
[A]
4 seconds after the sensor is activated,
the original feed motor starts rotating.
[B]
This delay gives the user time to align
edge [A] against the original entrance
rollers [D]. This helps prevent skew.
The original is fed through the machine to
the scanning start position [E]. This
machine scans the original backwards, starting with edge [B] and scanning towards
edge [A]. The original is now ready to scan.
Scanning
The original is scanned, moving back towards the operator.
When edge [A] activates the original registration sensor [F], the roll paper feed
motor turns on. Copy paper begins to feed, and the registration clutch is activated.
When edge [B] reaches the original feed start position [E] (26 mm ahead of the
original registration sensor [F]), the original feed motor stops to wait for the copy
paper.
In the copy section, the registration clutch turns off once the copy papers leading
edge is 10 mm past the registration sensor [H]. The voltage is now applied to the
charge corona.
The original feed motor begins rotating towards the operator again at 60 mm/s, and
the original is delivered to the exposure glass. Light from the exposure lamp [M] is
reflected off the paper to the fiber optics array [L].
Once the originals edge [B] passes the original entrance sensor, the registration
clutch and roll paper feed motor turn on again. The paper feed resumes and the
copy paper is transported to the drum [I].
To measure the original length for cutting, the copiers CPU measures the time
from when the original registration sensor detects edge [A] until the original
entrance sensor detects edge [B].
The copy paper length is measured by counting the number of steps as the roll
paper feed motor (a stepper motor) turns. Just before the paper is cut, the feed
motor speed doubles. This creates a buckle at the trailing edge of the copy paper.
The feed motor then stops as the cutter unit cuts the paper. Copying, however,
continues. The buckle provides the necessary slack while cutting.
When making duplicate copies, the original feed motor pauses, then changes
directions again, and the original is fed back to the scanning position 200 mm/s.
Once previous paper exits out of the roll feeder, the roll paper feed starts as well,
and the process repeats.
After all copies are made, the original is delivered to the original table. If original
hold mode is enabled (SP16), the original will stop with edge [A] caught by the
original entrance rollers. The original can be fed out by pressing the ! key. If
original hold mode is not enabled, the original feeds out completely, and is not
caught.
B047/B048
2-2
SM
EXPOSURE
Start Key Enable
Detailed
Descriptions
When the start key enabled (SP34) is set, the start key acts as a starting trigger. In
this mode, when the original activates the original registration sensor, edge [B] is
delivered to the original registration sensor position. Everything pauses until the
user presses the start key. Original feed and paper feed then resume.
SM
2-3
B047/B048
DEVELOPMENT
2.4 DEVELOPMENT
2.4.4 TONER DENSITY CONTROL
The toner supply amount ratio is determined by the following conditions.
TS 0 ~ 50 sheets
Level
(~ 30 m)
51 ~ 100
sheets
(30 ~ 60 m)
101 ~ 150
sheets
(60 ~ 90 m)
201 ~ 250
151 ~ 200
251 sheets ~
sheets
sheets
(150 m ~)
(90 ~ 120 m) (120 ~ 150 m)
VTS < 4.00

4.00 VTS <
4.10
4.10 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS <
4.40
4.40 VTS
VTS < 3.50

3.50 VTS <
3.80
3.80 VTS <
4.10
4.10 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.35
4.35 VTS
VTS < 3.00

3.00 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS
VTS < 2.50

2.50 VTS <
3.00
3.00 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.25
4.25 VTS
VTS < 2.25

2.25 VTS <
2.70
2.70 VTS <
3.15
3.15 VTS <
3.60
3.60 VTS <
3.90
3.90 VTS
VTS < 2.00

2.00 VTS <
2.40
2.40 VTS <
2.80
2.80 VTS <
3.20
3.20 VTS <
3.60
3.60 VTS
VTS < 4.35

4.35 VTS <
4.38
4.38 VTS <
4.40
4.40 VTS <
4.42
4.42 VTS <
4.45
4.45 VTS
VTS < 4.30

4.30 VTS <
4.33
4.33 VTS <
4.36
4.36 VTS <
4.40
4.40 VTS <
4.43
4.43 VTS
VTS < 4.25

4.25 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS <
4.33
4.33 VTS <
4.36
4.36 VTS <
4.40
4.40 VTS
VTS < 3.75

3.75 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.10
4.10 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.38
4.38 VTS
VTS < 3.25

3.25 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS <
3.80
3.80 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.35
4.35 VTS
VTS < 2.75

2.75 VTS <
3.20
3.20 VTS <
3.60
3.60 VTS <
3.90
3.90 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS
VTS < 4.00

4.00 VTS <
4.10
4.10 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS <
4.40
4.40 VTS
VTS < 3.00

3.00 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.20
4.20 VTS <
4.30
4.30 VTS
VTS < 2.50

2.50 VTS <
3.00
3.00 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS <
4.00
4.00 VTS <
4.25
4.25 VTS
VTS < 2.25

2.25 VTS <
2.70
2.70 VTS <
3.15
3.15 VTS <
3.60
3.60 VTS <
3.90
3.90 VTS
VTS < 2.00

2.00 VTS <
2.40
2.40 VTS <
2.80
2.80 VTS <
3.20
3.20 VTS <
3.60
3.60 VTS
VTS < 1.80

1.80 VTS <
2.00
2.00 VTS <
2.50
2.50 VTS <
3.00
3.00 VTS <
3.50
3.50 VTS
0
1
2
N
3
4
5
0
1
2
L
3
4
5
0
1
2
H
3
4
5
TS Level (Toner Supply Ratio)

0: No supply
1: 7.5%
2: 7.5%
3: 7.5%
4: 15%
5: 100%
Toner density control table has been changed for B047/B048 copiers.
B047/B048
2-4
SM
DEVELOPMENT
Recovery from Toner End Condition
If the TS level does not reach 3, the CPU stops the machine and displays the toner
end condition. This prevents the operator from resetting the toner end condition by
simply opening and closing original feed unit.
SM
2-5
B047/B048
Detailed
Descriptions
main motor rotates the development unit for 60 seconds. During the first 30
seconds, toner is supplied at 100% of the supply amount until TS level reaches 3.
The main motor continues to rotate the development unit for another 30 seconds.
Then copies can be made.
CLEANING
2.6 CLEANING
2.6.2 USED TONER COLLECTION
[A]
[B]
B047D101.WMF
B047/B048 copiers have a used toner overflow sensor [A] and a used toner cover
switch [B].
When the used toner overflow sensor detects that the used toner tank is full, the
overflow indicator begins blinking on the operation panel. 30 more meters (A1/D
size: 50 copies, SP51) can be copied. After that, the used toner overflow indicator
stays ON, and the machine will not operate.
The used toner cover switch detects when the used toner cover is open. Door
open is displayed on the operation panel, and the start key is disabled.
B047/B048
2-6
SM
2.8 FUSING AND PAPER EXIT
Detailed
Descriptions
2.8.1 OVERVIEW
[A]
B047D102.WMF
Two thermofuses [A] (184C, 192C) keep the fusing unit from overheating.
Two thin-film thermistors measure the hot roller and pressure rollers temperature.
The hot roller is a thin-shell, Teflon coated roller. The thinner roller allows a muchshorter warm-up time. However, extra care should be taken while working around
the hot roller. It is very easy to damage.
Like the A163/A251/A252 copiers, if the fusing temperature is lower than 60C
when the main switch is turned on, the machine assumes that it has not been used
recently, and the main motor must rotate to generate the necessary triboelectric
charge on the toner and developer.
In the A163/A251/A252 copiers, the main motor begins rotating immediately.
However, the B047/B048 copiers have a thin shell hot roller and a contact
thermistor. When cold, the thermistor is hard and might damage the roller. The
machine waits until the hot roller temperature reaches 80C. At that temperature
the thermistor softens and the hot roller can rotate safely.
Except for the differences listed above, the B047/B048 copiers are identical to the
A251 and A252 copiers. Please refer to A163/A251/A252 copier service manual for
additional details.
SM
2-7
B047/B048
2.8.3 TEMPERATURE CONTROL

Hot Roller Temperature Control
Hot Roller Temp. (C)
198
Mode 8
Mode 7
190
Mode 6
Mode 5
180
Mode 4
Mode 3
170
Mode 2
Mode 1
160
150
142
~60 63 66 69 72 75 78 81 84 87 90 93 96 99 102 105 108 111 114 117 120~
Pressure Roller Temp. (C)
198
Mode 8
Operating Temperature
190
185
180
Lower Limit
110
115
Lower Limit
120
125
130
135
140
145
B047D001.WMF
The relationship between the hot roller and pressure roller temperatures has been
changed due to the thin-shell, Teflon coated roller.
B047/B048
2-8
SM
ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE DESTINATION)
In conjunction with the modification for the Energy Star compliance, field
technicians need to understand the new operation modes, and must be able to
configure the machine for the customers specific environment/requirements. This
section lists all the differences between the Energy Star compliant machines and
the previous models.
Mode
Non-Energy Star
Auto Off Mode
Not available
Energy Star
Starts timing once the last copy job is
complete. When the specified time has
passed, the copier turns off.
The time can be adjusted from 1 to 240
minutes.
Default: 30 minutes
Power Relay [!24]
V A A [24]
-B13
CN102
-A3
RA
B047D002.WMF
*15
*33
SM
Mode No.
Auto Shut-off Time
Setting
AOF
Function
Determines the auto shut-off time.
Data
1 30 240
Auto off enable.
0: Disable
1: Enable
2-9
B047/B048
Detailed
Descriptions
2.10 ENERGY STAR COMPLIANT MACHINES (ALL THE

DESTINATION)
INSTALLATION
3. INSTALLATION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
15C to 30C (50F to 86F)
2. Humidity Range:
20% to 80% RH
Less than 1,500 lux (do not expose to direct

sunlight).
4. Ventilation:
Room air should turn over at least 3 times per hour.
5. Ambient Dust:
Less than 0.10 mg/m3 (2.7 x 10-6 oz/yd3)
6. If the location is air-conditioned or heated, place the machine as follows:

a) Where it will not be subjected to sudden temperature changes from low to
high, or vice versa.
b) Where it will not be directly exposed to cool air from an air conditioner in
the summer.
c) Where it will not be directly exposed to heat.
7. Avoid exposure to corrosive gases.
8. Avoid installing anywhere higher than 2,000 m (6,500 ft) above sea level.
10. Avoid any area where the machine may be subjected to frequent, strong
vibration.
SM
3-1
B047/B048
Installation
3.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
3.1.2 MINIMUM SPACE REQUIREMENTS
Back 600 mm
Right
600 mm
Left
600 mm
Front 1,000 mm
B047I505.WMF
1. Front: 1,000 mm (39 in)

2. Back:
600 mm (24 in)
3. Right:
600 mm (24 in)
4. Left:
600 mm (24 in)
3.1.3 MACHINE LEVEL

2. Right to left:
Within 5 mm (0.2") of level
B047/B048
3-2
SM
3.1.4 POWER SOURCE

Important:
The machine must be installed in a building/facility equipped with a protective
device such as a circuit breaker, as the machine relies on such devices for
protection against over-current and short circuits.
120 V, 60 Hz
220 ~ 240 V, 50/60 Hz
10%
Installation
2. Permissible Voltage
Fluctuation:

NOTE: 1) Make sure the plug is firmly inserted in the outlet.
2) Avoid multi-wiring.
SM
3-3
B047/B048

3.2.1 COPIER
Accessory Check
- B048 copier Original Guides........................................................................ 6 pcs
Operating Instruction Holder.................................................... 1 pc
Operating Sheet ...................................................................... 1 pc
Caution Decal (-27 only) .......................................................... 1 pc
Operating Instructions (-17 only).............................................. 1 pc
Original Guide Wire ................................................................. 1 pc
- B047 copier Guide Wires............................................................................. 2 pcs
Copy Tray ................................................................................ 1 pc
Copy Guide.............................................................................. 1 pc
Operating Instruction Holder.................................................... 1 pc
Operating Sheet ...................................................................... 1 pc
Caution Decal (-27 only) .......................................................... 1 pc
Operating Instructions (-17 only).............................................. 1 pc
B047/B048
3-4
SM
Installation
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
B047I024.WMF
Preparation for the B047 copier on the roll feeder.

When B047 copier is placed on the roll feeder, first remove the lower front cover [A]
and the manual feed table [B] for installation.
1. Remove the lower front cover [A] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw),
bracket [D] (4 screws) (which is hung by the harness), and the manual feed
table [B].
2. Put back the bracket and reinforcement plate.
SM
3-5
B047/B048
- B047 model [E]

[B]
- B048 model [F]
[F]
[C]
B047I500.WMF
[F]
[B]
[A]
[E]
[F]
[A]
[D]
B048I502.WMF
NOTE: The installation procedures are not shipped with the copier, always bring
this manual with you.
!CAUTION
1. Unplug the power cord before performing the following procedures.
2. Before starting the installation, make sure the machine is level.
3. The copier is very heavy (85 kg, 187 lbs). To avoid serious injury, make
sure that you have a sufficient number of people to assist you. It takes
at least two people to lift the copier safely.
4. Please be careful not to get your hand caught under the copier as you
place the copier onto the table or roll feeder.
NOTE: Keep the shipping retainers after installing the machine. They will be
reused if the machine is moved to another location in the future.
1. For either the table or the roll feeder, lower the feet [A] (table: 2 feet, roll feeder:
4 feet) so that it does not move while the copier is being installed.
2. Place the copier [B] on the table [C] or roll feeder [D] (Place the copier feet [E]
into the table holes [F]).
!WARNING
The copier is not attached to the table. Pushing the copier too hard may
cause it to fall. While moving the copier, always push the table.
B047/B048
3-6
SM
[B]
[I]
[C]
[D]
[D]
[J]
[A]
[E]
[A]
[L]
[K]
[J]
B047I001.WMF
B047I103.WMF
[F]
[G]
[H]
B047I104.WMF
B047I105.WMF
3. Remove all the tape strips [A] as shown.

4. Open the original feed unit [B].
5. Remove the cushion [C] and close the original feed unit.
6. Release the lock levers [D] and open the paper path section [E].
7. Remove the right upper cover [F] (2 screws).
8. Remove the drum protection sheet [G] and remove the screw [H]. This applies
cleaning blade pressure to the drum.
NOTE: Be sure to remove the protective sheet before removing the pressure
screw. Otherwise, the cleaning blade will clamp the sheet to the drum,
and the drum may be damaged.
9. Open the fusing exit section [I]. Remove the two strips of shipping tape [J] and
the protection sheet [K].
10. Remove two strips of shipping tape [L]. Close the paper path section and fusing
exit section.
SM
3-7
B047/B048
Installation
[L]
[A]
[E]
[C]
[B]
B047I503.WMF
[D]
B047I504.WMF
11. Open the original feed unit [A], manual feed table [B], and toner supply cover
[C]. Remove the sheet [D] covering the developer entrance. Pour 1 kg of the
developer [E] into the development unit evenly across its width as shown.
NOTE: Close the paper path section before opening the toner supply cover. If
the paper path section is open, the toner supply cover could fall off.
B047/B048
3-8
SM
[A]
[D]
[B]
[E]
B435I508.WMF
NOTE: If the fusing temperature is lower than 60C when the main switch is
turned on, the main motor must rotate to generate a triboelectric
charge on the developer and toner. However, to prevent damage to
the hot roller, the main motor will wait until the hot rollers
temperature reaches 80C before rotating. This may take a few
minutes.
In this case, it is not necessary to use the SP mode to load the
developer. Skip steps 13 to 16. After the developer is loaded from the
development entrance, turn off the main switch to stop the main
motor. Pour in the second 1 kg of developer.
13. To begin main motor rotation, enter the SP INPUT/OUTPUT mode by pressing
the following keys on the operation panel:
Clear Mode key [A]
+ key [B]
+ key [B]
Clear/Stop key [C]
Clear/Stop key [C] again and hold for at least 3 seconds.
14. After 3 seconds, the wrench and toner end indicators will blink (SP
INPUT/OUTPUT mode).
15. Use the + and keys [D] to select 23, then press the RF Select key [E]. The
main motor will begin rotating.
16. Press the RF Select key to stop the main motor once the developer is loaded
from the development entrance. Pour in the second 1 kg of developer into the
development unit evenly across its width (Total: 2 kg). Press the Clear
SM
3-9
B047/B048
Installation
[C]
[A]
[D]
[E]
[C]
[B]
[F]
B435I508.WMF
17. To enter the SP mode, press the following keys on the operation panel:
Clear key [A]
+ key [B]
key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
Clear/Stop key [D] again and hold for at least 3 seconds.
18. After 3 seconds. The roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP
mode).
19. Using the + and keys, select 36. Enter 1 by pressing the following keys.
+ key
RF Select key [F]
This begins the developer initialization. Initialization takes about five
minutes, after which the copier will automatically return to the normal
operation mode.
B047/B048
3-10
SM
Installation
[A]
[B]
[C]
B047I507.WMF

1) Shake the cartridge 5 to 10 times and insert it into the toner hopper.
2) Peel off the green tape [B] from right to left to expose the clear tape and
toner supply holes.
3) Rotate the knob [C] of the cartridge clockwise until it stops.
SM
3-11
B047/B048
[B]
[A]
[C]
B047I506.WMF
[E]
[D]
B047I509.WMF
B048 copier only (step 21)

21. Install the original guides [A] and original guide wire [B].
B047 copier only (step 22 and 23)

22. Attach the guide wires [C] to the copy tray [D].
23. Install the copy tray [D] and copy guide [E].
Both copiers (step 24 and 25)

26. Install the optional roll feeder. (Refer to the Roll Feeder 1 and 2 Installation
procedures)
NOTE: While the roll feeder is optional for the B047, it is required for the B048.
You must install a roll feeder for the B048 to function properly.
B047/B048
3-12
SM
3.2.2 TABLE (B439)

Accessory Check
Top Plate ................................................................................ 1
Left Side Plate ........................................................................ 1
Right Side Plate ...................................................................... 1
Middle Plate ............................................................................ 1
Rear Cover ............................................................................. 1
Installation
Screws with Spring Washers M4x8 .....................................14
SM
3-13
B047/B048
[C]
[B]
[F]
[A]
[A]
B439I500.WMF
[E]
[C]
[D]
[B]
B439I551.WMF
1. Loosely install the top plate [A], left [B], and right side plate [C] (6 screws).
2. Turn the table up-side down. Be sure to rotate it as shown in the illustration.
3. Install the middle plate [D] and rear cover [E] (4 screws each).
4. Tighten all the screws until the spring washers [F] are completely flat.
5. Turn the table right-side up.
B047/B048
3-14
SM
3.2.3 COPY TRAY (B440)

Accessory Check
Check the accessories and their quantities against the following list:
Copy Tray Stay ........................................................................ 1
Copy Tray Support................................................................... 1
Copy Tray Guides.................................................................... 2
Copy Tray Sheets (with rubber pads) ...................................... 3
Rear Copy Trays...................................................................... 3
Copy Tray Stoppers................................................................. 2
Installation
Stepped Screws M4.............................................................. 2

Screws with Flat Washers M4x6........................................... 6
Tray Sheet Guides................................................................... 3
Rear Copy Tray Sheets (no rubber pads)................................ 3
NOTE: The copy tray is an option for the B048 copier. When the copy tray is
installed on the copier, the roll feeder (B435/B436) is required.
SM
3-15
B047/B048
[C]
[D]
[A]
[B]
B440I117.WMF
B440I118.WMF
[E]
[F]
[G]
[A]
[H]
B440I121.WMF
B440I119.WMF
1. Place the copy tray stay [A] under the copy tray as shown.
2. Adhere the copy tray sheets (the Mylar strips with rubber pads) [B] to the
tables middle plate [C]. Make sure the center copy tray sheets is positioned
between the screw holes [D] on the copy tray as shown. The left and right copy
tray sheets should be positioned over the screw holes.
3. Lift the copy tray stay and install the two stepped screws [E] to the left and right
side plates [F, G]. After the screws are in place, hook the copy tray stay [A] on
the screws. Then secure it to the left and right side plates (2 screws for each:
M4x6 with flat washers).
NOTE: Be careful when installing the copy tray stay. Do not scratch the
surface of the table.
4. Install the copy tray support [H] (2 screws: M4x6 with flat washers).
B047/B048
3-16
SM
[B]
[A]
05mm
105mm
02mm
B440I114.WMF
B440I113.WMF
[C]
[C]
B440I116.WMF
02mm
B440I115.WMF
5. Remove the rear cover [A] (2 screws).

6. Attach the rear copy tray sheets [B] and the tray sheet guides [C] to the rear
cover as shown.
7. Install the rear cover (2 screws).
SM
3-17
B047/B048
Installation
105mm
[A]
[B]
B440I120.WMF
6010mm 6010mm
8010mm
[C]
[D]
B440I123.WMF
8. Hook the rear copy trays [A] onto the copy tray stay [B].
9. Attach the copy tray stoppers [C] onto the bottom of the middle plate [D].
B047/B048
3-18
SM
3.2.4 ROLL FEEDER1 AND 2 (B435/B436)

Accessory Check
Harness Covers ....................................................................... 2 pcs
Ground Plates.......................................................................... 2 pcs
Roll Feeder Drive Board .......................................................... 1 pc
Left Joint Bracket ..................................................................... 1 pc
Right Joint Bracket................................................................... 1 pc
Installation
Screws M4x8 (Blue).............................................................. 4 pcs

Screws M4x8 (Silver)............................................................10 pcs
Screws with Flat Washers M4x10......................................... 2 pcs
Screw with a Spring Washer M4x8 ....................................... 1 pc
Screws with Flat Washers M3x6........................................... 2 pcs
Left Joint Cover........................................................................ 1 pc
Right Joint Cover ..................................................................... 1 pc
Harness Clamp ........................................................................ 2 pcs
Paper Holder
1 Roll ................................................................................... 2 pcs
2 Roll ................................................................................... 4 pcs
Guide Plate.............................................................................. 1 pc
Front Joint Cover ..................................................................... 1 pc
Cutter Blade Caution Decal (-27 only) ..................................... 1 pc
Joint Harness........................................................................... 1 pc
SM
3-19
B047/B048
[D]
[A]
[B]
[C]
B047I024.WMF
Preparation for the B047 copier on the roll feeder.

When B047 copier is placed on the roll feeder, first remove the lower front cover [A]
and the manual feed table [B] for installation.
1. Remove the lower front cover [A] (2 screws), reinforcement plate [C] (1 screw),
bracket [D] (4 screws) (which is hung by the harness), and the manual feed
table [B].
2. Put back the bracket and reinforcement plate.
B047/B048
3-20
SM
[C]
[E]
Installation
[D]
[E]
[B]
[A]
B436I102.WMF
!CAUTION
1. Unplug the main machines power cord before starting the following
procedure.
2. Before starting the installation, make sure the machine is level.
3. The copier is very heavy (85 kg, 187 lbs). To avoid serious injury, make
sure that you have a sufficient number of people to assist you. It takes
at least two people to lift the copier safely.
4. Please be careful not to get your hand caught under the copier as you
place the copier onto the roll feeder.
1. Lower the feet [A] (4 feet) so that the roll feeder [B] does not move while the
copier [C] is being installed.
!CAUTION
Do not open the paper tray until the copier is placed on top of the roll
feeder. The paper tray drawer is very heavy. Without the copier weight to
hold it down, the roll feeder will fall over. The tray is shipped with a safety
latch holding the drawer shut.
2. Place the copier on the roll feeder. Fit the copier feet [D] into the roll feeder
holes [E].
!WARNING
The copier is not attached to the roll feeder. Pushing the copier too hard
may cause it to fall. While moving the copier, always push the roll feeder.
SM
3-21
B047/B048
[B]
[A]
[C]
[B]
B435I507.WMF
[F]
[A]
[E]
[D]
B435I506.WMF
3. Release the lock lever [A] and open the copier paper path section [B].
4. Remove the copiers left lower cover [C] (2 screws), lower right front cover [D]
(2 screws), lower right middle cover [E], and toner collection bottle [F] (1
connector).
B047/B048
3-22
SM
[A]
[B]
B435I105.WMF
B435I101.WMF
[C]
B435I104.WMF
[D]
B435I127.WMF
5. Pull out the paper tray [A] and install the left [B] and right [C] joint brackets (2
screws each: blue).
6. Remove the paper tray stopper [D] (1 screw).
NOTE: After the copier has been placed on the roll feeder, the paper tray can
be pulled out and the paper tray stopper can be removed.
7. If necessary, adhere the appropriate language cutter blade caution decal [E]
over the English decal on the paper tray as shown.
SM
3-23
B047/B048
Installation
[E]
[B]
[B]
B435I106.WMF
[A]
[F]
[C]
B435I122.WMF
[D]
[G]
B435I124.WMF
[E]
B435I108.WMF
[H]
[I]
[D]
B435I110.WMF
8. Remove the roll feeders rear cover [A] (6 screws).

9. Remove the copiers rear cover [B] (2 screws).
10. Remove the small caps [C] from the copiers rear cover using cutting pliers.
11. Install the roll feeder drive board [D].
12. Connect the following harness connectors as shown.
DC harness [E] Roll Feeder Drive board
Joint harness [F] Roll Feeder Drive board
B047/B048
3-24
SM
Joint harness [G] Copier Main Control board (3 clamps)

AC harness [H] AC Drive board [I]
[B]
[A]
Installation
[C]
[A]
B435I107.WMF
[C]
B435I109.WMF
B435I125.WMF
13. Install the grounding plates [A] (1 screw for each: M4x8).
14. Secure the grounding wire [B] (1 screw: M4x8 with a spring washer) to the
copier.
NOTE: To ensure proper grounding, tighten the ground wires screws until the
spring washer is completely flat.
15. Install the harness covers [C] (1 screw for each: M4x10 with flat washers).
NOTE: Fold the harness covers around the harness, then attach with a single
screw.
16. Reinstall the rear cover of the roll feeder (6 screws).
17. Clamp the power cord to the rear cover of the roll feeder (2 screws: M4x8).
18. Put back the copiers rear cover.
SM
3-25
B047/B048
[A]
[B]
[C, D]
19. Hook the guide plate [A] on the copier and then secure it (2screws: M4x8).
20. Install the front joint cover [B] (2 screws: M3x6 with flat washers).
21. Reassemble the copier.
22. Install the left and right joint covers [C, D] (2 screws for each: M4x8 each).
B047/B048
3-26
SM
[A]
[G]
[E]
[C]
[B]
Length
Temperature
NORMAL
[F]
B435I508.WMF
PRG.
NO.
42
300
XX
1100
XX
PRG.
NO.
45
24. To enter the SP mode, press the following keys on the operation panel:
Clear Modes key [A]
+ key [B]
key [C]
Clear/Stop key [D]
Clear/Stop key [D] again and hold it for at least 3 seconds.
25. After 3 seconds, the roll paper end and call service indicators will blink (SP
mode).
26. Select 40 using the + and - keys. Enter 1 (B435: 1 roll) or 2 (B436: 2 rolls)
by pressing the following keys.
+ key
RF Select key [F].
27. To set the paper cut length adjustments, input values into SP modes 42 and 45
as listed on the decal attached to the right side plate.
NOTE: 1) When the values for SP modes 42 and 45 are set, the paper cut
length adjustment values for vellum and film are automatically
entered (SP modes 43, 44, 46 and 47).
2) In the case of the 2 roll feeder, you must enter values for both the
1st and 2nd roll. The value for the 1st roll can only be entered when
the corresponding indicator [G] is blinking (same for 2nd roll). Use
the Function Select Key to switch between the two rolls.
SM
3-27
B047/B048
Installation
[D]
3.2.5 ROLL CUTTING RAIL (B437)

The installation is identical to that of the A163 copiers roll cutting rail (A570).
Please refer to the A163 service manual for details. The roll cutting rail and the roll
feeder cannot both be installed on the same machine at the same time.
B047/B048
3-28
SM
SERVICE TABLES
SERVICE TOOLS
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.3 SERVICE TOOLS
4.3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Service Program Mode Table
1. A * before the mode number means that the mode can be accessed by
customers or sales representative.
Mode No.
Fusing
Temperature 1
(Normal)
Function
Selects the fusing temperature for
plain paper.
Fusing
Temperature 2
(High)

translucent paper.
Fusing
Temperature 3
(Low)

translucent film.
Copy Count
Up/Down
Beeper On/Off
Select weather the user display panel

counts up or down.
Turns the beeper on and off.
Paper Feed Out

Waiting Time
Setting
Sets the copy time-out. Begins timing

when a sheet of copy paper has been
manually fed, or if the Roll Feed Select
key is pressed. If a copy is not made
within the specified time limit, the copy
paper is ejected.
Sets the manual feed delay. The timer
begins when the entrance sensor
detects the papers leading edge.
Once the specified time has passed,
the registration rollers start rotating.
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
*6
Manual Feed Start

Time Setting
*7
SM
4-1
Data
0: Mode 1
1: Mode 2
2: Mode 3
3: Mode 4
4: Mode 5
5: Mode 6
6: Mode 7
0: Mode 5
1: Mode 6
2: Mode 7
3: Mode 8
0: Mode 2
1: Mode 3
2: Mode 4
3: Mode 5
0: Up
1: Down
0: On
1: Off
2: Turn the beeper off
when holding the button
down to rapidly change
the edge margin or
paper length.
0: 2 minutes
1: 1 minute
2: 3 minutes
3: 4 minutes
4: 5 minutes
0: 2 seconds
1: 0.7 second
2: 1 second
3: 3 seconds
4: 4 seconds
5: 5 seconds
B047/B048
Service
Tables
2. In the data column, the default value is printed in bold letters.

The default settings for several items depend on the machine destination (refer
to page 4-28.).
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Leading Edge
Increase/Decrease
Speed Setting
*8
Auto Reset Time

Setting
*9
*10
Auto Energy Saver

Mode
Screen Message
Setting
Function
This sets the speed at which the
leading edge setting increases or
decreases.
When the customer holds down the +
or key, there is a brief pause. After a
selected number of 0.25 second
intervals (See SP 12), the values begin
to change at the selected speed.
Sets the delay for the auto reset. After
finishing a copy job, the machine will
wait the specified amount of time. If no
other jobs are begun, it will then
automatically reset the copy settings to
its default values.
Enables and disables the auto energy
saver mode. If enabled, the machine
will automatically go into energy saver
mode after it auto resets.
Selects one of the options indicated on
the display in the energy saver mode.
*11
*12
*13
Leading Edge
Increase/Decrease
Adjustment
Preliminary Interval
When the user hold downs the + or

key to change the leading edge
margin, print number or paper length,
there is a pause before the values
begin to change rapidly.
This paused is measured in 0.25
second intervals.
Original Feed Out

Waiting Time
Setting
Sets the original time-out. The timer

begins when an original is placed on
the original table in manual feed mode
(B048 copiers only). After the selected
time, the original is automatically
ejected.
Sets the delay between when the
original entrance sensor or original
rear sensor is actuated, and when the
original feed roller begins rotating
(B048 copier only).
Original Feed Start

Time Setting
*14
*15
Auto Shut-off Time

Setting
Original Hold Mode
*16
B047/B048
Determines the auto shut-off time.

After original scanning is finished, the
original exit roller stops before
completely feeding out the original.
This prevents the original from falling
onto the floor after scanning.
The original is fed out when the !
key is pressed or when the next
original is inserted into the rear feed.
(B048 copier only).
4-2
Data
Changes every:
0: 0.1 second
1: 0.50 second
2: 0.25 second
3: 0.05 second
4: 0.02 second
0: 2 minutes
1: 1 minutes
2: 3 minutes
3: 4 minutes
4: 5 minutes
5: No auto reset
0: No
1: Auto Energy Saver
Mode
0: None
1: Pre-HEAt
2: Hello i lovE yoU
3: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4: SLEEPinG
5: HavE A Good dAy.
0: 3 intervals
1: 1 intervals
2: 2 intervals
3: 10 intervals
0: 2 minutes
1: 1 minute
2: 3 minutes
3: 4 minutes
4: 5 minutes
5: No auto feed out
0: 1 second
1: 2 seconds
2: 3 seconds
3: 4 seconds
4: 5 seconds
5: 6 seconds
6: 7 seconds
1 30 240
0: No
1: Original Hold mode
SM
SERVICE TOOLS
Semi-synchro Cut
Original Scanning
Mode
*18
Synchro-cut Length
Adjustment
*19
*20
Paper Length
Count Up/Down
Setting
Paper Length
Up/Down Speed
Setting
*21
*22
*23
to
*32
*33
*34
Fixed Paper Size

Pattern Setting
Optional Paper
Size Setting
AOF
Start Key Enable
All Indicators ON
35
SM
Function
Adjusts the speed of the original feed
motor (B048 copier only).
The setting can be changed by the key
operation.
Sets the cutting method for semisynchro cut mode (B047 copiers only).
When using the default method, the
user must manually press the roll
paper cut key as the trailing edge of
the original passes the tables edge.
When using the alternate method, the
user feeds the original once, and the
original length is measured. The user
then feeds the original a second time,
and it is scanned and copied. The copy
is automatically cut to the appropriate
length.
Adjusts the cut length in the semisynchro cut mode (B047 copier).
Adjusts the cut length in the synchro
cut, preset cut, and variable cut modes
(B048 copier). The setting can be
changed by a key operation.
Determines weather the paper length
cycles down (to smaller sizes) or up (to
larger sizes) when the preset cut key is
pressed.
This sets the speed at which the paper
length setting increases or decreases.
When the customer holds down the +
or key, there is a brief pause. After a
selected number of 0.25 second
intervals (See SP12), the values begin
to change at the selected speed.
Selects the fixed paper size pattern
chosen when the Preset Cut key is
pressed.
Up to 10 different paper size can be
stored in SPs 23 to 32. If 19 is
selected in SP No. 22, these values
are used when the Preset Cut key is
pressed.
Auto off enable.
Select whether the start key can be
used as a start trigger.
Turns ON all indicators on the
operation panel when the Roll Feed
Select key is pressed.
4-3
Data
1.0 0.0 1.0
Shorter
Longer
0: Pressing the roll

paper cut key
1: Inserting the original
again
25 0 25
Shorter
Longer
1 mm/step
Service
Tables
*17
Mode No.
Length Size
Magnification
0: Down
1: Up
0: 0.10 second
1: 0.5 second
2: 0.25 second
3: 0.05 second
4: 0.02 second
5: 0.01 second
Refer to page 4-24.
UdEF: Undefined
0: Disable
1: Enable
0: Disable
1: Enable
0: No
1: All indicators on
B047/B048
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
New Developer
Initialization
36
Darker Image
Density
Function
Carries out the new developer
initialization for 5 minutes. The
machine counts down the remaining
time on the display. After the
initialization, the machine automatically
adjusts the toner sensor output to 4.0
0.1 V. During the toner sensor
adjustment, Adj is displayed. When
the adjustment is completed, the
machine automatically returns to
normal operating mode.
Sets the range of the ID density control
to give finer control over darker
images. Default level 3 shifts to new ID
level 7 (see the chart for the new
levels). ID level 8 to 14 cannot be
shifted.
ID level
Default ID level
Light Sensor Output
Development Bias
39
Release Fusing
Unit Service Call
Not Used
Roll Feeder
Identification
40
41
0: Standard Density
1: Darker Image Density
The light sensor output and

development bias will change as
follows:
*37
38
Data
If the initialization is
canceled before returning
to the normal operating
mode, do it again from the
beginning. If the machine
fails to adjust the toner
sensor output, E = 11 is
displayed.
Roll Feeder Speed

Setting
(Factory Use)
B047/B048
7
3
0.9
160
6
2.5
0.9
140
5
2
0.88
120
4
1.5
0.84
120
3
1
0.8
120
0.8
80
0.8
60
Recovers from the fusing unit SC

condition. After it has been recovered,
the machine returns to its initial (power
on) condition.
0: Release SC
1: SC condition
Sets up the installed roll feeder.
0: No
1: Roll Feeder Installed
(1 roll)
2: Roll Feeder Installed
(2 rolls)
When this value is changed, the

settings in SP42 and SP45 are set to
0. These SPs then update the SPs
linked to them. SP42 updates SP43
and SP44. SP45 updates SP46 and
SP47. Each SP mode setting (SP43,
44, 45, and 47) can be changed
independently in the appropriate SP
mode.
Adjusts the roll papers feed speed.
4-4
0: Standard
50 0 50
Faster
Slower
SM
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Roll Feeder Cutting
Length Adjustment
(300 mm, Plain
Paper)
Function
Adjusts the cutting length of 300 mm in
the plain paper mode.
Data
0: Standard
9.9 0 9.9 mm
Longer
Shorter
When this value is changed, the values

for SP43 and SP44 are automatically
changed according to the following
table:
Inch versions
SP42 X
SP43 X
SP44 X + 0.5
Meter versions
SP42 X
SP43 X 0.4
SP44 X + 0.5
42
If the settings in SP43 or SP44 exceed
the maximum and/or minimum values,
the maximum or minimum values are
used instead.
43
44
SM
Roll Feeder Cutting

Length Adjustment
(300 mm,
translucent Film)
Service
Tables
Roll Feeder Cutting

Length Adjustment
(300 mm,
Translucent Paper)
Note:
The value for the 1st roll feed can only
be input when the corresponding
indicator is blinking (same for 2nd roll
feed). Use the Function Select Key to
switch between the two indicators.
To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm
in the translucent paper mode.
Note:
To adjust the cutting length of 300 mm
in the translucent film mode.
Note:
4-5
B047/B048
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Roll Feeder Cutting
Length Adjustment
(1,100 mm, Plain
Paper)
Function
Adjusts the cutting length of 1,100 mm
in the plain paper mode.
Data
0: Standard
50 0 50 mm
Longer
Shorter
When this value is changed, the values

for SP46 and SP47 are automatically
changed according to the following
table:
Inch versions
SP45 X
SP46 X 1.0
SP47 X + 0.8
Meter versions
SP45 X
SP46 X 2.4
SP47 X + 0.8
45
If the settings in SP46 or SP47 exceed
the maximum and/or minimum values,
the maximum or minimum values are
used instead.
46
47
48
Roll Feeder Cutting

Length Adjustment
(1,100 mm,
Translucent Paper)
Roll Feeder Cutting

Length Adjustment
(1,100 mm,
Translucent Film)
Semi-synchro-cut
Length Adjustment
Main Motor Speed
Adjustment
Note:
To adjust the cutting length of 1,100
mm in the translucent paper mode.
Note:
To adjust the cutting length of 1,100
mm in the translucent film mode.
Note:
Adjusts the cut length in the semisynchro cut mode (B047 copier only).
Changes the main motor speed.
49
B047/B048
4-6
10 0 10
Shorter
Longer
0.1 %/step
0: Standard
9 0 11
Slower
Faster
When making long
copies, if the main motor
speed is incorrect, rJ98 or
rJ99 error messages will
be displayed. Use this SP
to make the necessary
adjustments.
SM
SERVICE TOOLS
Toner Overflow
Detection Setting
51
Used Toner
Counter
52
Used Toner
Counter Clear
Function
Determines the maximum number of
copies (when A1 paper is used) that
can be made after the toner near end
condition has been detected.
Determines the maximum copy length
that can be made after the toner near
overflow condition has been detected.
Indicates the maximum copy length

that can be made before the used
toner near overflow condition is
triggered
This counter is automatically cleared
when the toner overflow condition is
cleared after emptying the used toner
in the bottle.
Manually clear the used toner counter.
53
Developer
Warm-up Setting
54
Paper Length Limit

Setting
55
SM
Sets the developer agitation time.

If the fusing temperature is lower than
60C when the main switch is turned
on, the main motor rotates for the set
amount of time, generating a
triboelectric charge on the developer
and toner.
Determines the maximum paper
length.
Note:
If paper longer than 2,000 mm is used,
you may experience skewed or
creased copies, poor fusing, or
damage to the original.
Data
0: 27 sheets
1: 9 sheets
2: 18 sheets
3: 36 sheets
0: 30 m
1: 6 m
2: 53 m
3: 77 m
4: 100 m
5: 142 m
tF=XX,XXX (Beeper)
0: Full toner condition

is not detected
1: Full toner condition
is detected.
To clear the counter, input
0 even if 0 is already
indicated.
0: 50 seconds
1: 2 minute
2: 3 minute
3: None
(In mm mode)
0: 3,000 mm
1: 3,600 mm
2: 5,200 mm
3: 6,800 mm
4: 8,400 mm
5: 9,999 mm
(In inch mode)
0: 118.0 inch
1: 160.0 inch
2: 240.0 inch
3: 320.0 inch
4: 400.0 inch
5: 480.0 inch
4-7
B047/B048
Service
Tables
50
Mode No.
Toner End
Detection Setting
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Copy Number Limit
Setting
Function
Determines the maximum number of
copies. The default settings for the
B047 and B048 copiers are different.
Emergency Stop
Key Function
Setting
Determines how the emergency stop

key functions.
56
Data
0: 99 sheets (B047)
1: 10 sheets (B048)
2: 20 sheets
3: 30 sheets
4: 40 sheets
5: 50 sheets
6: 60 sheets
7: 70 sheets
8: 80 sheets
9: 90 sheets
0: Only original drive
1: Original, main motor,
roll feed drives.
When set to 0, the emergency stop key

only stops the original drive.
When set to 1, it stops the original
drive, main motor drive, and roll feed
drive (B048 copier only).
57
58
59
Repeat Copy
Length Limit Setting
Misfeed Special
Recovery Mode
Fixed Paper Length
Special Mode
60
B047/B048
When a roll runs out of paper, if a layer

of white paper remains wrapped
around the core, the machine might
not detect the paper end condition.
This can cause a noise or a Wrong
Paper Feed error. If this SP is set to 1,
you can use the emergency stop key
to recover from this error.
Determines the maximum copy length
for multiple copies (B048 copier only).
While the Emergency Stop key is held
down, power is still supplied to the
main motor and registration clutch.
Adjusts the size of the selected preset
paper size.
Each time the +/ keys are pressed
while holding down the Preset Cut key,
the preset paper size is adjusted by
the amount selected in SP 61.
4-8
0: 1,200 mm/48 inch

1: The maximum paper
length determined by
SP55.
0: No
1: Misfeed Special
Recovery Mode
0: Normal
1: Fixed Paper Length
Special Mode
SM
SERVICE TOOLS
Function
Selects the interval of each step for
SP60.
61
Special Toner
Supply Mode
62
63
Not Used
SP Mode Display
Speed Setting
In the energy saver mode, 10% toner

supply is done while the Emergency
Stop key is pressed. Toner sensor
voltage is displayed on the Paper
Length indicator. If the voltage is
lower than 1 V, toner is not supplied.
Sets the display speed.
64
ROM Version
Display
Indicates the ROM version.
Data
(In mm mode)
0: 100 mm
1: 50 mm
2: 60 mm
3: 120 mm
4: 200 mm
5: 240 mm
6: 250 mm
7: 500 mm
8: 600 mm
(In inch mode)
0: 10.0 inch
1: 5.0 inch
2: 6.0 inch
3: 12.0 inch
4: 20.0 inch
5: 24.0 inch
6: 25.0 inch
7: 50.0 inch
8: 60.0 inch
0: No
1: Special Toner Supply
Mode
0: 300 ms/letter
1: 100 ms/letter
2: 200 ms/letter
3: 400 ms/letter
4: 500 ms/letter
Example:
vEr_1994_06_06_01
Year
Date
Month
65
Suffix
0: No, 1: A, 2: B,
3: C 9: J
RAM Abnormal
Condition Check
The value is set based on the RAM

check. Shows the condition of the
back-up RAM.
67
Machine Operation
Counter
Displays the total time (hours) that the

machine has been in operation (total
time the motor has been rotating).
68
Not Used
66
SM
4-9
Internal Use Only

The condition of the RAM
is checked when the
machine is powered on.
0: Normal
1: Abnormal
dc = X,XXX
B047/B048
Service
Tables
Mode No.
Fixed Paper Length
Special Mode
SERVICE TOOLS
69
70
to
75
Mode No.
Total Copy Length/
Number Display
(Feet)
Total Copy
Length/Number
Display
OPC Counter
Function
Displays the total copy length in feet.
Data
SP69: t6 =XXX,XXX
Displays the total copy length/number

according to the following units.
SP70 = Yard
SP71 = meter
SP72 = 100 inches
SP73 = 50 inches
SP74 = A1 length (594 mm)
SP75 = sheet (any size)
Displays the total length of copies (in
meters) on the current OPC drum.
SP70: t0 = XXX,XXX
SP71: t1 = XXX,XXX
SP72: t2 = XXX,XXX
SP73: t3 = XXX,XXX
SP74: t4 = XXX,XXX
SP75: t5 = XXX,XXX
76
Developer Counter
Display

meters) on the current developer.
Toner Counter
Display

meters) on the current toner cartridge
Toner Supply Level

Indication
Indicates the present toner sensor

level.
Developer
Initialization
Number Counter
Displays the total number of times the

developer has been initialized (SP36).
Also displays the value of the
developer counter (SP77) when the
last developer initialization was
performed.
Toner End Number

Counter
Displays the total number of toner end

conditions (dtE). Also, displays the
toner counter (SP78) at the last toner
end condition (Hdt).
Displays the total number of toner near
end conditions (dtn). Also, displays the
toner counter (SP78) when the last
toner end condition was triggered
(Hdt).
77
78
79
80
81
Toner Near End

Counter
82
B047/B048
4-10
dO = XX,XXX
This counter should be
cleared when the OPC
drum is replaced.
(SP#-1)
dE = XX,XXX
This counter is
when new developer is
initialized.
dT = XX,XXX
This counter is
when a new toner
cartridge is installed.
dL = ab - - c
a: Toner density setting
n, H, L
b: TS level
0~5
c: Copy number step
0: ~ 30 m
1: ~ 60 m
3: ~ 90 m
4: ~ 120 m
5: ~ 150 m
6: 150 m ~
dnF = XX (total number
of developer
initializations)
Hde = XX,XXX
(developer
counter at the
last developer
initialization
dtE = XX
Hdt = XX,XXX
dtn = XX
Hdt = XX,XXX
SM
83
84
Mode No.
Roll Feed Speed
Adjustment
(translucent paper)
Roll Feed Speed
Adjustment (film)
Number of
Misfeeds by
Location
Function
Adjust the roll feed speed for
translucent paper.
Data
50.0 0 50.0
10 steps = 0.09%
Adjust the roll feed speed for film.
Misfeed Record
Display
Displays the locations of the last five

misfeeds. Locations are displayed one
at a time.
Preset Cut
Adjustment (3,000
mm, plain paper)
Preset Cut
Adjustment (3,000
mm, translucent
paper)
Preset Cut
Adjustment (3,000
mm, film)
Number of Service
Call by Location
Adjust the cutting length of 3,000 mm.
50.0 0 50.0
10 steps = 0.09%
Jt = X,XXX (Total Jam)
J1 J8 (initial jam)
J10 J45 (original jam)
J51 J72 (copy paper
jam)
J80 J99 (roll feeder
paper jam)
J1 = XX (Last jam)
J2 = XX (1 before the
last jam)
last jam)
last jam)
last jam)
Beeper
(XX = Jam Location)
20 0 20
1 step = 1 mm
Displays the total number of jams by

location.
85
86
87
88
89
90
Service Call
Records
20 0 20
1 step = 1 mm
20 0 20
1 step = 1 mm
Displays the total number of service

calls (SC) and lists the SCs by
location.
Displays the last five service calls. SCs
are displayed one at a time.
Et = X,XXX (total SCs)

E1 E15 (each SC)
91
92
to
99
SM
E1 = XX (The last SC
Xcode)
last SC code)
last SC code
last SC code
last SC code
Beeper (XX = SC code)
Not Used
4-11
B047/B048
Service
Tables
SERVICE TOOLS
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
RAM Clear
Function
Clears selected data items from the
RAM.
To clear the memory, input the number
of the item you want to delete, then
press the " key.
Note:
If all the memory is cleared (if a
number from 20 to 28 is selected), you
must reenter the roll cutter settings
from the decal attached inside the
upper right cover.
-1
Data
0: Not Used
1: Machine Operation
(The memory for
SP67)
2: Copy Length Counter
(SP69 to 75)
3: OPC Counter (SP76)
4: Developer Counter
(*Note1)
(SP77)
/
Developer Initialization
Number (SP80)
5: Toner Counter (SP78)/
Toner End Number
(SP81)/Toner Near
End Number (SP82)
(*Note2)
density step.
7: Clear data No.1 to 9
and 53.
8: SC Counter
(SP90 to 91)
9: Jam Counter
(SP85 to 86)
10: Change the settings to
the Japan version
the U.S.A. version
the Europe version
the Asia version
the NRG version
other version 1
other version 2
other version 3
18: Not Used
19: Not Used
20: Clear all the memory
and change the
settings to the
Japanese version
*Note1:
This counter is not used for the toner density step control (described on page 2-16 in the A163
manual).
*Note2:
For the toner density step control, this counter counts down from 150 (m) to 0 (m) after the
developer initialization. When the developer initialization is done, this counter is set to 150 and after
150 m of copies, the counter stays at 0. If this counter is cleared, the counter is set to 0.
B047/B048
4-12
SM
Mode No.
RAM Clear
Function
Clears selected data items from the
RAM.
To clear the memory, input the number
of the item you want to delete, then
press the " key.
Note:
If all the memory is cleared (if a
number from 20 to 28 is selected), you
must reenter the roll cutter settings
from the decal attached inside the
upper right cover.
-1
Total Counter Unit

Setting
Selects the unit which the total counter

counts by.
Inch/mm Exchange
Selects the unit in which the edge

margin and paper length is indicated
by.
-2
-3
-4
-5
Not Used
Registration
Adjustment
Light Sensor
Adjustment
-6
Adjusts the paper registration for the

by-pass feed. When this setting is
changed, the same setting will be set
for SP#-45 (Roll Feeder Registration).
Change the settings for the light
sensor.
While in this mode, the exposure lamp
can be turned ON and OFF using the
Copy Media key.
Data
and change the
settings to the U.S.A.
version
and change the
settings to the Europe
version
and change the
settings to the Asia
version
and change the
settings to the NRG
version
and change the
settings to other
Other 1 version
and change the
settings to other
Other 2 version
and change the
settings to other
Other 3 version
28: Not Used
29: Not Used
0: 1 yard
1: 1 m
2: 100 inches
3: 50 inches
4: A1 length (594 mm)
5: Sheet (Any size)
6: 1 foot
0: mm
1: Inch
0: Standard
9.9 0 9.9 mm
Advance
Delay
50: Standard
0 50 99
Darker
Lighter
Translucent paper: ON
Translucent Film: OFF
SM
4-13
B047/B048
Service
Tables
SERVICE TOOLS
SERVICE TOOLS
-7
-8
Mode No.
Hot Roller
Temperature
Adjustment
Pressure Roller
Temperature
Adjustment
Hot Roller/
Pressure Roller
Temperature
Display
Function
Change the hot roller temperature
setting.
Drum Charge
Setting
Determines the drum charge voltage.

In this mode, the charge corona can be
turned on and off using the Copy
Media key.
Determines the copy grid voltage.
In this mode, the grid voltage can be
Media key.
Change the pressure roller

temperature setting.
Displays the hot roller temperature and
pressure roller temperature.
Even after the SP mode is canceled,
the temperature will be displayed
during the copy cycle and in standby
mode
To stop this, turn the main switch off
and on.
-9
-10
Copy Grid Setting

-11
Transfer Corona
Voltage Setting
Determines the transfer corona
voltage.
In this mode, the transfer corona can
be turned on and off using the Copy
Media key.
Data
0: Standard
9 0 9C
Decrease Increase
0: Standard
9 0 9C
Decrease Increase
Fu = XXX
Pr = XXX
Fu: Hot roller
temperature
Pr: Pressure roller
temperature
If the hot roller
temperature is lower than
80C (pressure roller
temperature is lower than
50C), LLL is displayed.
If the hot roller
temperature is higher than
220C (pressure roller
temperature is higher than
180C), HHH is
displayed.
200: Standard
150 200 249
Low
High
9: Standard
0 13 15
Low
High
80: Standard
40 80 120
Low
High
-12
Transfer Voltage at
the Papers Trailing
Edge
-13
To facilitate setting SP modes, when

SP#-12 is entered, SP#-13 will be
automatically set to (SP#-12s value X
1.5)
Determines the transfer corona voltage
at the paper trailing edge.
In this mode, the transfer corona can
be turned on and off using the Copy
Media key.
120: Standard
40 120 249
Low
High
B047/B048
4-14
SM
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Separation AC
Voltage setting

1.12).
voltage at the papers leading edge.
In this mode, the separation corona
can be turned on and off using the
Copy Media key.
Determines the DC separation
coronas voltage.
Copy Media key.
190: Standard
130 190 220
Low
High
200: Standard
0 200 249
Low
High
-16
Separation DC
Voltage at the
Paper Leading
Edge

1.5)
Determines the DC separation
coronas voltage at the paper leading
edge.
Copy Media key.
200: Standard
0 200 249
Low
High
-18
to
-19
Not Used
Bias Voltage for the
Image Area
-20
Determines the development bias

voltage for the image area.
In this mode, the bias voltage can be
Media key.
3: Standard
038
Low
High
SM
4-15
B047/B048
Service
Tables
Separation AC
Voltage at the
Papers Leading
Edge
Separation DC
Voltage setting
-17
Data
170: Standard
130 170 220
Low
High
-14
-15
Function
voltage.
Copy Media key.
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Bias Voltage for
Non-image Area
Setting
-21
Toner Density
Setting
-24
Selects the toner density setting. The
toner density changes according to the
copy length after the developer is
replaced.
Copy Length
(A4 size)
~ 30m
(~ 50 sheets)
~ 60m
(~ 100 sheets)
~ 90m
(~ 150 sheets)
~ 120m
(~ 200 sheets)
~ 150m
(~ 250 sheets)
150m ~
(251 sheets ~)
-22
-23
Function
Determines the development bias
voltage for the non-image area.
In this mode, the bias voltage can be
Media key.
Std.
Low
4.00V 4.35V 4.00V

3.50V 4.30V 3.00V
3.00V 4.25V 2.50V
2.50V 3.75V 2.25V
2.25V 3.25V 2.00V
2.00V 2.75V 1.80V
Selects the length of time that the

machine adds toner after clearing the
toner end condition.
Original Feed Motor

Speed Adjustment
Adjusts the speed of the original feed

motor (B048 copier only).
Original Repeat
Skew Check Mode
Used to check skew when printing

multiple copies (B048 only).
When using this mode to make
multiple copies, only the first and last
copies are actually printed. The other
copies are just scanned. By comparing
the two copies, you can check for
skew.
B047/B048
0: Standard
1: Low
2: High
High
Toner Supply
Periods in Toner
End Condition
-27
Data
4: Standard
048
Low
High
0: 60 s
1: 70 s
2: 80 s
3: 90 s
50 0 50
Faster
Slower
0.030%/step
0: Off
1: On
Procedure
1. Select 1 in this mode.
2. Exit from SP mode.
3. Select the manual feed and enter
the copy quantity to 3 or more.
4. Place the sheet on the manual feed
table and place the original on the
original table.
5. After all the copies are made,
change SP#-27 to 0 or turn the main
switch off and on. (This mode will be
canceled.)
4-16
SM
SERVICE TOOLS
-28
Registration
Adjustment for the
Rear Feed
-29
Toner Density
Sensor Voltage
Setting
-30
-31
Toner Sensor
Voltage Display
(Last Copy)
Toner Sensor
Voltage Display
(Real Time)
Function
The fusing rollers speed is slightly
higher than the drum speed.
The speed of the copy paper transport
will increase slightly after the leading
edge of the copy paper enters the
fusing unit.
To compensate for this, the speed of
the original feed motor is corrected
from the leading edge to 183 mm
(B048 copier only).
Adjusts the paper registration for the
rear original feed (B048 only).
If the setting of SP#-74 is 1, this setting
is used for the paper registration for
the front original feed as well as the
rear original feed. In this case, this
adjustment is automatically set for the
SP#-5 adjustment.
Changes the toner density sensor
voltage. Normally, the value is
automatically adjusted when the new
developer initialization (SP36) is done.
In this mode, PTL, main motor, QL and
the bias voltage for non-image area
can be turned or and off using the
Copy Media key.
Displays the toner sensor output
voltage for the last copy.
Displays the real time toner sensor
output voltage.
In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL
and the bias voltage for non-image
areas can be turned on and off using
the Copy Media key.
When this SP mode is canceled, the
voltage will be continually displayed
during the copy cycle and in standby
mode (the toner sensor output voltage,
paper length and copy counter are
displayed one at a time).
and on.
-32
Data
100 10 100
Shorter
Longer
2.5%
+2.5%
0: Standard
9.9 0 9.9 mm
Advance
Delay
80: Standard
50 80 120
Low
High
Service
Tables
Mode No.
Length Size
Magnification
Compensation on
Leading Edge
A = X,XX
(Beeper)
A = X,XX
A = Toner Sensor Voltage
During the stand-by
condition, and copy
cycling the following data
is displayed.
A = X,XX
LE = X,XXX
CO = XX
(Beeper)
LE = Paper Length
(ex. 297 mm: LE=0.297
12 inch: LE=0.120)
CO = Copy counter
-33
to
-34
SM
Not Used
4-17
B047/B048
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Synchro-cut Length
Auto Adjustment
(297 mm)
-35
Function
Adjusts the original cut length in
Synchro Cut mode based on a 297
mm sheet (standard length). Insert the
297 mm length original five times (this
number displayed on the copy number
indicator can be changed : 1 to 10). If
the actual original length is different
from the standard length, input the
following value in the cut length
indicator before inserting the original:
Data
9.9 0 9.9
1 step = 0.1 mm
Synchro-cut Length
Auto Adjustment
(1,189 mm)
-36
Then the machine automatically

calculates the correct value, and the
value of SP#-38 is changed.
Adjusts the original cut length in
Synchro Cut mode at 1,189 mm.
Insert the 1,189 mm length original five
times (this number displayed on the
copy number indicator can be
changed: 1 to 10). If the actual original
length is different from the standard
length, input the following value in the
cut length indicator before inserting the
original:
50 0 50
1 step = 0.1 mm

Then the machine automatically
calculates the correction value. The
data is overwritten on SP#-39.
-37
-38
Not Used
Synchro-cut Length
Manual Adjustment
(297 mm)
-39
Synchro-cut Length
Manual Adjustment
(1,189 mm)
-40
to
-44
-45
-50
-51
Adjusts the synchro cut length for a

297 mm original. Increasing the
number will shorten the paper cut
length.
Adjusts the synchro cut length for a
1,189 mm original. Increasing the
number will shorten the paper cut
length.
9.9 0 9.9
1 step = 0.1 mm
(This value is over written
when SP#-35 is
performed.)
50.0 0 50
1 step = 0.1 mm
(This value is over written
when SP#-36 is
performed.)
Not Used
Roll Feeder
Registration
Forced Ready
Condition
(Factory Use)
Lamp Off Mode
B047/B048
Adjusts the paper registration from the

roll feederS. When SP#-5 (Registration
Adjustment) is carried out, this data will
be automatically set with that data.
Forces the machine into the Ready
condition regardless of the fusing
temperature. This mode cannot be
used during the start-up development
agitation.
Fluorescent lamp does not turn on
during the copy cycle.
4-18
0: Standard
9.9 0 9.9
Delay
Advance
0: Normal
1: Forced Ready
Condition
0: Normal
1: Lamp off
SM
SERVICE TOOLS
Free Run Mode
-53
-54
Not Used
Toner End
Recovery
-55
Used Toner Full

Condition Detection
-56
-57
Roll Feed Speed

Correction
(Plain Paper)
Roll Feed Speed
Correction
(Translucent Paper)
-58
-59
-60
SM
Roll Feed Speed

Correction
(Film)
Fluorescent Lamp
Abnormal Time
Check 1
Function
Ignores jam error signals, except for
initial jams. The setting automatically
resets to 0 when the main switch is
turned off.
The machine caries out copy operation
without an original. This mode can be
used if the optional roll feeder is
installed and selected paper length is
more than 594 mm.
The machine starts operation when the
roll feed select key is pressed, and
stops when the Emergency Stop key is
pressed.
Data
0: Normal
1: No Misfeed Detection
Sets the process for toner end

recovery. When set to the default
value, the toner density is checked as
described in the Toner Density Control
section 2.4.2.
Forced recovery skips this testing
procedure, and just clears the toner
end condition.
When the toner overflow counter is
used, this sets the maximum copy
length. Once the counter reaches this
value, the used toner full condition is
triggered.
Not used. Do not change this setting
0: Normal
1: Forced recovery
The fusing sections transport speed is

slightly faster than the roll feeders.
This is done to stretch the copy paper.
However, due to over-stretching,
creases may develop along the trailing
edge when the copy paper is longer
than 1,200 mm. To prevent this, the
roll feeders speed is increased slightly
every second once the paper feed
length exceeds 1,200 mm. The speed
is changed 5 times.
0 5 10
Slower Faster
5 in this SP can be used to set the final

roll feed speed equal to the fusing
sections. Do not change this value in
the field. It is for designer use only.
Not used. Do not change this setting.
Tracks the amount of time that the
exposure sensor is more than 1 V
higher than the target value.
4-19
0: Normal
1: Next Paper is fed
when the fusing exit
sensor is deactivated.
2 ~ 250:
Next paper is fed (X1) seconds after the
fusing exit sensor is
deactivated.
X = Input Number
0: Toner overflow
sensor
1: 840 m
2: 480 m
3: 1,180 m
0 5 10
Slower Faster
0 5 10
Slower Faster
0 ~ 250:
The total time
(seconds) that the lamp
voltage is more than 1
volt higher than the
target value.
B047/B048
Service
Tables
-52
Mode No.
No Misfeed
Detection Mode
SERVICE TOOLS
-61
Mode No.
Fluorescent Lamp
Abnormal Time
Check 2
Function
Tracks the amount of time that the
fluorescent lamp is at full power during
the copy cycle.
Light Sensor
Voltage Display
(Factory use)
Displays the real time light sensor

output voltage.
In this mode, the PTL, main motor, QL
and the bias voltage for non-image
areas can be turned on and off using
the Copy Media key.
Data
0 ~ 250:
The total time
(seconds) that the
fluorescent lamp is at
full power.
Fd = X,XX
Fd = Light Sensor Voltage
-62
Even if the SP mode is canceled, the

voltage is displayed while copying and
when in standby mode.
and on.
-63
-64
Factory Use Only

Manual Feed
Attention Mode 1
-65
Manual Feed
Attention Mode 2
-66
-67
Partial copy
Leading Edge
Margin
Toner Full Supply

Mode
Combine Originals
Mode
-68
-69
Not Used
Synchro-cut Rear
Feed Mode
-70
B047/B048
Beeper sounds if a sheet is set on the

manual feed table before the Set
Paper indicator comes on.
Beeper sounds when the manual table
is ready to accept the next sheet.
Allows the user to set a larger or
smaller leading edge margin in partial
copy mode.
B047 can only increase the margin,
while B048 can both increase and
decrease it.
In the Special Toner Supply mode
(SP62), if both the clear/stop key and
the Emergency Stop key are pressed,
toner is supplied at 100%.
Normally the copy process stops at the
trailing edge of paper or original which
ever comes first. If this mode is
selected, copy process continues to
the copys trailing edge even if the
original trailing edge comes first.
Use this mode to combine several
originals onto a single copy.
Normally, an original cannot be
inserted into the rear feeder while in
Synchro-cut mode. If 1 is selected, an
original can be inserted from the rear
side even if Synchro-cut mode is used.
This cannot be used with the trailing
edge margin function.
In this mode, the copy will be about
200 mm longer than the original (B048
copier only).
4-20
0: No
1: Manual Feed
Attention Mode 1
0: No
1: Manual Feed
Attention Mode 2
0: No
1: A new margin can be
set in the partial copy
mode
0: No
1: Toner Full Supply
Mode
0: Normal
1: Combine Originals
Mode
0: Normal
1: Synchro-cut Rear Feed
Mode
SM
SERVICE TOOLS
-71
-72
Original Feed Motor

Returning Speed
Setting
Roll Feeder Start
Timing
-73
Original Transport
Mode
-74
SM
Function
In semi-synchro cut mode, the
machine stores the 1st original cut
length and displays it in the paper
length counter.
The paper cut mode will automatically
be changed to the Preset/Variable cut
mode.
For the 2nd copy, it is not necessary to
press the cut key at the trailing edge of
the original. Also, before the 2nd
original is inserted, the cut length in the
cut length counter can be changed
using the +/ keys. The value can
be changed within the normal range of
the semi-synchro cut (410 mm ~
3,000, 16.5' ~ 118.0') (B047 copier
only).
Selects the speed of the original feed
motor in returning original mode. A
slower speeds may be necessary for
thinner originals (B048 copier only).
Determines the timing of the roll
feeder.
The default value begins the roll feeder
just after the original registration
sensor is activated.
It can also be set to start after the
trailing edge passes the original
entrance sensor.
The default value provides a faster first
copy and increases 1 to 1 CPM.
If the emergency stop key is pressed
while the original is being transported
to the scanning start position, copy
paper is cut and fed out of the copier.
Whichever setting is selected, the first
copy and 1 to 1 CPM are within
specification.
Select whether the original is
transported from the original table to
the scanning start position directly, or
whether the original is returned to the
scanning start position after the trailing
edge of the original passes through the
original registration sensor (B048
copier only).
The default setting (= 0) handles
curled originals better. If the setting is
changed from 0 to 1, perform the
synchro-cut length auto adjustment
(SP#-35, #-36).
4-21
Data
0: Non-Length Display
1: Length Display
0: 200 mm/s
1: 150 mm/s
2: 100 mm/s
0: Trailing edge is
detected.
1: Original insertion
0: Original is
transported directly
to the start position.
1: Original is returned to
the start position after
the original passes
through the original
registration sensor.
B047/B048
Service
Tables
Mode No.
Cut Length Display
Mode
SERVICE TOOLS
Mode No.
Fusing
Temperature
Recovery Setting
Function
Determines how the machine recovers
when the fusing temperature drops
below the target value. This is only
triggered when making multiple copies
using fusing mode 8 (highest
temperature mode) (B048 copier only).
Original Transport
Torque Down
Sets the operation of the original

transport torque.
-75
-76
B047/B048
4-22
Data
0: No recovery
(The machine simply
continues copying,
ignoring the fusing
temperature.)
1: Stops copying and
feeds out the
original.
2: Stops copying but the
original is not fed out.
Copying starts again
after the fusing
temperature recovers.
0: No
1: Down during transport
forward
2: Down during transport
both forward and
backwards
SM
SERVICE TOOLS
4.3.2 INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE

Input Check Mode Table
The on/off status of the selected electrical component is displayed in the paper
length indicator (ON or OFF is displayed). If the selected program number is not
used, NOT is displayed.
-5
-6
-7
-8
-9
-10
-11
-12
-13
-14
-15
-16
-17
-20
-21
-24
-26
Sensor/Switch/Signal
Registration Sensor
Exit Sensor
Entrance Sensor
Main Motor LOC Signal
(Status is ON when the main motor is rotating normally.)
Door Switch
Original Entrance Sensor (B048 copier only)
Original Rear Sensor (B048 copier only)
Not Used
Right Cutter Switch
Left Cutter Switch
Paper End Sensor (1st Roll)
Paper End Sensor (2nd Roll)
Exit Cover Open
Used Toner Cover Switch
Toner Overflow Sensor
Toner Overflow Sensor Connection
Total Counter
Fusing SC Detection
Service
Tables
Program No.
-1
-2
-3
-4
Output Check Mode Table

Press the " key to turn on the selected electrical component. The status of the
component is displayed in the paper length indicator.
To turn off the component, press the " key again.
Program No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
SM
Main Motor
Toner Supply Clutch
Pick off solenoid
Registration Clutch
Total Counter
Pre-transfer Lamp
Quenching Lamp
Fusing Lamp
4-23
Note
B047/B048
SERVICE TOOLS
Program No.
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16 to 19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
Main Charge Corona
Grid Voltage
Not Used
Exhaust Fan
Not Used
Main Motor + PTL + Bias Voltage for the
Non-image Area + Quenching Lamp
Original Feed Motor (Forward)
(B048 copier only)
Original Feed Motor (Reverse)
(B048 copier only)
Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor (Forward)
Roll Feeder Paper Feed Motor (Reverse)
Roll Feed Clutch 1
Roll Feed Clutch 2
Fusing SC Release
Original Feed Motor
(Forward and Reverse)
(B048 copier only)
33
34
Main Switch OFF (Energy Star)
Note
Original feed motor

operation changes every
time the roll feed key is
pressed.
1st time: Forward
2nd time: Stop
3rd time: Reverse
4th time: Stop
Turn off the main switch.
switches. The number of the movements (0 ~ 9999) is displayed in the
paper length indicator. When the roll feeder is pulled out during this
operation, the operation will stop.
B047/B048
4-24
SM
JAM CODE LIST

Code
dJ45
pJ51
pJ52
pJ53
pJ55
pJ60
pJ61
pJ62
pJ63
pJ70
pJ71
pJ72
rJ80
rJ81
rJ90
rJ91
rJ95
rJ98
rJ99
B047/B048
Cause of Jam
Original registration sensor does not turn off after paper is
fed 3,500 mm.
Registration sensor OFF is detected just after starting the
copy process.
Registration sensor OFF is detected before starting the roll
feeder again.
Entrance sensor ON is detected during roll feeding.
3,500 mm.
Registration sensor OFF is detected at the paper leading
edge.
Registration sensor ON is detected at the paper leading
edge.
Registration sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailing
edge.
Registration sensor ON is detected at the paper trailing
edge.
Exit sensor OFF is detected at the paper leading edge.
Exit sensor ON is detected at the paper leading edge.
Exit sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailing edge.
Leading edge sensor OFF is detected at the paper leading
edge.
Leading edge sensor ON is detected at the paper leading
edge.
Paper cutter failure
Door open during roll feeding
Roll feeder.
Motor does not turn off after paper is fed 600 mm more than the
maximum paper length.
Leading edge sensor ON is detected at the paper trailing
edge during roll feeding.
Leading edge sensor OFF is detected at the paper trailing
edge during roll feeding.
4-26
Remarks
B047 only
SM
JAM CODE LIST
In mm Mode
0: 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297
1: 3000, 2000, 1189, 841, 594, 420, 297, 280
2: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1100, 1000,
900, 800, 700, 600, 500, 400, 300, 280
3: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1900, 1800, 1700, 1600, 1500, 1400, 1300, 1200, 1189, 841,
594, 420, 297, 280
4: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1456, 1189, 1030, 841, 728, 594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 280
5: 3000, 2500, 2000, 1500, 1230, 880, 625, 450, 330, 280
6: 1456, 1030, 728, 515, 364
7: 3000, 2000, 1456, 1030, 728 515, 364, 280
8: 3000, 2500, 2000, 1500, 1189, 1100, 841, 594, 420, 300, 297, 280
9: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1091, 1085, 1030, 1016, 1000, 939, 900, 880,
841, 813, 788, 765, 762, 758, 728, 679, 636, 625, 594, 591,546, 515, 508, 420,364,
297, 280
10: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1600, 1400, 1200, 1000, 800, 600, 400, 280
11: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1750, 1500, 1250, 1000, 750, 500, 280
12: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1950, 1900, 1850, 1800, 1750, 1700, 1650, 1600, 1550, 1500,
1450, 1400, 1350, 1300, 1250, 1200, 1150, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 850, 800,
750, 700, 650, 600, 550, 500, 450, 400, 350, 300, 280
13: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1100, 1050, 1000, 950, 900, 841, 800, 750,
700, 650, 594, 550, 500, 420, 297, 280
14: 3000, 2400, 1800, 1456, 1200, 1189, 1085, 1030, 900, 880, 841, 765, 728, 625,
594, 515, 420, 364, 297, 280
15: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1189, 594, 280
16: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1200, 1000, 841, 420, 280
17: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1220, 1189, 915, 841, 610, 594, 458, 420, 305, 297,
280
18: 3000, 2400, 2000, 1800, 1500, 1189, 1118, 864, 841, 594, 559, 432, 420, 297, 280
In inch Mode
0: 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0
1: 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0
2: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 11.0
3: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0
4: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 48.0, 44.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0,
11.0
5: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 70.0, 60.0, 50.0, 40.0, 30.0, 20.0, 11.0, 10.0
6: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 45.0, 40.0, 35.0, 30.0, 25.0,
20.0, 15.0, 11.0, 10.0
7: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0,
12.0, 11.0
8: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0,
11.0
9: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 75.0, 70.0, 65.0, 60.0, 55.0, 50.0, 48.0, 44.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0,
24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0
SM
4-27
B047/B048
Service
Tables
Fixed Paper Size Pattern Data (SP No. 22)
JAM CODE LIST

10: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5,
50.0, 47.5, 45.0, 42.5, 40.0, 37.5, 35.0, 32.5, 30.0, 27.5, 25.0, 22.5, 20.0, 17.5, 15.0,
12.5, 11.0, 10.0
11: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5,
50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 34.0, 24.0, 22.0, 18.0, 17.0, 12.0, 11.0
12: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5,
50.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 24.0, 18.0, 12.0, 11.0
13: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 77.5, 75.0, 72.5, 70.0, 67.5, 65.0, 62.5, 60.0, 57.5, 55.0, 52.5,
50.0, 44.0, 42.0, 34.0, 22.0, 17.0, 11.0
14: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 76.0, 74.0, 72.0, 70.0, 68.0, 66.0, 64.0, 62.0, 60.0, 58.0,
56.0, 54.0, 52.0, 50.0, 48.0, 46.0, 44.0, 42.0, 40.0, 38.0, 36.0, 34.0, 32.0, 30.0, 28.0,
26.0, 24.0, 22.0, 20.0, 18.0, 16.0, 14.0, 12.0, 11.0, 10.0
15: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 60.0, 48.0, 36.0, 24.0, 12.0 11.0
16: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 72.0, 66.0, 60.0, 50.0, 54.0, 48.0, 42.0, 36.0, 30.0, 24.0,
18.0, 12.0 11.0
17: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 78.0, 75.0, 72.0, 69.0, 66.0, 63.0, 60.0, 57.0, 54.0, 51.0, 48.0,
45.0, 42.0, 39.0, 36.0, 33.0, 30.0, 27.0, 24.0, 21.0, 18.0, 15.0, 12.0 11.0
18: 118.0, 96.0, 80.0, 72.0, 64.0, 57.3, 48.0, 46.8, 42.0, 40.6, 36.0, 34.0, 33.1, 28.7,
24.0, 23.4, 22.0, 20.3, 18.0, 17.0, 16.6, 14.4, 12.0, 11.7, 11.0, 10.1
Default Settings for Each Destination (SP#-1)

SP. No.
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10
#13
#14
#15
#17
#19
#20
#21
#22
#33
#-2
#-3
#-6
Japan
1
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
30
0.0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
50
U.S.A.
2
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
30
0.0
0.0
1
0
0
1
6
1
50
Europe
2
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
30
0.0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
50
Asia
2
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
30
0.0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
50
NRG
2
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
30
0.0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
50
Other 1 Other 2 Other 3 Other 4

2
2
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
2
2
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
30
30
30
0.0
0.0
0.0
0
0.0
0.0
0
1
0
0
0
5
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
6
1
0
1
0
50
50
50
#13, #14, #17: B048 only
B047/B048
4-28
SM
SERVICE REMARKS
4.6 SERVICE REMARKS

4.6.12 AC DRIVE BOARD
AC Drive Board
TB202
TB201
B047S500 WMF
Service Remark for 220 240 V Version

Make sure that the harnesses are connected to the noise filter and ac drive board
as shown.
1. Set the power supply cord hot line (brown wire) connector to terminal 1 on the
noise filter.
2. Set the power supply cord neutral line (blue wire) connector to terminal 2 on the
noise filter.
3. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to terminal 3
on the noise filter.
4. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to terminal
4 on the noise filter
5. Set the noise filter harness hot line (black wire) yellow connector to TB201 on
ac drive board.
6. Set the noise filter harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to TB202
on ac drive board.
SM
4-29
B047/B048
Service
Tables
Noise Filter
SERVICE REMARKS
AC Drive Board
TB202
TB201
B047S501.WMF
Service Remarks for 120 V Version

Make sure that the harness is connected to the ac drive board as shown correctly
1. Set the power supply cord harness hot line (black wire) white connector to
2. Set the power supply cord harness neutral line (white wire) white connector to
B047/B048
4-30
SM
DRUM UNIT

5.4 DRUM UNIT
5.4.2 DRUM REPLACEMENT
[E]
[D]
[B]
[C]
[H]
[F]
[G]
[B]
[A]
Replacement
and
Adjustment
B047R539.WMF

2. Remove the pulley [A] (1 C-ring).
3. Remove the 2 bearing holders [B] (2 screws each).
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the drum with the pick-off pawls when
removing or reinstalling the drum.
4. Remove the drum [C] with the drum shaft.
5. Loosen the drum knob [D] by turning it clockwise as shown.
6. Remove the drum flange [E].
7. Replace the drum with new one.
NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the gear [F], make sure that the direction of the
projection of the gear is on the drum side.
2) When re-installing the bearing holders, make sure that the right
bearing holder [G] has two mylar seals [H] attached. The mylar seals
determine the position between the drum unit and copier side plate.
This also helps to ensure an even image density on the copy.
SM
5-1
B047/B048
FUSING
5.5 FUSING
[B]
[A]
B047R101.WMF
5.5.7 HOT ROLLER THERMISTOR REPLACEMENT

2. Remove the hot roller thermistor [A] (1 screw, clamps).
5.1.8 FUSING THERMOFUSE REPLACEMENT

2. Remove the fusing thermofuse [B] (2 screws, 6 clamps, and 2 connectors).
B047/B048
5-2
SM
FUSING
5.1.9 FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
B047R538.WMF
When the main switch is turned on, the machine will suddenly start to drive
the fusing section. However, this does not occur immediately. The machine
waits until the hot roller is heated to above 80C. Keep your hands away
from any mechanical and electrical components during this period.
This procedure is required only when the hot roller thermistor is replaced.
Adjustment standard: Mode 1 (165C), Mode 2 (170C), Mode 3 (175C), Mode 4
(180C), Mode 5 (190C), Mode 6 (193C), Mode 7 (198C)
3. Remove the pressure roller thermistor screw and hang the thermistor by the
harness.
4. Actuate the fusing exit safety switch [A].
5. Turn on the main switch, select the normal fusing temperature mode, and wait
for at least 10 minutes.
6. Using a digital thermometer and probe [B], measure the temperature at the
middle of the hot roller.
7. If the actual temperature is different from the value for the mode being used
(use SP#1 to find out the current mode), adjust the temperature using SP#-7.
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 and confirm the temperature.
9. Reassemble the machine.
SM
5-3
B047/B048
Replacement
and
Adjustment
!CAUTION
5.8 COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT

5.8.4 REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
When:
Purpose:
Registration
Tolerance:
Perform:
How:
Registration is not within the registration tolerance.

03 mm (00.12")
SP#-5 (by-pass feed), SP#-29 (B048 rear original feed), SP#-45 (roll
feed)
Change the start timing of the registration roller using SP#-5, SP#-27,
and/or SP#-45
1. Make several copies using manual feed or the roll feeder and check the
registration.
2. If the registration is not within the registration tolerance, adjust the registration
using SP#-5, SP#-29 and/or SP#-45.
NOTE: When SP#-5 is changed, the data in SP#-45 will be automatically set to the
same value. To adjust SP#-45 separately, you must change it after
adjusting SP#-5.
B047/B048
5-4
SM
TROUBLESHOOTING
SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.2 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
When a service call condition occurs, the Call Service indicator ! and SC codes
are displayed.
SC Codes E2, E3, E4, E5, E6, E7, E8, E15, E17 and E18 cannot be cleared by
simply turning the main switch off and on. For safety reasons, you must set SP38
from 1 to 0 to clear these.
6.1.1 SC CODE DESCRIPTIONS

SC Code E-1: Exposure Lamp Abnormal
Definition
The light sensor voltage is less than 0.4 volts for 10 seconds.
Points to Check
Exposure lamp
Light sensor
FL regulator (CN402-1,2,4, and 5, CN401-1, -2, -3)
Main board (CN103-7, and CN105-A13, -A14, -B17, -B18)
SC Code E-2: Fusing Thermofuse Open

Definition
After turning on the machine, the temperature detected by the hot roller
thermistor does not reach 100C within 4 minutes and 30 seconds.
Troubleshooting
Points to Check
Fusing thermofuse
AC drive board
Main board (CN102-A3, -B11, -B13, -B14)
SC Code E-3: Hot Roller Thermistor Open

Definition
thermistor does not reach 50C within 3 minutes.
Points to Check
AC drive board
Fusing thermofuse
SM
6-1
B047/B048
11 May, 2001
SC Code E-4: Hot Roller Thermistor Short

Definition
The resistance of the hot roller thermistor is less than 0.11 K.
Points to Check
SC Code E-5: Pressure Roller Thermistor Open

Definition
The resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is more than 0.53 M.
Points to Check
SC Code E-6: Pressure Roller Thermistor Short

Definition
The resistance of the pressure roller thermistor is less than 0.55 K.
Points to check
SC Code E-7: Fusing Overheat

Definition
The temperature detected by the hot roller thermistor exceeds 250C.
Points to Check
Fusing thermofuse
AC drive board
Main board (CN102-A1, -B13, -B14)
B047/B048
6-2
SM
SC Code E-8: Fusing Warm-up Error

Definition
thermistor does not reach the target ready temperature within 12 minutes.
Points to Check
Fusing lamp
Fusing thermofuse
AC drive board
AC harness
SC Code E-9: Toner Density Sensor Abnormal

Definition
The toner density sensor voltage is less than 0.5 volts or more than 4.5 volts.
NOTE: After initializing the developer, this condition cannot be triggered until at
least 251 copies are made.
Points to Check
Definition
The main motor is on, but the main board does not receive a signal from the
motor for two seconds.
Points to Check
Main motor
Mechanical interference of the main motor drive
Main board (CN103-1, -2)
SC Code E-11: Toner Density Sensor Adjustment Error

Definition
The new developer initialization process cannot adjust the toner density sensor
voltage to its standard range (4.1 0.1 volts).
NOTE: After clearing the SP code, the previous data of SP#-30 will continue to
be used until the next toner initialization.
Points to Check
Developer
SM
6-3
B047/B048
Troubleshooting
SC Code E-10: Main Motor Abnormal
11 May, 2001
SC Code E-13: Total Counter Abnormal

Definition
Total counter does not operate.
Points to Check
Main board
AC Drive board
SC Code E-14: Zero Cross Signal Detection Abnormal

Definition
The zero cross signal is not detected within 0.5 second of turning on the main
switch.
Point to Check
Main board
AC Drive board
SC Code E-15: Main Switch Abnormal

Definition
After sending the reset signal, the main switch does not turn off within 0.45
second.
Point to check
Main switch
Main board
SC Code E-17: Unstable Fusing Temperature

Definition
While in the copy ready state, the machine detects 3 or more hot roller
temperature changes within 60 seconds, or 2 or more within 2 seconds. The
change must be greater than 20C in 1 second.
Point to Check
The thermistor is out of position
SC Code E-18: Fusing Lamp Continuous Light

Definition
In the copy ready condition, the fusing lamp turns on at full power continuously
for more than 120 seconds while the hot roller is not rotating.
- Point to check Poor thermistor cable connection
Poor fusing unit connection
B047/B048
6-4
SM
BLOWN FUSE TABLE
6.3 BLOWN FUSE TABLE

6.3.1 POWER SUPPLY UNIT
Europe Version
Fuse No.
FU301
FU302
FU303
FU304
Specification
250 V 3.15 A
250 V 6.3 A
250 V 6.3 A
250 V 6.3 A
Symptom
No power.
No indication. Beeper sounds.
This symptom will occur when all of three
fuses are open.
Specification
125 V 6.3 A
250 V 5 A
250 V 5 A
250 V 5 A
Symptom
No power.
No indication. Beeper sounds.
This symptom will occur when all of three
fuses are open.
U.S.A. Version
Fuse No.
FU301
FU302
FU303
FU304
AC Drive Board
Fuse No.
FU201
Specification
125 V 15 A
(U.S.A. version only)
250 1 A
CB201
250 V 8 A
(Europe version only)
No power.
No power is supplied to the de-humidify
heater.
No power.
Troubleshooting
FU202
Symptom
SM
6-5
B047/B048
ROLL FEED UNIT

B435/B436
SPECIFICATIONS

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
Width:
210 mm to 914 mm, 81/2" to 36"
Length:
150 meters
Diameter:
Less than 170 mm
Cut Size:
Preset Cut:
1189 mm, 841 mm, 594 mm, 420 mm, 297 mm
48", 36", 24", 18", 12" 46", 34", 22", 17", 11"
Up to 10 extra preset cut lengths can be set using
SP23 ~ 32.
Selected Length Cut:
297 mm to 3,000 mm (1 mm per step) 11" to 118"
(0.1" per step)
Paper Transport Velocity:
60 mm/s
Control:
Microprocessor
Power Source:
+24 volts and +5 volts from the copier
Power Consumption:
Maximum 110 W
1,200 mm x 720 mm x 775 mm

47.24" x 28.35" x 30.51"
Weight:
78 kg, 171.6 lbs (1 roll)

86 kg, 189.2 lbs (2 rolls)
Roll Feed Unit

B435/B436
Roll Paper Size:
SM
7-1
B435/B436
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DESCRIPTIONS

The index numbers refer to the electrical component layout on the reverse side of
the Point to Point index (Water proof paper).
Name
Motors
Cutter
Roll Feed
Magnetic Clutches
Roll Feed 1
Roll Feed 2
Switches
Right Cutter
Left Cutter
Dehumidity
Sensors
Paper End 1
Paper End 2
Leading Edge
Door
Printed Circuit Board

RF Drive
Others
RF Dehumidity Heater 1
RF Dehumidity Heater 2
B435/B436
Function
Drives the cutter (DC Reversible Motor).
Drives all mechanical components except
the cutter unit (Dc Stepper Motor).
Transmits the roll feed motor drive to the 1st

roll feed roller.
Transmits the roll feed motor drive to the
2nd roll feed roller.
Detects whether or not the cutter is at the

right home position.
Detects whether or not the cutter is at the
left home position.
Turns on the RF Dehumidity heaters when
not copying.
Detects when the roll runs out of paper.

Detects when the roll runs out of paper.
Misfeed detector. Also detects the leading
edge of the paper, triggering the paper
length pulse count.
Indicates Door Open on the operation
panel and disables the key operation.
Index No.
59
61
56
60
54
57
62
51
50
55
58
Controls all roll feed unit functions

accordance with copier CPU.
49
Removes humidity from the roll paper.

Removes humidity from the roll paper.
53
52
7-2
SM
MECHANICAL OPERATION

2.1 MECHANICAL OPERATION
2.1.1 BASIC OPERATION
[D]
[B]
[C]
[A]
B436D103.WMF
There are two types of the roll feed unit. B435 Roll feed unit has one roll feed unit
(1st [A]). B436 Roll feed unit has two roll feed units (1st [A] and 2nd [B]). The cutter
unit [C] uses a sliding rotary cutting blade.
When turning on the main switch or when roll paper is replenished, the roll feed
motor rotates and the leading edge of the roll paper is fed until the roll lead edge
sensor [D] is activated. Then, the leading edge of the roll paper is returned to the
paper feed start position (60 mm before the cutter unit).
SM
7-3
B435/B436
Roll Feed Unit

B435/B436
[D]
B436D501.WMF
[B]
[A]
B436D502.WMF
After the leading edge of the paper reaches the exit rollers [A], the paper is
directed to the copier registration roller [B]. The registration roller stops rotating
once the registration sensor detects the leading edge of the copy paper. The copy
paper stops and waits for the original. Shortly after the original registration sensor
is activated by the original, the registration roller and roll paper feed motor start to
rotate. The copy paper starts to feed again.
Just before the cut length of copy paper is fed, the speed of the roll paper feed
motor is doubled. A paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the copy paper.
When the paper reaches the proper length, paper feed motor stops and the cutter
unit cuts the paper. During the time that paper feed motor has stopped, the
registration roller continues to feed the copy paper forward. The paper is cut during
the time it takes for the paper buckle to be pulled taut. This allows for a neat cut.
When the selected cut length is between 245 mm and 340 mm, the paper reaches
the selected length before the registration roller starts to rotate again. In this case,
after the registration roller stops, the roll paper feed motor continues to rotate and a
paper buckle forms at the trailing edge of the paper. The registration roller brake
ensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate the registration rollers as the
excess paper is fed forwards. The paper is then cut.
When the selected cut length is between 340 mm and 410 mm, the roll cutter unit
cuts the paper after the second rotation of the roll paper feed roller. [RW1]
The paper buckle forms after the first rotation of the roll paper feed motor, because
the paper feed roller is still rotating after the registration roller has stopped. The
registration roller brake ensures that the very stiff types of paper will not rotate the
registration rollers when the paper buckles while it is stopped at these rollers.
B435/B436
7-4
SM
2.1.2 ROLL EDITION DETECTION

[A]
B436D503.WMF
The roll paper end sensor [A] is located above each roll. When the roll paper runs
out and the roll paper end sensor detects the black core of the roll, roll end is
indicated on the operation panel. If the paper is not caught by the feed rollers,
paper feed fails. In this case, roll end is indicated instead of a paper misfeed
indication.
2.1.3 DRIVE MECHANISM

[D]
[C]
[F]
Roll Feed Unit

B435/B436
[E]
[G]
[B]
[H]
B436D102.WMF
The roll feed exit roller [B] is driven by the roll feed motor [C] through timing belts
[D] and gears [E]. The feed roller [F] of each roll feed unit is driven by the roll feed
motor through the belt and each gear and each roll feed clutch [G]. Each feed roller
can be driven manually by each knob [H].
SM
7-5
B435/B436
2.1.4 CUTTER OPERATION

[B]
[A]
[C]
B436D104.WMF
The cutter unit uses a sliding rotary cutting blade [A] which is pulled past a fixed
blade by a drive wire. The rotary cutting blade allows the cutter unit to cut paper in
both directions. There are home position switches [B] at both ends of the cutter.
The cutter motor turns off, stopping the cutting action, when the rotary cutting blade
knob plate [C] turns off one of these switches.
B435/B436
7-6
SM
CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT

3.1 CUTTER UNIT REPLACEMENT
[C]
[B]
[D]
[F]
[A]
[F]
B436R102.WMF
[G]
[E]
B436R103.WMF
2. Remove the left tray lock lever [C] (1 screw and 1 spring) and tray stopper [D]
(2 shoulder screws and 1 spring).
3. Remove the two screws [E] and disconnect the three connectors [F].
NOTE: When removing and/or reinstalling the connectors, take care not to
damage the harnesses. Make sure that you do not pinch the harnesses
when reinserting the cutter unit.
4. Slide the cutter unit [G] out as shown.
SM
7-7
B435/B436
Roll Feed Unit

B435/B436
1. Remove the roll feed units front cover [A] (2 screws and 4 hooks) and left inner
cover [B] (2 screws).
ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSOR REPLACEMENT
3.2 ROLL FEED LEADING EDGE SENSOR

REPLACEMENT
[B]
[C]
[A]
[D]
B436R107.WMF
1. Pull out the roll feed unit.

2. Remove the sensor casing [A] (2 screws).
3. Replace the leading edge sensor [B] (1 screw and 1 connector).
NOTE: When reinstalling the sensor casing, be sure to align the sensor casings
pins [C] with the holes [D] in the sensor bracket.
B435/B436
7-8
SM
ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL
3.3 ROLL FEED UNIT REMOVAL
[B]
[B]
[A]
B436R101.WMF
1. Pull out the roll feed unit [A].

2. Remove the 4 screws [B] (right side 2 screws and left side 2 screws).
Roll Feed Unit

B435/B436
3. Lift the roll feed unit and place it gently onto the floor or other flat surface.
SM
7-9
B435/B436
ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
3.4 ROLL FEED CLUTCH REPLACEMENT

[A]
[D]
[C]
[E]
[E]
[D]
B436R104.WMF
[B]
[I]
[K]
[J]
[F]
[H]
[G]
B436R105.WMF
1. Remove the roll feed unit.

2. Remove the left inner cover.
3. Remove the roll feed paper guide plate [A] (4 screws).
4. Remove the roller knob bracket [B] (1 screw).
5. Remove the snap ring [C] and two retaining rings [D] and two bushings [E].
6. Disconnect the connector for the roll feed clutch harness [F] (2 clamps).
7. Remove the roll feed roller [G] and clutch [H] (1 retaining ring and 1 timing belt
[I]).
NOTE: 1) When reinstalling the clutch, make sure that the clutch pin [J] is set in
the cutout [K] of the stopper.
2) After putting all the parts back, turn the roller knob and verify that the
timing belt drives the roll feed roller.
B435/B436
7-10
SM
ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT
3.5 ROLL FEED MOTOR REPLACEMENT
[A]
[B]
1. Pull out the roll feed unit.

2. Remove the left inner cover.
Roll Feed Unit

B435/B436
3. Remove the four screws [A] securing the roll feed motor, then remove the roll
feed motor [B] (1 connector).
SM
7-11
B435/B436
ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT
3.6 ROLL END SENSOR REPLACEMENT
[B]
[A]
[D]
[C]
1. Remove the 2 screws [A] holding the clamps for the power supply cord.
2. Remove the roll feed rear cover [B] (6 screws).
3. Remove the roll end sensor bracket [C] (1 screw and 1 hook).
4. Replace the roll end sensor [D] (1 screw and 1 connector).
B435/B436
7-12
SM
CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT
3.7 CUT LENGTH ADJUSTMENT

The cut length adjustment should be done when the roll feeder is installed to
correct cutting errors. The cut error correction data is determined in the factory
without the copier installed. The cut length varies depending on the copier on
which it is installed and/or paper type used. If required, adjust the cut length as
follows:
NOTE: The cut length should be measured 10 minutes or later after copying
because the fusing unit dries the paper and reduces its length temporarily.
Preset Cut : Adjustment standards: 3 mm (for Length Shorter than 420

mm) 5 mm (for 420 to 1,189 mm) 11 mm (3,000 mm)
NOTE: 1) There are three settings of the cut length depending on the temperature
mode. They are set in the factory to match a standard paper type.
[Normal (SP#42, 45, 87), High (SP#43, 46, 88), Low (SP#44, 47, 89)].
2) There are two settings of SP#42 to 47 when the 2 rolls feeder is
installed. Adjust the 2nd roll cut length by the same manner of the 1st
roll cut length adjustment. Repeat the same steps after 1st roll cut
length adjustment.
1. Make 5 copy samples of A0 lengthwise (1189) and A3 sideways (297) in the
preset cut mode.
2. Measure the difference of the length between the each copy sample and preset
cut length (1189 and 297). Then, calculate the average difference.
3. Input the average value using SP modes #42 to 47 so that the cut length is
4. Make A0 lengthwise and A3 sideways copies using preset cut mode and check
their length.
6. Make 5 copy samples of 3,000 mm length. Make sure the average cut length is
7. If it is not within the adjustment standards, change the values using SP modes
#87 to 89.
SM
7-13
B435/B436
Roll Feed Unit

B435/B436
Example: 1) Current SP data #42....0

Copy sample length = 297 + 4
Set SP mode #42...4.0
2) Current SP data #42....0
Copy sample length = 297 4
Set SP mode #42...+4.0
SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
3.8 SIDE REGISTRATION ADJUSTMENT
[A]
[B]
1. Raise the lever [A] in the left roll holder [B].
2. Adjust the roll paper side position. Lower the lever to fix the position.
B435/B436
7-14
SM
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETINS
BULLETIN NUMBER:
740-001
APPLICABLE MODEL: FW740
05/12/95
SUBJECT: PARTS CATALOG UPDATES

GENERAL:
The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This information shouldeb
incorporated into all existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.
UPDATE NO. 1 - SPRING HOOK - The old style Spring Hook (54199653) is no longer produced.
However, the two new style Spring Hooks (shown below) have been made
available as replacement options.
Spring Hook - SS-22
Spring Hook - SS-21

OLD
NEW
REFERENCE
OLD PART NO. NEW PART NO.
QTY
PAGE
ITEM
Spring Hook
45
A1639504
Spring Hook - SS-22
45
A1639505
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
Spring Hook - SS-21
45
10*
54199653
DESCRIPTION
Operating Sheet
UPDATE NO. 2 - OPERATING SHEET - Please add the

Operating Sheet to your Parts Catalog
as indicated below.
REFERENCE
PART NUMBER
A1631385
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
DESCRIPTION
QTY
PAGE
ITEM
Operating Sheet
27*
TECHNICAL SERVICE BULLETIN

CUSTOMER SERVICE GROUP
BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 002
10/11/95

COPY QUALITY
GROUNDING PLATE SPRING AND BUSHINGS
GENERAL:
To ensure grounding of the Lower Entrance Guide, the Grounding Plate Spring has been replaced by the
Grounding Wire as shown below. Also, the material of the Exit Unit Bushing has been changed. This
information should be incorporated into all existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.
12. PAPER EXIT SECTION 1
13. PAPER EXIT SECTION 2 (A163)

The material of this bushing
has been changed.
PAPER PATH
Grounding Plate
Spring
ELECTRICAL
The material of this bushing

has been changed.
MECHANICAL
Note: This copy intended as master of original

for reproduction of additional bulletins.
SUBJECT:
Grounding Wire
REFERENCE
QTY
INT
PAGE
ITEM
Grounding Plate Spring

A1635640
08053385
Grounding Wire
29
31
103
FSM
A1634464
DESCRIPTION
Bushing - 6mm
50530447
Bushing - 6mm
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3844120069 will have the new style Grounding Wire
and Exit Unit Bushings installed during production.
PARTS
UNITS AFFECTED:
INTERCHANGEABILITY CHART:
1
3/S
OLD and NEW parts can be used in both OLD and

NEW parts CAN NOT be used in OLD machines.
2
NEW machines.
OLD parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
NEW parts can be used in OLD and NEW machines.
OLD parts CAN NOT be used in NEW machines.
3
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or
previously modified, use the new part numbers individually.
OTHER

BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 003
12/22/95
GENERAL:
COPY QUALITY
The Field Service Manual page(s) listed below must be replaced with the page(s) supplied. Each bull
etin
package contains 2 sets of replacement pages.
PAGES:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow
Additional Information
Developer Type
4-11
Addition of SP Mode 15
ELECTRICAL
1-1
MECHANICAL

SUBJECT: FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
PAPER PATH
FSM
PARTS
OTHER

BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 004
1/26/96
COPY QUALITY
SUBJECT: ENERGY STAR MODIFICATION (DETAILS)

GENERAL:
AUTO OFF MODE
To automatically turn "OFF" the copier, a new type of Main Switch with an
incorporated coil is used. The connector layout is shown below.
MECHANICAL
To conserve energy, the copier automatically turns "OFF" 30 minutes after the last copy job has been
completed. The details of the machine operation are as follows:
Main Switch
ELECTRICAL
AC Harness
Relay
PAPER PATH
Upper DC Harness
FSM
Lower DC Harness
SP MODE
Mode No.
Function
15
Auto off time can be selected
PARTS
New software (ROM A1635208) provides an additional SP Mode to adjust the

Auto Off Timer. Replace page 4-11 of the Field Service Manual with the updated
page provided with this package.
Settings
1~ 120 minutes (1 minute per step)
Default : 30 minutes
Continued...
OTHER
The Auto Off time can also be selected by the customer. Refer to page 3 of this bulletin for the pr
ocedure.
Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-004

Page 2 of 4
The Auto Off mode is prohibited during the following conditions:
*
*
*
*
The roll feeder is operating

A sheet of paper is set on the feed table
A Jam or SC indicator is "ON"
The Toner End indicator is "ON" or the Used Toner Bottle is full
NOTE: When you use a new style Main Board (modified for Energy Star) in a non-Energy Star machine,
remove the ROM (A1635208) from the new Main Board and install ROM (A1639506) in its place.
Also, when you replace the RAM Board, please clear all memory (SP1-21) and input the factory
data referring to the Field Service Manual.
NOTE: For part numbers, refer to Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740-005
INSTRUCTION SHEET
An additional explanation sheet has been added to the operating instructions. Please make copies of
the
following two pages and add them to the operating instructions that were shipped with the copier.
Continued...

Page 3 of 4
Continued...

Page 4 of 4

BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 005
1/26/96
COPY QUALITY

GENERAL:
To meet Energy Star requirements, the following parts have been changed.
Main Switch
Relay (new part)

MECHANICAL
Relay
AC Harness
ELECTRICAL
Lower DC Harness
Upper DC
Harness
PAPER PATH
NOTE: For more information regarding Energy Star Office Equipment, refer to Publications Bulletin
#PUB-066.
REFERENCE
QTY
INT
PAGE
ITEM
FSM
DESCRIPTION
11
3/S
35
23
12041545
12042421
Main SW
11
3/S
35
118
A1631257
A1631256
Lower Right Front Cover - 115V
11
3/S
15
A1635600
A1635702
AC Harness
11
3/S
35
A1635605
A1635704
Lower DC Harness
11
3/S
35
A1635608
A1635706
Upper DC Harness
11
3/S
35
A1635206
A1635208
ROM (IC - AM27C010-120DC)
11
3/S
39
A1635200
A1635230
Main Board
11
3/S
35
12081392
Relay
01
35
119*
Operating Instructions - Energy Star
01
43
6*
A1638637
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3845070122 will have the parts listed above inst
alled
during production.
OTHER
Right Latch Bracket
PARTS
A1631100
A1631095

BULLETIN NUMBER:
03/20/96
FW740 - 005 REISSUE
COPY QUALITY

GENERAL:
To meet Energy Star requirements, the following parts have been changed.
Main Switch
Relay (new part)

MECHANICAL
Relay
AC Harness
ELECTRICAL
Lower DC Harness
Upper DC
Harness
PAPER PATH
NOTE: For more information regarding Energy Star Office Equipment, refer to Publications Bulletin
#PUB-066.
REFERENCE
QTY
INT
PAGE
ITEM
FSM
DESCRIPTION
11
3/S
35
23
12041545
12042421
Main SW
11
3/S
35
118
A1631257
A1631256
Lower Right Front Cover - 115V
11
3/S
15
A1635600
A1635702
AC Harness
11
3/S
35
A1635605
A1635704
Lower DC Harness
11
3/S
35
A1635608
A1635706
Upper DC Harness
11
3/S
35
A1635206
A1635208
ROM (IC - AM27C010-120DC)
11
3/S
39
A1635200
A1635230
Main Board
11
3/S
35
12081392
Relay
01
35
119*
Operating Instructions - Energy Star
01
43
6*
A1638637
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial NumberA3845070122 will have the parts listed above installed
during production.
OTHER
Right Latch Bracket
PARTS
A1631100
A1631095

BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 006
2/7/96

COPY QUALITY
GENERAL:
etin
package contains 2 sets of replacement pages.
PAGES:
MECHANICAL

5-19
Updated Information
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT: FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
PAPER PATH
FSM
PARTS
OTHER

BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 007
02/21/96

COPY QUALITY
GENERAL:
The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This information should
be
incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.
UPDATE NO. 1 -
MECHANICAL
T & S CORONA CASING - To meet CE Mark Standards, the following parts have
been changed.
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
QTY
INT
PAGE
ITEM
T & S Corona Casing
11
25
A1635450
A1635455
Quenching Lamp
11
23
38
A1632254
A1632257
Grounding Spring Plate
11
37
26
A1635440
A1635439
Pre - Transfer Lamp - 24V 7.2W
11
15
A1633867
A1633869
T & S Corona Guide Plate
11
17
A1634120
A1634121
Fusing Lower Stay
11
27
28
A1635636
A1635637
Separation Power Pack Harness
11
35
14
A1635200
A1635230
Main Control Board
11
35
40
7
*
FSM
A1633130
PAPER PATH
AD023113
ELECTRICAL

UNITS AFFECTED:
PARTS
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3845070122 will have the new style T & S Corona
Casing, etc... installed during production.
0
3/S
Continued...
OTHER

2
NEW machines.
3
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured aft er the S/N cut-in or
Tech Service Bulletin No. FW740 - 007

Page 2 of 2
UPDATE NO. 2 -
PARTS CATALOG CORRECTION - Add Spacer (A1634355) to your Parts

Catalog as indicated below.
Fusing Entrance Guide Plate
20 mm
25
mm
Spacer - Fusing Entrance
REFERENCE
PART NUMBER
A163 4355
DESCRIPTION
Spacer - Fusing Entrance
QTY
PAGE
ITEM
01
27
39

BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 008
03/20/96

COPY QUALITY
GENERAL:
Rubber tubes have been added on the both right and left original stoppers to ensure that the origina
l
stoppers are being held in position. This information should be incorporated into all existing FW74
0 Parts
Catalog documentation.
Left Original Stopper
MECHANICAL
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT: ORIGINAL STOPPERS
Rubber
Tubes
Right Original Stopper

PAPER PATH
PART NUMBER
AA161118
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
DESCRIPTION
Tube - 3 x 4.5 x 3
PAGE
ITEM
02
28*
PARTS
UNITS AFFECTED:
QTY
FSM
REFERENCE
Not available at time of publication.
OTHER

BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 009
09/27/96

COPY QUALITY
PARTS CATALOG ADDITIONS
GENERAL:
The following Parts Catalog additions are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. This informatio
n should
be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.
MECHANICAL
Page 14
Philips Pan Head Screw
Photointeruptor
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT:
PAPER PATH
FSM
NEW PART NO.

AW020012
DESCRIPTION
Photointeruptor
PAGE
ITEM
15
13*
15
130*
OTHER
03130100B
Philips Pan Head Screw - M3 X 10
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
QTY
PARTS
REFERENCE

BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 010
09/27/96

COPY QUALITY
FUSING TEMPERATURE ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE
GENERAL:
To achieve optimal copy quality, it may be necessary to adjust the fusing temperature based on theype
t of
copy paper used and the specific environmental conditions in which the machine is located. The tabl
es
below demonstrate how to adjust the fusing temperature to compensate for these factors.
Environmental conditions:
L/L ------ 15C, 20%RH

M/M ---- 23C, 65%RH
H/H ----- 30C, 80%RH
Paper
T6200/T6000
M/M H/H L/L
Azon Recycled Regma 61gr

Regma 75-80gr
Bond
M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H
PAPER PATH
Environ L/L
Mode 8
Mode 7
Mode 6
Mode 5
Mode 4
Mode 3 O
Mode 2
Mode 1
Azon Bond
ELECTRICAL
1. Plain Paper
MECHANICAL

SUBJECT:
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
FSM
PARTS
Paper Regma 90gr

Regma 110gr
Ozalid EF-Weiss
Environ L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H
Mode 8
Mode 7
O
O
O
Mode 6 O
O
Mode 5
O
Mode 4
Mode 3
O
Mode 2
O
Mode 1
O
OTHER
Continued...

Page 2 of 2
2. Vellum
Paper TA-70
Azon Vellum
Erazable Vellum Regma 91gr
Environ L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H
Mode 8
O
O
O
Mode 7
O
Mode 6 O
O
O
O
O
O
Mode 5
O
O
Mode 4
Mode 3
Mode 2
Mode 1
3. Film
Paper
Azon Film 3mil
Environ L/L
Mode 8
Mode 7
Mode 6
Mode 5
Mode 4
Mode 3 O
Mode 2
Mode 1
Azon Film 4mil
M/M H/H L/L
O
O
Regma Film 3mil Regma Film 4mil Hoechst Film

4mil
M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H L/L M/M H/H
O
O
FOR NON-LISTED PAPERS :
The following is the procedure to determine the best Fusing Temperature Setting for each type of pap
er.
The best setting is said to be the highest position before creasing begins to appear.
1. Set the Fusing Temperature Setting to the maximum mode for the type of paper, such as Plain
Paper, Vellum, or Film using SP #1, SP #2 or SP #3.
Plain Paper:
Vellum:
Film:
Mode 7 (SP #1)

Mode 8 (SP #2)
Mode 5 (SP #3)
2. Make 3 white copies with the largest size of the paper available in the vertical grain direction. W
hite
copy is the worst case for creasing.
3. Check whether creasing appears on any of the copies.
4. If creasing appears, lower the Fusing Temperature Setting by 1 and repeat Steps # 2~4.

BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 011
09/27/96
PRESSURE ROLLER EVALUATION PROCEDURE
COPY QUALITY
GENERAL:
The following procedure is a method to determine whether the pressure roller should be replaced.
1. Access SP mode with the steps below.

In order, press Clear Modes (C) key, Plus (+) key, Minus (-) key, Clear/Stop key, press and hold the
Clear/Stop key again for longer than 3 seconds.
4. Make a copy using a less fusible kind of paper like film, translucent paper or thicker plain paper iw
th
vertical grain direction.
Note:
5. Scrape some black areas on the copy using a cotton cloth approximately 5 times.
FSM
Before making a copy, set the fusing temperature setting to the mode which is one step lower than
the proper setting for the particular kind of paper. For example, if the proper setting is Mode 3,
select Mode 2 for this test. Refer to TSB No. FW740-010 for more information regarding the
proper settings for particular types of paper and the adjustment procedure for non-listed papers.
PAPER PATH
3. To prevent a paper misfeed, create a lead edge margin with the steps below.
a) Press Function Select key until "Lead Margin" indicator lights.
b) Continue to press Plus key until "99 mm" or "4.0 inches" (max. value) is indicated.
ELECTRICAL
2. Select Lamp Off Mode with the steps below.

a) Confirm that "Lead Margin" indicator lights.
If "Lead Margin" indicator does not light, pressFunction Select key until it lights.
b) Select "-51" by pressing Minus key. ("-51" is the number to select Lamp Off Mode.)
c) Press Function Select key until "Paper Length" indicator lights.
d) Select "1" by pressing Plus key. ("1" is the number to set Lamp Off Mode.)
e) Press RF Select key to set Lamp Off Mode.
MECHANICAL

SUBJECT:
6. Check whether the toner is peeled off on the areas that correspond with the scraped parts of the
pressure roller. If white lines and/or bands appear, the pressure roller should be replaced with a
new
one.
PARTS
7. Before turning the main switch "OFF" to reset the SP mode, reset "Lamp Off Mode", "Lead Margin"
and "Fusing Temperature Setting" back to the original settings.
FIELD SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT

etin
package contains 1 set of replacement pages.
OTHER
PAGES:
4-38
Pressure Roller Evaluation Procedure

BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 012
10/15/96

COPY QUALITY
PHOTOINTERUPTOR
GENERAL:
The Photointeruptor shown below is missing from the Parts Catalog. This information should be added
to all
existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.
MECHANICAL
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT:
PAPER PATH
14
9
FSM
REFERENCE
PART NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
QTY
PAGE
ITEM
AW020024
Photointeruptor
15
14
PARTS
OTHER

BULLETIN NUMBER:
FW740 - 013
01/16/97

COPY QUALITY
PARTS CATALOG UPDATES
GENERAL:
The following Parts Updates are being issued for all FW740 Parts Catalogs. The following informatio
n
should be incorporated into all existing Parts Catalog documentation.
UPDATE NO. 1 -
PRESSURE ROLLER STRIPPER - To prevent the Pressure Roller from being

damaged, the following modifications have been made.
MECHANICAL
1. The material of the Strippers has been changed from metal to a Teflon-coated resin to decrease the
friction level on the Pressure Roller.
2. Springs have been added to press the Strippers against the Pressure Roller.
3. A Stopper Guide Plate has been added to prevent the Pressure Roller from contacting the Paper Exit
Cover when it is bent.
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT:
NOTE: The proper fusing temperature setting for each type of throughput material is very important to keep
the Fusing and Pressure Rollers in good condition for as long as possible. Please refer to Tech
Service Bulletin No. 010.
Please also refer to Tech Service Bulletin No. 011 regarding how to judge whether the Pressure
Roller is still usable or not.
40
31
43
42
FSM
41
PARTS
0
1
Continued...
OTHER
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured aft er the S/N cut-in or

Page 2 of 2
REFERENCE
QTY
INT
PAGE
ITEM
Pressure Roller Stripper
10
27
31
A1634175
Pressure Roller Stripper Assy
01
27
31
A1744155
Stopper Guide - Paper Exit
01
27
40*
AE044020
Pressure Roller Stripper
0 16
27
41*
AA066285
Stripper Spring
0 16
27
42*
Stripper Stay Bracket
01
27
43*
A1634171
A1634176
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
DESCRIPTION
UNITS AFFECTED:
All FW740 copiers manufactured after Serial Number A3846060120 will have the new Pressure Roller
Strippers installed during production.
UPDATE NO. 2 -
ORIGINAL FEED TABLE ASSEMBLY - As per field request, the Original Feed
Table Assembly has been registered as a service part.
29
REFERENCE
PART NUMBER
A1636111
A1636113
* DENOTES NEW ITEM
DESCRIPTION
QTY
PAGE
ITEM
Original Feed Table - LT
29*
Original Feed Table - A4
29*
'97831)6#7)6:-')#+6394
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U####*;KHN#g#NEH
NLfFMfMK
COPY QUALITY
T/S CORONA UNIT
GENERAL:
A part number has been assigned to the T/S Corona Unit. This information should be incorporated into all
existing FW740 Parts Catalog documentation.
QTY
PAGE
ITEM
MECHANICAL
REFERENCE
NEW PART NO.
DESCRIPTION
A1633849
T/S Corona Unit (EU)
25
A1633850
T/S Corona Unit (NA)
25
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT:
%440-'%&0)#13()0U# *;KHN
PAPER PATH
FSM
PARTS
OTHER

U

KHNhNEINEfFKfNL
U
KHN
Intermittent blank copies, partially blank copies or blank copies.
COPY QUALITY
POSSIBLE CAUSES:
Arcing from Charge Corona.
Arcing from the High Voltage Leads / Receptacles.
No voltage output from the C, G, B Power Pack.
Fuse 3 Open.
SOLUTION:
Relay Receptacle - Charge Corona (AD021113).
Charge Corona Receptacle (AD021114).
Charge Corona Assembly (A1632050).
Power Pack - C, G, B (AZ320079).
Power Supply (AZ230056).
Fuse 3 on Power Supply.
ELECTRICAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Inspect the following parts for proper operation and/or signs of arching. Replace the parts as necessary.
MECHANICAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

SYMPTOM:
SUBJECT: BLANK COPIES
PAPER PATH
NOTE: Inspect Grid Wire routing (see illustration below). Ensure that wire junctions are positioned as
shown and staggered. If the wires cross or touch each other, arcing or copy quality problems may occur.
SM
PARTS
OTHER
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%EJG#g#gNNE
NHfFMfML
The chart listed below shows the Last Bulletin
Number issued for the A163 series.
Bulletin Cross Reference
Ricoh Group Companies
Last Bulletin No.
Gestetner
N/A
Ricoh
015
Savin
N/A
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#2f%
####6-'3,#g#*;KHN
####7%:-2#h#2f%
SPRING REPLACEMENT CHARGE CORONA UNIT
SYMPTOM:
PARTS
Note: This copy is intended as a master original

SUBJECT:
Difficulty when replacing Charge Corona Wires.
CAUSE:
The angle of the opening on the Spring is only 45, and this makes it difficult to attach the spring. Also the
notch in the Right End Block made it difficult to attach the Spring from above.
SOLUTION:
The angle on the opening of the Spring has been changed from 45 to 90 so the Spring can be replaced
with less pulling. Also the length of the notch in the Right End Block has been changed from 4 mm to 2.9
mm so the spring end with a diameter of 3 mm can be hooked from above. See the Before and After figures
below.
B e fo r e
A fte r
45
90
B e fo r e
A fte r
4 .0 m m
2 .9 m m
GENERAL:
The following parts corrections are being issued for all A163 Parts Catalogs.
OLD PART NO.
AA060124
AD022336
NEW PART NO.

AA060749
AD022348
DESCRIPTION
Spring
Right End Block- Charge
QTY
5
1
INT
0
0
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
23
9
23
14
Continued
Tech Service Bulletin No. A163 001

Page 2 of 2
UNITS AFFECTED:
All copiers manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have new style parts installed during
production.
MODEL NAME
Gestetner N/A
Ricoh FW740
Savin N/A
SERIAL NUMBER
N/A
A3847050073
N/A
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or units
previously modified, use the new individual part numbers.
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%EJGg#NNF
NIfEIfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#2f%
####6-'3,#h#*;KHN
####7%:-2#h#2f%
UPDATED ENERGY STAR REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL:
FIRMWARE

SUBJECT:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A163 Parts Catalog.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS The Operating Instructions

have been changed to announce changes concerning
Energy Star (115V).
UPDATE 1:
OLD PART NO.

A1638637
NEW PART NO.

A1638647
DESCRIPTION
Operating Instructions Energy Star
(115V)
Mode No.
Auto Shut-Off Time Setting (115 V)
PART NO.
A1635208
A1635230
INT
3
AUTO SHUT-OFF TIME Auto Shut-Off Time has been

changed from 1 to 120 minutes to 1 to 240 minutes. The
change has been made to SP Mode 15. See Table below.
UPDATE 2:
15
QTY
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
43
6
DESCRIPTION
ROM
Main Board
Old Data
1 to 120 Minutes
(1 Minute per step)
Default: 30 Minutes
OLD SUFFIX
No Suffix
A
New Data
1 to 240 Minutes
(1 Minute per step)
Default: 30 Minutes
NEW SUFFIX
A
B
QTY
1
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
39
1
35
7
The Main Board ROM revision A (file name 740A1A.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical
Services BBS.
NOTE: For more information about the Ricoh Technical Services BBS, order the Guide to Operation (P/N
BBS00001) through normal NSPC channels.
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
Must be installed as a set on units manufactured prior to the S/N cut-in. On units manufactured after the S/N cut-in or units
previously modified, use the new individual part numbers.
#'328630#23T#FLI
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%EJG#g#NNG
NKfFFfML
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#2f%
####6-'3,#h#*;KHN
####7%:-2#h#2f%
SMALL CAP
PARTS

SUBJECT:
GENERAL:
The part number for the Small Cap (A163 RIC/NRG)/(A251/A252) was incorrect. The following part
correction is being issued for all A571 Parts Catalog Sections.
OLD PART NO.

A5717479
NEW PART NO.

A5717497
DESCRIPTION
Small Cap (A163 RIC/NRG)/(A251/A252)
QTY
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
3
19
CONTROL NO. 296

U
EJGfFIEfFIFgNNH
EEfEMfML
U

hf
h
KHNfKINfKJN
hf
INSTALLATION CHECK GROUNDING WIRES
n
PAPER PATH
SYMPTOM:
Paper jams at the Registration Roller.
CAUSE:
The ground wire is positioned behind the Main Board on the Roll Feeder.
NOTE: This can result in an electrical short.
n
ELECTRICAL

SUBJECT:
SOLUTION:
Ensure that both Ground Wires are attached. (See Illustration Below)
NOTE-1: To ensure grounding,

tighten the screws for the
ground wires until the
spring washers [A] are
flattened
NOTE-2: Ensure that both wires
are connected before
powering up the copier.
Attach the Long Wire [C] to

the copier.
Attach the Short Wire [B] to

the stand.
CONTROL NO. 316

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A163/A251/A252 - 005
02/14/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER N/A
RICOH FW740/750/760
SAVIN N/A
OVERTONING
SYMPTOMS:
!
PARTS
1. Background may appear on the copy.

2. The Used Toner Tank may fill up before the Toner Overflow Indicator begins to light.
CAUSE:
As developer deteriorates, the charge on the toner will gradually drop. This may cause excess toner to be
supplied to the Development Unit and cause the toner density to become too high.
!
COPY QUALITY

SUBJECT:
SOLUTION:
The software controlling the toner supply ratio has been changed.
In the new software, the TS Level (Toner Supply Ratio) has been changed as follows:
1
7.5%
7.5%
2
15%
7.5%
3
30%
7.5%
4
50%
15%
5
100%
100%
NOTE: The suffix of the ROM has been changed from A1635208A to A1635208B (FW740),
A2515228C to A2515228D (FW750), & A2525238C to A2525238D (FW760).
FIRMWARE
0
No supply
No supply
TS Level
Old
New
The Main PCB ROM revision D file name A251MA1D.EXE (FW750), file name A252MA1D.EXE (FW760)
and ROM Revision B file name A163ma1B.exe (FW740) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical
Services FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com.
NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A251 and A252 machines manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new firmware
installed during production.
MODEL NAME
Ricoh FW740
Ricoh FW750
Ricoh FW760
SERIAL NUMBER
N/A
A7829020131
A7839020084
CONTROL NO. 018WID

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A163/A251/A252 - 006
02/14/2000
PARTS
ORIGINAL JAM
SYMPTOM:
When feeding thick paper, the Original Feed Motor may lock up.
CAUSE:
There is not enough torque for the Original Feed Motor when thick originals are being used.
MECHANICAL

SUBJECT:
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER N/A
RICOH FW760
SAVIN N/A
SOLUTIONS:
To improve the machine performance, the follow countermeasure has been implemented.
NOTE: The part number A2525238 of the ROM is the same only the suffix has
changed from C to D.
2. The spring tension for the timing belt has been decreased.
NOTE: The part number of the spring has been changed from AA060541 to AA060824.
3. The bushing on the right side only, for both original drive roller (AF020451) are lubricated with Mobil
Temp 78 to decrease the friction load.
The PCB ROM revision D (file name A252MA1D.EXE) can be downloaded through the Ricoh Technical
Services FTP Site http://tsc.ricohcorp.com.
NOTE: Refer to Facts Line Bulletin # FL002 for more information about the FTP Internet Web Site.
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A252 machines manufactured after the Serial Number listed below will have the new firmware installed
during production. All A252 machines manufactured after the Serial number listed will have the bushings
lubricated during production.
MODEL NAME
Ricoh FW760
SERIAL NUMBER
A7839020084
CONTROL NO. 018WID
ELECTRICAL
1. The software has been modified to increase the torque of the Original Feed Motor.

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A163/A251/A252 - 007
11/20/2000
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER - NA
RICOH FW740/750/760
SAVIN - NA
SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
GENERAL:
PAGES:
SERVICE
MANUAL
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.

SUBJECT:
The revised areas have been highlighted by an arrow .
1-1
Updated Information (Specifications Page STM)
1-1
Updated Information (Specifications Page FSM)
CONTROL NO. 006WID
Rev. 11/2000
1. SPECIFICATIONS
Table top
Copy Process:
Original Feed:
Sheet feed
Original Skew
Tolerance:
2 mm/400mm
Original Size:
Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm

Copy Size:
Copying Speed:
First Copy:
Warm-up Time:
Multi-Copy:
1 to 1 only
Automatic Reset:

Photoconductor:
Drum Charge:
Single-wire with grid wires (Negative Charge)
Reproduction Ratio:
1 : 1 (0.5%)
Exposure System:
Exposure Lamp:
Development:
Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410,

2 bags)
Toner Consumption:
Development Bias:
Negative

sensor
Paper Separation:
Cleaning:
Cleaning blade
A163
1-1
Overall Machine
Information
Configuration:
STM
Rev. 11/2000
Configuration:
Table top
Copy Process:
Original Feed:
Sheet feed
Original Skew
Tolerance:
Overall Machine
Information
1. SPECIFICATIONS
2 mm/400mm
Original Size:
Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm

Copy Size:
Copying Speed:
First Copy:
Warm-up Time:
Multi-Copy:
1 to 1 only
Automatic Reset:

Photoconductor:
Drum Charge:
Single-wire with grid plate (Negative Charge)
Reproduction Ratio:
1 : 1 (0.5%)
Exposure System:
Exposure Lamp:
Development:
Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410, 2

bags)
Toner Consumption:
Development Bias:
Negative

sensor
Paper Separation:
Cleaning:
Cleaning blade
FSM
1-1
A163

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A163/A251/A252 - 008
008
03/19/2002
03/19/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER - NA
RICOH FW740/FW750/FW760
SAVIN - NA
POWER PACK (C.G.B.)

!
PARTS
GENERAL:
The Power Pack (C.G.B.) part number has been changed as shown below. In addition, the shape of the
Power Pack has been modified to facilitate factory assembly.
The following part correction is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.
NEW PART NO.

AZ320099
DESCRIPTION
Power Pack C.G.B
QTY
1
INT
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
55
14
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A163/A251/A252 copiers manufactured after the Serial Numbers listed below will have the new style
Power Pack C.G.B installed during production.
MODEL NAME
Gestetner
Ricoh FW740
Ricoh FW750
Ricoh FW760
Savin
SERIAL NUMBER
NA
Service parts only
A7820010001
A7830010032
NA
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
Copyright 2002 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.
CONTROL NO 011WID
ELECTRICAL
OLD PART NO.

AZ320079

SUBJECT:

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A163/A251/A252 009
03/19/2002
03/19/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER - NA
RICOH FW740/FW750/FW760
SAVIN - NA
SPACER
!
PARTS

SUBJECT:
GENERAL:
Please add the following component, which was omitted from the Parts Catalog:
The following part addition is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.
Item 44 Spacer AA132097
OLD PART NO.
NEW PART NO.

AA132097
*DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
Spacer
QTY
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
19
44*
CONTROL NO 011WID

BULLETIN NUMBER:
A163/A251/A252 011
11/05/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER N/A
LANIER N/A
RICOH FW740/750/760
SAVIN N/A
SUBJECT:
LEFT AND RIGHT PAPER GUIDE
GENERAL:
NOTE: When replacing with the modified parts for the first time, they must be installed together as a set.
The following part update is being issued for all A163/A251/A252 Parts Catalogs.
Page 1 of 2
PARTS
Two additional paper guides (pawls) have been added to the Transfer/Separation Corona Unit to further
ensure that the copy paper does not come into contact with the corona wire if a jam occurs in this area. This
addition effectively decreases the space between each pawl.
Tech Service Bulletin No. A163/A251/A252 011
OLD PART NO.

A1633858
NEW PART NO.

B0473858
A1633857
B0473857
DESCRIPTION
Left Paper Guide
Guide: Paper: T&S Corona: Left
Right Paper Guide
Guide: Paper: T&S Corona: Right
QTY
2-0
0-2
2-0
0-2
INT
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
25
25
UNITS AFFECTED:
All A163/A251/A252 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style
Guides installed during production.
MODEL NAME
Ricoh FW740
Ricoh FW750
Ricoh FW760
SERIAL NUMBER
Service Parts Only
Service Parts Only
Service Parts Only
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
Page 2 of 2
8)',2-'%0#7)6:-')#&900)8-2
&900)8-2#291&)6U
%IKE#g#NNE
%440-'%&0)#13()0U
####+)78)82)6#h#2f%
####6-'3,#h#6300#*))()6#(14#*;KHN
####7%:-2#h#2f%
SMALL CAP
GENERAL:
PARTS

SUBJECT:
NMfEEfML
The chart listed below shows the Last Bulletin
Number issued for the A571 series.
Bulletin Cross Reference
Ricoh Group Companies
Last Bulletin No.
Gestetner
NA
Ricoh
5000
Savin
NA
The following part correction is being issued for the A571 Parts Section.
OLD PART NO.

A5717479
NEW PART NO.

A5717497
DESCRIPTION
Small Cap (A163 RIC/NRG)(A251/A252)
QTY
1
REFERENCE
PAGE
ITEM
3
19
CONTROL NO. 304

U
LGJgNNE
EEfNJfML
U

hf
h(14
KJN
hf
REAR COPY TRAY
n
GENERAL:
PARTS

SUBJECT:
The following parts updates are being issued for all A836 Parts Catalog Section.
OLD PART NO.

A8364465
A8364468
A1744493
NEW PART NO.

A86364469
DESCRIPTION
Rear Copy Tray Small (760S)
Rear Copy Tray Sheet Center
Copy Tray Sheet
QTY
6
10
20
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
3
16
3
19
3
20
CONTROL NO. 314

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B047/B048 001
02/07/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER NA
RICOH FW770/FW780
SAVIN NA
ORIGINAL FEED RIGHT PLATE AND FIBER OPTICS
GENERAL:
PARTS

SUBJECT:
The following parts corrections are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.
INCORRECT
PART NO.
A1636061
CORRECT
PART NO.
B0476061
DESCRIPTION
Original Feed Right Plate
Incorrect: Illustration and Part number

Index
12
25
25
Part number
A2521611
B0471630
B0481630
Description
Fiber Optics (B048)
Fiber Optics (B047)
Fiber Optics (B048)
QTY
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
9
23
Correct: Illustration and Part number

Index
12
12
Part number
Description
B0471640 Fiber Optics (B047)
B0481640 Fiber Optics (B048)
25
CONTROL NO 010WID

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B047/B048 - 002
07/15/2002
APPLICABLE MODEL:
MODEL:
GESTETNER - NA
RICOH FW770/FW780
SAVIN - NA
SERVICE MANUAL - INSERT
GENERAL:
An arrow has highlighted the revised areas .
PAGES:
4-25
Copyright
Jam Code Table (Updated Information).
SERVICE
MANUAL
The Service Manual pages listed below must be replaced with the pages supplied. Each bulletin package
contains 1 set of replacement pages.

SUBJECT:

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B047/B048 - 003
06/23/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER A040/A041
LANIER LW110/LW111
RICOH FW770/FW780
SAVIN 7700W/7800W
SUBJECT: TONER HOPPER JOINT SHAFT
GENERAL:
To ensure that the gear (AB017378) does not break when the toner cartridge is installed without being
shaken, the Toner Hopper Joint Shaft has been changed as shown below.
The following parts updates are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.
NOTE:
Make sure developer does not get into the joint shaft unit assembly when the developer is
replaced. If developer gets into the joint part, disassemble the unit and clean it immediately.
If the developer were to remain in the assembly, it would cause joint operation problems due to
excessive mechanical load and parts wear.
Toner Supply Unit Plate

E - Ring
Seal 22x52x0.5
Shaft Holder
Spring 10N
Toner Supply
Clutch
Left Side Plate
Joint Shaft Unit

Toner Hopper
Joint Shaft
Toner Hopper
Page 1 of 2
Tech Service Bulletin No. B047/B048 003
OLD PART NO.

AD001036
A1633147
NEW PART NO.

AD001047
B0473100
B0103211
B0103212
DESCRIPTION
Development Unit
Joint Shaft Toner Hopper
Joint Shaft Unit Toner Hopper
Seal 22x52x0.5
Spring 10N
QTY
1-1
1-0
0-1
0-1
0-1
INT
3/S
X/X
3/S
3/S
3/S
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
23
*
23
23
23
23
23
37*
23
38*
* DENOTES NEW ITEM NUMBER

NOTE:
The new parts cannot be installed in the old Development Unit (#AD001036), as the left side plate
has been changed (which is not available as a service part).
UNITS AFFECTED:
All B047/B048 copiers manufactured after the serial numbers listed below will have the new style parts
installed during production.
MODEL NAME
RICOH FW770
Gestetner A040
SAVIN 7700W
Lanier LW110
RICOH FW780
Gestetner A040
SAVIN 7800W
Lanier LW111
SERIAL NUMBER
H8630400001
H8730400001
0
1
3/S

2
NEW machines.
3
Page 2 of 2

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B047/B048 004
07/15/2003
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER A040/A041
LANIER LW110/LW111
RICOH FW770/FW780
SAVIN 7700W/7800W
SUBJECT: RECEIVING TRAY COVER
GENERAL:
Deleted: Items 104
OLD PART NO.

B0471331
04340082B
NEW PART NO.

-
DESCRIPTION
Receiving Tray Cover
Tapping Screw M4x8
QTY
10
n-3
INT
-
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
7
12
7
104
Page 1 of 1
PARTS
Deleted: Item 14 & Item 104
The Receiving Tray Cover item 14 was incorrectly listed in the B047/B048 Parts Catalog. Please delete
Items 14 and 104 from the parts list and the illustration as shown below. The following parts corrections
are being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.

BULLETIN NUMBER:
B047/B048 005
03/11/2004
APPLICABLE MODEL:
GESTETNER A040/A041
LANIER LW110/LW111
RICOH FW770/FW780
SAVIN 7700W/7800W
SUBJECT: FAN MOTOR HARNESS
PARTS
GENERAL:
The following part update is being issued for all B047/B048 Parts Catalogs.
PART NO.
A1744203
CORRECT DESCRIPTION
SEAL:FAN:HARNESS
INCORRECT DESCRIPTION
FAN MOTOR HARNESS
QTY
1
REFERENCE
PAGE ITEM
17
18
Page 1 of 1

Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

A163/A251/A252

RICOH GROUP COMPANIES

2000 RICOH Corporation. All rights reserved.

IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICES

HEALTH SAFETY CONDITIONS

OBSERVANCE OF ELECTRICAL SAFETY STANDARDS

SAFETY AND ECOLOGICAL NOTES FOR DISPOSAL

DETAILED SECTION DESCRIPTIONS

5. IMAGE TRANSFER AND PAPER SEPARATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

9. ROLL CUTTING RAIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

2. SERVICE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

3. SERVICE TOOLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8

4. JAM CODE LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

5. SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33

REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT

4. DRUM UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

4.4 CHARGE CORONA UNIT REMOVAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

6. T & S CORONA UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

8. COPY QUALITY ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38

2. SERVICE CALL CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

3. BLOWN FUSE TABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12

5. SERVICE TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

6. INSTALLATION PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9

OVERALL MACHINE INFORMATION

Electrostatic transfer system

Maximum: 914 x 2,000 (36" x 80")mm

Same as "Original Size"

3 cpm (A1/D sideways)

24 seconds (A1/D sideways)

Within 5 minutes (Room temperature 23oC)

2 minutes after copying is finished (can be set

Organic photoconductor drum

Single-wire with grid wires (Negative Charge)

Slit exposure via fiber optic array

Fluorescent lamp (26 W)

Dual-component dry toner system (Type 410,

Cartridge system (750g toner/cartridge)

1,860 A1 or D copies per cartridge (6% original)

Toner Density Control:

Direct toner density detection by induction

Image Density Adjustment:

Development bias control + exposure control

Dual wire ac corona and pick-off pawls

Manual feed (roll feeder optional)

Heat and pressure type, teflon (upper) and silicone

Nichrome wire lamp

11 codes, displayed in copy counter

115 V/60 Hz....15 A

1,080 x 570 x 490 mm

Optional Equipment and Machine Configuration

Other Optional Equipment

4. MECHANICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT

1. 1st Original Feed Roller

14. Roll Feeder

2. 1st Press Rollers

15. Paper Registration Rollers

16. Development Unit

17. Toner Cartridge

5. Fusing Exit Rollers

18. Manual Feed Table